Cities Index.
2. Public Hearing – Consideration of a Resolution Adopting the Piedmont Objective Design Standards; Introduction and First Reading of Ordinance 788 N.S. Amending the City Code Chapter 17, and Consideration of a Resolution Amending the Piedmont Design

Piedmont City Council
February 2, 2026

Document
2. Public Hearing – Consideration of a Resolution Adopting the Piedmont Objective Design Standards; Introduction and First Reading of Ordinance 788 N.S. Amending the City Code Chapter 17, and Consideration of a Resolution Amending the Piedmont Design
Meeting
February 2, 2026
Body
Piedmont City Council
Original file
64.6 MB
Text extracted from the city's file for reading and search. Open the original on piedmont.ca.gov. That file is the official record.

City of Piedmont

CITY COUNCIL AGENDA REPORT
DATE: February 2, 2026
TO: Mayor and Council
FROM: Rosanna Bayon Moore, City Administrator
SUBJECT: Public Hearing – Consideration of a Resolution Adopting the Piedmont Objective Design Standards; Introduction and First Reading of Ordinance 788 N.S. Amending the City Code Chapter 17, and Consideration of a Resolution Amending the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines.

RECOMMENDED ACTION
1) Adopt the attached Resolution, Attachment A, adopting the Objective Design Standards. 2) Approve the Introduction and First Reading of Attached Ordinance 788 N.S. (Attachment B), amending divisions 17.20 Zone A: Single Family Residential, 17.28 Zone E: Estate Residential, 17.30 Parking, 17.32 Fences; Trash Enclosures; Corner Obstructions, 17.34 Landscaping, 17.38 Accessory Dwelling Units, 17.46 Wireless Communication Facilities,

17.54 Urban Lot Splits and Two-Unit Housing Developments (SB 9), and 17.67 Ministerial Design Review Permit, to bring the City Code into compliance with the Objective Design Standards and updates clarifying maximum retaining wall height for SB 9 projects and clarifying locations where parking is prohibited on single family parcels in zones A and E. 3) Adopt the attached Resolution, Attachment C, recommending amendments to Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines that are related to the Objective Design Standards and updates modifying the list of projects that are exempt from needing a design review, amending the submittal checklist for all planning project types, and adding information related to water efficient landscape ordinance.
4) Find that the Objective Design Standards was studied under Environmental Impact Report (EIR) for the Housing Element Implementation Project (SCH 2022020362) in accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) and that the Resolutions and the Ordinance are exempt under CEQA Guidelines Sections 15061(b)(3), the common-sense exception that CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment and 15183, projects consistent with a community plan, general plan or zoning.

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Piedmont's 6th Cycle Housing Element, adopted in March 2023, requires additional work to implement key programs that establish and update objective design standards (ODS) to ensure that the City is able to retain control over development to the extent authorized under State law. While the City has already adopted ODS for accessory dwelling units and multi-family/mixed-use projects, the current effort focuses on developing ODS for one-to-four-unit residential developments in single-family zones (A and E) to streamline SB 9 projects (Housing Element Program 1.J) and updating existing standards for accessory dwelling units (ADUs) multifamily/mixed-use projects to expedite approvals under State laws, including SB 35 and SB 330 (Housing Element Program 4.M).

The primary objective of the ODS is to ensure that all ministerial projects involving new housing units conform to clear, non-subjective standards. In contrast, remodels of existing housing, commercial developments, and site features that do not result in new housing—such as fences, stand-alone accessory structures, exterior mechanical equipment, and signage—will continue to be regulated under the Piedmont Design Guidelines and remain subject to discretionary review.

This distinction ensures that while the City facilitates new housing production through an expedited ministerial process, the aesthetic and neighborhood character of existing structures is maintained through established review procedures. The standards would also not apply to commercial-only projects.

In August 2024, the City Council contracted Good City Company and its subconsultant, Van Meter Williams Pollack, to engage the community and prepare draft comprehensive ODS. Concurrently with the drafting of the ODS document, staff has prepared related updates to the Zoning Ordinance and the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. The Draft Zoning Ordinance update also includes some Code maintenance items, including a prohibition of vehicle parking on landscaped surfaces between a house and the street and clarifying the allowed height of retaining walls outside the 20-foot street yard setback for SB 9 projects. Finally, staff reviewed the current list in the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines for projects exempted from design review and recommends updates to improve and expedite service.

To facilitate public transparency and feedback, three Planning Commission study sessions were held between August and November 2025 to discuss the ODS document and associated code amendments. The draft ODS were subsequently made available for a formal public comment period from November 7 through December 7, 2025. This report provides a detailed summary of the ODS document, the proposed Code amendments, and a comprehensive overview of the public engagement process conducted throughout the project.

BACKGROUND
Objective Design Standards (ODS) are defined by State law as “standards that involve no personal or subjective judgment by a public official and are uniformly verifiable by reference to an external and uniform benchmark or criterion available and knowable by both the development applicant or proponent and the public official before submittal.” (Government Code section 65913.4(a)(C)(5).).

Agenda Report Page 2
Unlike traditional guidelines that use interpretive language—such as requiring a building to be "attractive" — objective standards use specific metrics, like a minimum square footage for an entryway, to ensure a predictable and streamlined review.

To implement these changes, the City is restructuring its regulatory documents, and this item implements these changes. Existing standards for ADUs and multifamily housing will be moved into a new "Piedmont Objective Design Standards" document, while the current "Design Standards and Guidelines" will be renamed back to "Piedmont Design Guidelines." This update also incorporates necessary adjustments to the Zoning Ordinance and addresses recent changes in state law, such as allowing for two-story ADUs and ADUs in street yard setbacks. In addition to compliance with State laws, the ultimate goal is to provide clear expectations for applicants, ensure new developments remain compatible with Piedmont’s historic character, and facilitate housing production without imposing excessive costs on homeowners.

ODS Subcommittee
On August 12, 2024, the Planning Commission appointed Commissioners Aradhana Jajodia and Julie Ortiz to an Ad Hoc Subcommittee (ODS Subcommittee). Starting September 18, 2024, the ODS Subcommittee has met ten times to discuss the City’s approach to drafting the standards, discuss the communitywide survey, review public engagement plans, review and provide feedback on the preliminary draft objective standards, review the public review draft of the ODS document, and finally review the public comments received and recommend revisions in response to the public comments. During the regular meetings of the Planning Commission, the ODS Subcommittee has verbally updated the Planning Commission and the public on the Project’s progress. The ODS Subcommittee recommended that the Planning Commission recommend that the City Council adopt the Piedmont ODS. The subcommittee will be dissolved after the adoption of the Piedmont ODS by the City Council.

Starting in August 2025 the Planning Commission held three study sessions reviewing and discussing each chapter of the draft ODS, the amendments proposed to the City Code, and the proposed revisions to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines.

DRAFT PIEDMONT OBJECTIVE DESIGN STANDARDS
The Piedmont Objective Design Standards (ODS) are organized into five chapters that cover administrative procedures, 1–4-unit residential developments, ADUs, multifamily/mixed-use projects, and specific definitions. To ensure high-quality development that integrates with the community, chapters 2 through 4 categorize requirements into site organization and building design, utilizing a consistent format that distinguishes between mandatory, quantifiable "Standards" and non-enforceable "Guidelines." Rather than enforcing rigid architectural styles, the document adopts a flexible, non-prescriptive approach intended to accommodate Piedmont’s diverse aesthetic character and prevent "cookie-cutter" results. Ultimately, this structure provides clear objective standards for the ministerial review process, ensuring that housing developments— from SB 9 duplexes to larger multifamily projects—align with the City’s established neighborhood context.

Agenda Report Page 3
The Draft Piedmont Objective Design Standards can be found at the end of this report, Exhibit A of Attachment A.

Based on the public comments received and an internal review of the posted draft ODS, staff recommends revisions to the Draft ODS, as summarized below:

1. Section 2.10.3 Plants (agenda report page 57): This section provides objective standards for plant sizes, spacing, species, location and amount of landscape coverage for 1-4-unit developments. In response to the public comments, staff and the ODS subcommittee recommend that the language describing the type of planting allowed be revised from native, low water usage and meeting Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance to plants that are climate appropriate to avoid being too restrictive and offer flexibility in plant selection. See revised language below:
“S.2.10.3.b Plant species shall be native, low-water usage, and low maintenance, meeting Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance requirements be selected from the East Bay Municipal Utility District (EBMUD) document Plants and Landscapes for Summer Dry Climates (as may be amended from time to time).”

2. Section 5.1 Definitions (agenda report page 159): Currently, the definition of “Landscape/Landscaping” includes hardscape materials such as gravel. In contrast, Chapter 17 (Planning and Land Use) of the City’s Zoning Ordinance excludes hardscape, defining landscaping only as areas capable of supporting live plant growth. To ensure internal consistency and address public comments, staff and the ODS subcommittee recommend revising the ODS definition to align with the Zoning Ordinance. See revised language below:
“Landscape/Landscaping. Pervious areas containing organic and inorganic elements. It includes but is not limited to xeriscaping, soft landscape (organic elements such as plants, soil, mulch, trees, shrubs), and hard landscape (inorganic elements such as rocks, pathways, and bricks). The planting, irrigation, and maintenance of land with living plant and other organic materials.”

3. Section 1.5.2.1 (agenda report page 32): Section 1.5.2 outlines submittal requirements for 1– 4-unit projects, including the mandate for a Site Survey and Topographic Map. Currently, these must be prepared within 12 months of submission. In response to public comments, staff and the ODS subcommittee recommend extending this validity period to 36 months. This change aligns with industry best practices and provides greater flexibility for project development timelines. See revised language below:
“S.1.5.2.1. Site Survey and Topographic Map (preferred scale 1/8”) Provide a survey and topographic map, prepared within the last 12 36 months, accurately showing contours and other features of the existing terrain within the subdivision or parcel, existing drainage channels, roads, culverts, overhead and underground utility lines and Agenda Report Page 4
structures (Sewer, Gas, Water, Electric) which affect the design of the subdivision or parcel, wells and springs, structures, retaining walls, show building wall outlines, show spot grade elevations at building corners, show existing floor elevations; show existing roof eave and roof peak elevations; show easements; provide contour lines at a minimum of 2 ft. intervals, significant trees with a minimum of 12” trunk diameter, irrigation ditches, utility poles, other improvements in their correct location, and provide a north arrow. Elevations shall be in accord with U. S. Geological Survey (1929 Sea Level datum.) The map shall be drawn to an engineer’s scale large enough to show all information clearly.”

4. Section 2.19.3 (agenda report page 70): This section defines standards for wood and fiber cement siding, covering both horizontal and vertical profiles such as shingles, shiplap, and board and batten. It requires a minimum 6-inch exposure for boards, uniform spacing for vertical layouts, and mandates that all materials be factory-finished or fully treated on all six sides. Based on public comment, staff and ODS Subcommittee recommend deleting the 6-inch requirement for board siding in this standard as in present day the siding thickness can vary anywhere between 3-6 inches and new application techniques are continually developed. See revised language below:
“S.2.19.3 Wood and Fiber Cement Siding
Wood siding includes horizontal siding consisting of shakes, shingles, shiplap, tongue and groove, v-groove, or lapped profiles in wood or materials that emulate wood such as fiber cement. Vertical siding includes board and batten or v-groove profiles in wood or materials that emulate wood such as fiber cement.
• Board siding materials shall provide a minimum exposure of 6 inches. • Board Siding Materials shall either be factory finished; or stained or primed and painted on all six sides.
• Vertical board or board and batten siding should be detailed with uniform exposure widths.”

5. Section 2.7.4, Section 3.2.5 and Figure 3.2.4 (agenda report pages 51 & 78): These sections establish standards for fire-safe landscaping and fencing for ADUs and 1–4-unit developments.

While they previously required projects to meet Zone Zero (0–5 ft ember-resistant zone) standards, staff and the Fire Chief now recommend eliminating this requirement. This change follows the City’s reclassification out of the High Fire Hazard Severity Zone and aligns the ODS with the recently adopted Building Code, which no longer mandates Zone Zero compliance. See revised language below:
“S.2.7.4 Side and Rear Yard Fencing
Fencing up to 6 feet in height is allowed outside the street yard setback, provided portions closer 5 feet or closer to the building are made of noncombustible materials (as defined in the California Building Code) meets the fire safe vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshal and as specified in the Wildland Urban Interface Fire Code, Part 7 of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations.” Agenda Report Page 5
“S.3.2.5 Fire Safe Landscaping and Fencing
Construction of any ADU or JADU shall be designed to meet fire safe vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshal. This includes (but is not limited to) eliminating vegetation and/or wooden fencing within 5 feet of all sides of the structure. Construction of any ADU or JADU shall be designed to meet the fire safe vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshal and as specified in the Wildland Urban Interface Fire Code, Part 7 of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations.”

6. Chapter 2.4 Building Access and Entrance Design (agenda report pages 45 & 64): The ODS subcommittee noted that Section 2.4 and Section 2.15 share identical titles ("Building Access and Entrance Design") and similar purpose statements, which may cause confusion. To differentiate them, staff recommends refocusing Section 2.4 on site planning (access and visibility from the public realm) and Section 2.15 on architectural design (the physical treatment of the entrance). Additionally, Figure 2.4.1 should be moved to Section 2.15 to better illustrate building design, while a new image depicting site access and entrance orientation should be added to Section 2.4. Finally, this Section 2.4 title change will also be reflected in the document’s Table of Content. See revisions below:
“2.4 Building Site Access and Entrance Visibility Design

PURPOSE
Well-designed and easily accessible building entrances perform a key role in the overall design and character of neighborhoods.

Entrances visible from the street help to animate neighborhoods and make them safe and walkable. Building entrances include doorways and elements such as stoops stairways, landings, and porches. They add visual interest to the building and streetscape.

Well-designed site access ensures that entrances and access points are clearly visible, easily identifiable, and safely accessible from the public street. New development should promote intuitive pedestrian access, enhance safety and wayfinding, and reinforce a residential streetscape by orienting building entries toward the street or other clearly defined common access areas.”
“2.15 Building Access and Entrance Design
Figure 2.15.1 Primary building entrances must include weather protection, such as a covered porch.”
The above-referenced recommended revisions will be brought forward with the draft ODS as one recommendation to the City Council and would be incorporated into the ODS after a decision by Agenda Report Page 6
the City Council is made.

ZONING ORDINANCE AMENDMENTS
Provided below is a bullet list of all proposed amendments to the Zoning Ordinance, Chapter 17 Planning and Land Use for the purpose of achieving consistency with the ODS, and to reflect state law. A detailed description of these changes can be found in the January 12, 2026 Planning Commission staff report linked here. A redlined version of the edits is included as Attachment E to this report.
• Allowing retaining walls and structures up to 8 feet tall in the 20-foot setback to support pedestrian and vehicular access
• Allowing tandem parking for an SB 9 unit
• Allowing shared parking for mixed-use developments
• Allowing parking in the street yard setback for multifamily and mixed-use developments in Zones C and D
• Allowing fences up to 8 feet tall in Zones C and D under certain circumstances • Excluding multifamily development projects from landscaping all of the street setback areas.
• Replacing the text “Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines” with “Piedmont Design Guidelines” and “Piedmont Objective Design Standards” where applicable because the objective standards from Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines are proposed to be moved (and updated) to a new document. Moving forward the “Piedmont Objective Design Standards” will be used to review ministerial projects and renamed “Piedmont Design Guidelines” will be used to review projects that are discretionary in nature. • Specifying the corresponding new ODS section numbers where applicable due to the Draft ODS now housing pre-approved ADU prototype plans and objective standards for SB 9 development.

In addition there are two amendments recommended by staff to provide more clarity for homeowners:
• For single-family development, prohibiting parking of vehicles between the street facing façade and front property line in Zones A and E with certain exceptions. • Allowing retaining walls up to 5 feet tall outside the street yard setback for SB 9 projects.

DESIGN STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES AMENDMENTS
Provided below is an outline of the draft revisions to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines, including revising the document title to Piedmont Design Guidelines and other changes. A detailed description of these changes can be found in the January 12, 2026 Planning Commission staff report linked here. A redlined version of the edits is included as Exhibit AAttachment C, at the end of this report.

Agenda Report Page 7
• Removing ADU standards and placing them in the Piedmont ODS document with updates made to reflect recent state regulations.
• Removing Multi-family and Mixed-Use development standards and placing them in the Piedmont ODS with updates made where needed.
• Removing Appendix A- Pre Approved ADU plans and placing them in the Piedmont ODS document.
• Updating the list of projects that are exempt from needing a design review (planning permit).
• Updating the application submittal checklist for most planning permit types to reflect recent change sin City’s General Plan and to comply with new State laws. • Updating the permitting process to reflect the City’s new online permitting systemeTRAKiT. • Adding some guidelines related to the California Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance (WELO) to provide applicants with better information.
• Revising a design guideline (3.09.01) for front yard enclosure to include the content of General Plan Design and Preservation Element Policy 29.3 that will augment the guidelines for fences in front yards.

CALIFORNIA ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY ANALYSIS (CEQA REVIEW) On February 20, 2024, the City of Piedmont adopted a program-level Environmental Impact Report (EIR) for the Housing Element Implementation Project (SCH 2022020362) in accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA). The proposed amendments to Piedmont City Code Chapter 17 are consistent with and fall within the scope of this adopted Housing Element Implementation EIR. The EIR comprehensively analyzed the potential environmental impacts of implementing Housing Element programs, including Program 4.M (Facilitating Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards) and Program 1.J (SB 9 Facilitation Amendments), both of which are directly addressed by these code amendments.

Furthermore, the consideration of Objective Design Standards and related amendments to the City Code and Design Guidelines are exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15061(b)(3), the common-sense exception that CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment and 15183, projects consistent with a community plan, general plan or zoning. The other amendments including clarifying the maximum retaining wall height for SB 9 projects and updating the locations where parking is prohibited on single family residential properties in Zone A and E are also exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15601(b)(3), the commonsense exception that the proposed amendments are aesthetic in nature, do not increase development capacity, and do not authorize any specific development. Future projects will still be subject to site-specific environmental review where applicable.

Agenda Report Page 8

CITY CHARTER
The proposed modifications to the City Code are in conformance with the City Charter, including section 9.02. No zones are proposed to be reduced or enlarged, and no zones are proposed to be reclassified. City Charter provisions are expressly referred to in City Code division 17.02.C.

FISCAL IMPACT
If adopted by City Council, the proposed revisions and the new Piedmont Objective Design Standard document are not expected to result in a fiscal impact. The development of the ODS was included in the Department budget 2024-2025 and no further cost is anticipated. The proposed amendments to the City Code are a routine component of project review and approval administered by the Planning & Building Department, which collects fees established in the Master Fee Schedule to help cover the costs of the services provided. Cities are obligated to expend resources needed to regulate development in compliance with both local goals and State law. City staff will develop any new application materials using existing resources and personnel.

CITY ATTORNEY REVIEW
The draft ODS and proposed amendments to the Zoning Ordinance and Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines have been reviewed by the City Attorney.

PUBLIC PARTICIPATION
The public engagement process was robust and multi-faceted, successfully leveraging several channels to gather community input on the ODS. This comprehensive approach, which included both in-person and digital platforms, significantly informed and shaped the final Draft ODS posted for public review and comment and presented for the Commission's consideration. • Planning Commission Study Sessions: These sessions provided valuable opportunities for verbal public comments, which were directly incorporated into the Draft ODS. (list dates)
• Community-Wide Survey: The community-wide survey prior to the preparation of the Draft ODS was instrumental in guiding the draft's revisions. • Dedicated Online Presence: A project-specific webpage, accessible at https://piedmont.ca.gov/services___departments/planning___building/general_plan___ot her_policy_documents/objective_design_standards_for_1-4_unit_buildings, served as the central hub for periodic updates, meeting details, and public comment opportunities. • Targeted Outreach: Postcards were sent to all homes within the City limits to notify the community about the two Open Houses held for the Project, ensuring broad awareness. • Digital Communication: Periodic updates were emailed to subscribers via the Planning & Building Newsletter throughout the Project's development, maintaining continuous communication.
• Written Comments: Written feedback received following the posting of draft ODS informed some of the recommended revisions discussed tonight. Written public comments Agenda Report Page 9
received are attached at the end of this report, Attachment D. • Public Hearing Notification: A public hearing notice for this agenda item was officially posted on December 12, 2025.

The community continues to have the opportunity to directly address the City Council during meetings related to the adoption of the recommended code changes.

PLANNING COMMISSION DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATION
On January 12, 2026, the Planning Commission held a public hearing to consider the adoption of the Objective Design Standards, along with proposed amendments to the Zoning Ordinance and the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. The project’s consultant team delivered a presentation outlining the documents before the Commission, and four community members addressed the Commission during the meeting. Following public testimony, Commissioner Yee noted that the City, like all other jurisdictions in California, is required to comply with State laws, including those governing ADUs and SB 9—which primarily mandate ministerial review without subjectivity. Commissioner Yee emphasized that the ODS currently under consideration represents a foundational step in balancing State mandates with the Piedmont community’s desire for local design sensitivity. The development of the ODS utilized the existing Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines as a baseline, converting them into objective standards to the greatest extent possible. Director Jackson added that the ODS is a living document that is expected to be revised in the future when implementation identifies the need for improvement.

After careful consideration of the presented documents and public testimony, the Commission unanimously recommended that the City Council adopt the proposed ODS with changes as noted in the Resolution, proposed amendments to the Zoning Ordinance and proposed amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. The meeting video is linked at the end of this staff report.

CONCLUSION AND NEXT STEPS
The development of the Objective Design Standards for 1-4-unit residential buildings, alongside critical updates to the existing ADU, multi-family, mixed-use objective design standards and related City Code, represent the successful implementation of key programs mandated by Piedmont's Housing Element. This comprehensive, two-year effort – guided by rigorous research, expert consultation, and extensive public engagement – culminates in a unified ODS document designed to achieve dual objectives: complying with State streamlining requirements for housing production while preserving Piedmont's high-quality residential character through clear, measurable, and predictable design criteria.

Staff recommends that the City Council receive Planning Commission’s recommendation and adopt the Objective Design Standards, Ordinance 788 N.S. amending City Code Chapter 17, Planning and Land Use, and the amendments to Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. The tentative date for the second reading of Ordinance 788 N.S, by the City Council is Tuesday, Agenda Report Page 10
February 17, 2026. The City Council is the decision-making body. The ODS and the Piedmont Design Guidelines would become effective on February 2, 2026, and the Ordinance 788 N.S. would become effective 30 days after the second reading.

Report By: Kevin Jackson, Director Planning & Building
Gopika Nair, Senior Planner

ATTACHMENTS AND RELEVANT DOCUMENTS
Pages
A 12-162 Resolution adopting the Objective Design Standards B 162-180 Ordinance 788 N.S.

C 181-183 Resolution adopting the amendments to Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines
D 184-190 Written Public Comments
F 246-275 Slide Deck- Council Hearing
LINKS TO RELEVANT DOCUMENTS:

Piedmont City Code Chapter 17, Planning and Land Use:
https://piedmont.ca.gov/government/charter___city_code
6th Cycle Housing Element:
https://piedmont.ca.gov/services___departments/planning___building/general_plan___other_poli cy_documents/general_plan
6th Cycle Housing Element Environmental Impact Report:
https://piedmont.ca.gov/cms/One.aspx?portalId=13659823&pageId=14125320 Existing Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines:
https://piedmont.ca.gov/services___departments/planning___building/about_planning_/design_st andards_and_guidelines
Draft Objective Design Standards- Public Review Draft Posted on November 7, 2025:
https://piedmont.ca.gov/services___departments/planning___building/general_plan___other_poli cy_documents/objective_design_standards_for_1-4_unit_buildings January 12, 2026, Planning Commission Public Hearing Meeting Video:
https://piedmont.granicus.com/player/clip/3125?view_id=9&redirect=true Agenda Report Page 11
E 191-245 Redline Edits of the Zoning Ordinance

ATTACHMENT A
RESOLUTION No. _____

A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PIEDMONT

ADOPTING OBJECTIVE DESIGN STANDARDS FOR ACCESSORY DWELLING

UNITS, ONE-TO-FOUR UNIT RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENTS, MULTIFAMILY

DEVLEOPMENTS AND MIXED-USE DEVELOPMENTS
WHEREAS, Piedmont's 6th Cycle Housing Element, adopted in March 2023, requires additional work to implement key programs that establish and update objective design standards (ODS) to comply with state housing mandates. While the City has already adopted ODS for accessory dwelling units and multi-family/mixed-use projects, the ongoing effort focuses on developing ODS for one-to-four-unit residential developments in single-family zones (A and E) to streamline SB 9 projects (Housing Element Program 1.J) and updating existing standards for accessory dwelling units (ADUs) multi-family/mixed-use projects to expedite approvals under state laws like SB 35 and SB 330 (Housing Element Program 4.M); and WHEREAS, in August 2024, the City Council contracted Good City Company and its subconsultant, Van Meter Williams Pollack, to engage the community and prepare draft comprehensive ODS; and
WHEREAS, on August 12, 2024, the Planning Commission appointed Commissioners Aradhana Jajodia and Julie Ortiz to an Ad Hoc Subcommittee (ODS Subcommittee). In September 2025 Commissioner Thomas Yee replaced Commissioner Jajodia on the Subcommittee. The Subcommittee’s role was to collaborate with staff and consultants to develop draft objective design standards for one-to-four-unit residential buildings and update the City’s objective design standards for accessory dwelling units and multi-family and mixed-use buildings. Starting September 18, 2024, the ODS Subcommittee has met ten times to discuss the City’s approach to drafting the standards, discuss the communitywide survey, review public engagement plans, provide feedback on the preliminary draft objective standards, review the public review draft of the ODS document, and finally review the public comments received and discuss any related changes. During the regular meetings of the Planning Commission, the ODS Subcommittee has verbally updated the Planning Commission and the public on the Project’s progress. The subcommittee will be dissolved after the adoption of the Piedmont ODS; and WHEREAS, State law defines objective standards as those that are measurable and verifiable, requiring no subjective judgment from public officials; and WHEREAS, since 2020, ADU laws have changed significantly, prompting staff to reevaluate current standards. These changes include allowing for taller 2-story ADUs and ADUs in the 20-foot street yard setback. Staff has processed several ADU and JADU applications since 2020 and have found it necessary to clarify certain existing standards. The recommended updates standardize recurring practices, such as the installation of at least one heat pump and exterior water heater, the installation of roof-mounted skylights, and other necessary modifications to the objective standards for ADUs. Although staff has not yet processed any multi-family, commercial, Agenda Report Page 12

ATTACHMENT A
or mixed-use development projects using the current objective design standards, several areas for improvement and clarification have been identified; and WHEREAS, the proposed objective design standards serve to streamline the review of the following eligible development applications: 1-4 Unit Residential Developments, Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs) and Junior Accessory Dwelling Units (JADUs), Multifamily Residential Developments, and Mixed-Use Residential Developments. The proposed Objective Design Standards are not applicable to the following development applications: single-family house remodels/additions unrelated to the development of a new housing unit and commercial developments that do not include residential units; and WHEREAS, the overall goal of the updated standards is to provide clear guidance and design expectations to applicants, staff, and decision-makers while ensuring new multi-unit housing is designed to be sensitive and compatible with existing architecture, historic resources, streetscapes, and neighborhoods. Additionally, these standards aim to ensure that objective design requirements do not impose excessive costs on homeowners and instead facilitate housing production and affordability, all while maintaining consistent formatting throughout the document; and
WHEREAS, beginning in September 2024, the City introduced the project and sought community engagement through a series of events and opportunities starting with the Harvest Festival. This was followed by a stakeholder meeting on December 3, 2024, and a public open house on February 12, 2025. The project was later featured at the Piedmont Food Festival on April 19, 2025, which coincided with a community-wide survey conducted from April through June 2025. A second open house took place on August 21, 2025, leading into a series of Planning Commission study sessions held from August to November 2025 to discuss each ODS chapter and related amendments to City Code and Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. These events and the survey explored key themes related to neighborhood design and development, allowing the community to provide input on topics such as neighborhood character, preferred architectural styles and elements, the impact of new development on neighboring properties, the architectural consistency of ADUs, and the importance of landscaping, all of which informed the standards in the ODS document; and
WHEREAS, the draft ODS was made available for public review and comment from November 7 through December 7, 2025; and
WHEREAS, on January 12, 2026, the Piedmont Planning Commission held a duly noticed public hearing at which time it reviewed the Draft Objective Design Standards, related amendments to City Code and Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines, the staff report and all attachments, and oral and written public comments; and
WHEREAS, Section 25.3 of the Piedmont City Code outlines the powers and duties of the Planning Commission including to consider and make recommendations to the City Council on real property, subdivisions, lot building restrictions, planning and zoning matters, matters affecting the design and aesthetics of buildings, structures and other improvements and methods of Agenda Report Page 13

ATTACHMENT A
encouraging and promoting good design in construction in order to maintain the high quality of aesthetic values which make the City unique; and
WHEREAS, the January 12, 2026, public hearing met the requirements of Government Code Sections 65090 et. seq., 65453 and 65353, and City Code division 17.62; and NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED that, after reviewing the revised document, staff report, and all documents and public testimony received, the City Council of the City of Piedmont does hereby resolve, declare, determine and order as follows:

SECTION 1. The City Council finds that:

1. The facts set forth in the recitals in this Resolution are true and correct and herby incorporated by this reference;

2. The recitals constitute findings in this matter and, together with the staff report, and other written reports, public testimony and other information contained in the records, are an adequate and appropriate evidentiary basis for the actions taken in this Resolution;

3. The provisions in this Resolution, as adopted, are consistent with General Plan Policies Policy 1.3 Harmonious Development, Policy 1.7 Incentives for Affordable Accessory Dwelling Units, Policy 1.9 Implement Housing Element, Policy 2.2 Mixed Use Development, Policy 2.4 Parking, Policy 6.4 Community Input, Policy 11.4 Shared Parking, Policy 13.1 Respecting Natural Terrain, Policy 14.5 Landscaping, Policy 19.3 New Development Siting, Policy 19.12 Fire Safe Regulations, 19.20 Emergency Access, Policy 29.7 Signs, Policy 28.1 Scale, Height and Bulk Compatibility, Policy 28.7 Hillside Home Design, Policy 28.10 Multifamily Design, Policy 29.5 Fence and Wall Design, Policy 29.6 Retaining Walls, Policy 29.7 Driveway and Parking Location, Policy 29.8 Exterior Lighting, Policy 1.J SB 9 Facilitation Amendments and Policy 4.M Facilitate Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards; the proposed Objective Design Standards and staff recommended updates to implement best and current practices; and

4. This Resolution will not be detrimental to the public interest, health, safety, convenience or welfare.

SECTION 2. On February 20, 2024, the City of Piedmont adopted a program-level Environmental Impact Report (EIR) for the Housing Element Implementation Project (SCH 2022020362) in accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA). The proposed amendments to Piedmont City Code Chapter 17 are consistent with and fall within the scope of this adopted Housing Element Implementation EIR. The EIR comprehensively analyzed the potential environmental impacts of implementing Housing Element programs, including Program

4.M (Facilitating Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards) and Program 1.J (SB 9 Facilitation Amendments), both of which are directly addressed by these code amendments. Furthermore, the consideration of Objective Design Standards and related amendments to the City Code and Design Guidelines are exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15061(b)(3), the common-sense exception that Agenda Report Page 14

ATTACHMENT A
CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment and 15183, projects consistent with a community plan, general plan or zoning. Other amendments including clarifying the maximum retaining wall height for SB 9 projects and updating the locations where parking is prohibited on single family residential properties in Zone A and E are also exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15601(b)(3), the common-sense exception that the proposed amendments are aesthetic in nature, do not increase development capacity, and do not authorize any specific development. Future projects will still be subject to site-specific environmental review.

SECTION 3. Revisions to Objective Design Standards [Exhibit A] A. The City Council recommends the following changes to the text of the Objective Design Standards:

1. Section 2.10.3 Plants (agenda report page 57): This section provides objective standards for plant sizes, spacing, species, location and amount of landscape coverage for 1-4-unit developments. In response to the public comments, staff and the ODS subcommittee recommends that the language describing the type of planting allowed be revised from native, low water usage and meeting Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance to plants that are climate appropriate to avoid being too restrictive and offer flexibility in plant selection. See revised language below:
“S.2.10.3.b Plant species shall be native, low-water usage, and low maintenance, meeting Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance requirements be selected from the East Bay Municipal Utility District (EBMUD) document Plants and Landscapes for Summer Dry Climates (as may be amended from time to time).”

2. Section 5.1 Definitions (agenda report page 159): Currently, the definition of “Landscape/Landscaping” includes hardscape materials such as gravel. In contrast, Chapter 17 (Planning and Land Use) of the City’s Zoning Ordinance excludes hardscape, defining landscaping only as areas capable of supporting live plant growth.

To ensure internal consistency and address public comments, staff and the ODS subcommittee recommend revising the ODS definition to align with the Zoning Ordinance. See revised language below:
“Landscape/Landscaping. Pervious areas containing organic and inorganic elements.

It includes but is not limited to xeriscaping, soft landscape (organic elements such as plants, soil, mulch, trees, shrubs), and hard landscape (inorganic elements such as rocks, pathways, and bricks). The planting, irrigation, and maintenance of land with living plant and other organic materials.”

3. Section 1.5.2.1 (agenda report page 32): Section 1.5.2 outlines submittal requirements for 1–4-unit projects, including the mandate for a Site Survey and Topographic Map.

Currently, these must be prepared within 12 months of submission. In response to public comments, staff and the ODS subcommittee recommend extending this validity Agenda Report Page 15

ATTACHMENT A
period to 36 months. This change aligns with industry best practices and provides greater flexibility for project development timelines. See revised language below:
“S.1.5.2.1. Site Survey and Topographic Map (preferred scale 1/8”) Provide a survey and topographic map, prepared within the last 12 36 months, accurately showing contours and other features of the existing terrain within the subdivision or parcel, existing drainage channels, roads, culverts, overhead and underground utility lines and structures (Sewer, Gas, Water, Electric) which affect the design of the subdivision or parcel, wells and springs, structures, retaining walls, show building wall outlines, show spot grade elevations at building corners, show existing floor elevations; show existing roof eave and roof peak elevations; show easements; provide contour lines at a minimum of 2 ft. intervals, significant trees with a minimum of 12” trunk diameter, irrigation ditches, utility poles, other improvements in their correct location, and provide a north arrow. Elevations shall be in accord with U. S.

Geological Survey (1929 Sea Level datum.) The map shall be drawn to an engineer’s scale large enough to show all information clearly.”

4. Section 2.19.3 (agenda report page 70): This section defines standards for wood and fiber cement siding, covering both horizontal and vertical profiles such as shingles, shiplap, and board and batten. It requires a minimum 6-inch exposure for boards, uniform spacing for vertical layouts, and mandates that all materials be factory-finished or fully treated on all six sides. Based on public comment, staff and ODS Subcommittee recommend deleting the 6-inch requirement for board siding in this standard as in present day the siding thickness can vary anywhere between 3-6 inches and new application techniques are continually developed. See revised language below:
“S.2.19.3 Wood and Fiber Cement Siding
Wood siding includes horizontal siding consisting of shakes, shingles, shiplap, tongue and groove, v-groove, or lapped profiles in wood or materials that emulate wood such as fiber cement. Vertical siding includes board and batten or v-groove profiles in wood or materials that emulate wood such as fiber cement.
• Board siding materials shall provide a minimum exposure of 6 inches. • Board Siding Materials shall either be factory finished; or stained or primed and painted on all six sides.
• Vertical board or board and batten siding should be detailed with uniform exposure widths.”

5. Section 2.7.4, Section 3.2.5 and Figure 3.2.4 (agenda report pages 51 & 78): These sections establish standards for fire-safe landscaping and fencing for ADUs and 1–4- unit developments. While they previously required projects to meet Zone Zero (0–5 ft ember-resistant zone) standards, staff and the Fire Chief now recommend eliminating this requirement. This change follows the City’s reclassification out of the High Fire Hazard Severity Zone and aligns the ODS with the recently adopted Building Code, which no longer mandates Zone Zero compliance. See revised language below:

Agenda Report Page 16

ATTACHMENT A
“S.2.7.4 Side and Rear Yard Fencing
Fencing up to 6 feet in height is allowed outside the street yard setback, provided portions closer 5 feet or closer to the building are made of noncombustible materials (as defined in the California Building Code) meets the fire safe vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshall and as specified in the Wildland Urban Interface Fire Code, Part 7 of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations.”
“S.3.2.5 Fire Safe Landscaping and Fencing
Construction of any ADU or JADU shall be designed to meet fire safe vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshal. This includes (but is not limited to) eliminating vegetation and/or wooden fencing within 5 feet of all sides of the structure. Construction of any ADU or JADU shall be designed to meet the fire safe vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshal and as specified in the Wildland Urban Interface Fire Code, Part 7 of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations.”

6. Chapter 2.4 Building Access and Entrance Design (agenda report pages 45 & 64): The ODS subcommittee noted that Section 2.4 and Section 2.15 share identical titles ("Building Access and Entrance Design") and similar purpose statements, which may cause confusion. To differentiate them, staff recommends refocusing Section 2.4 on site planning (access and visibility from the public realm) and Section 2.15 on architectural design (the physical treatment of the entrance). Additionally, Figure 2.4.1 should be moved to Section 2.15 to better illustrate building design, while a new image depicting site access and entrance orientation should be added to Section 2.4. Finally, this Section 2.4 title change will also be reflected in the document’s Table of Content.

See revisions below:
“2.4 Building Site Access and Entrance Visibility Design

PURPOSE
Well-designed and easily accessible building entrances perform a key role in the overall design and character of neighborhoods.

Entrances visible from the street help to animate neighborhoods and make them safe and walkable. Building entrances include doorways and elements such as stoops stairways, landings, and porches. They add visual interest to the building and streetscape.

Well-designed site access ensures that entrances and access points are clearly visible, easily identifiable, and safely accessible from the public street. New development should promote intuitive pedestrian access, enhance safety and Agenda Report Page 17

ATTACHMENT A
wayfinding, and reinforce a residential streetscape by orienting building entries toward the street or other clearly defined common access areas.” “2.15 Building Access and Entrance Design
Figure 2.15.1 Primary building entrances must include weather protection, such as a covered porch.”
B. The City Council hereby approves the Objective Design Standards, attached as Exhibit A, and with the changes described in Section 3.A above.

SECTION 4. All portions of this resolution are severable. If an individual component of this Resolution is adjudged by a court to be invalid and unenforceable, then the remaining portions will continue in effect.
[END OF DOCUMENT]
Agenda Report Page 18
DRAFT City of Piedmont
Objective Design Standards
1-4 Unit Residential Developments
Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs)
Multifamily Residential Developments
Mixed Use Residential Developments

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT
November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 19
2 Piedmont Objective Design Standards PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025

CITY OF PIEDMONT
City Council
Betsy Smegal Andersen, Mayor
Vice Mayor Conna McCarthy, Vice Mayor
Jennifer Long
Lorrel Plimier
Tom Ramsey
Jennifer Cavenaugh, Mayor 2023-2024
Planning Commission
Julie Ortiz, ODS Subcommitee Member
Thomas Yee, ODS Subcommitee Member
Wayne Rowland, PC Chair
Raffi Zaroukian
Mike Beuselinck
John Cooper
Aradhana Jajodia, 2024-2025
Justin Zucker, 2023-2025
Rani Batra, 2020-2025
Acknowledgments
Contributing City Staff
Rosanna Bayon Moore, City Administrator
Kevin Jackson, Director of Planning & Building
Pierce Macdonald, Senior Planner
Gopika Nair, Senior Planner
Paki Muthig, Building Official
Dave Brannigan, Fire Chief
John Wanger, PE, City Engineer
Echa Schneider, Communications Program Manager
Anna Brown, City Clerk
Michelle Marchetta Kenyon, City Attorney
Deepa Sharma, Assistant City Attorney
Consulting Team
Aaron Aknin, Good City Company
Kevin Gardiner, Good City Company
Nicholas Hamilton, Good City Company
Karen Murray, Van Meter Williams Pollack
Ruchira Guar, Van Meter Williams Pollack
Preeti Srinivasan Van Meter Williams Pollack
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 20
3 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3 How to use this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.4 Ministerial Design Review Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.5 Design Review Submittal Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 1-4 RESIDENTIAL UNIT DEVELOPMENTS

2.1 Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.2 Urban Lot Splits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3 Site Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.4 Building Access and Entrance Design . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.5 Vehicular Access and Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.6 Building Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.7 Walls and Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2.8 Services and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2.9 Open Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2.10 Landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.11 Site Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

2.12 Massing, Form, and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2.13 Roof Form and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

2.14 Facade Articulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

2.15 Building Access and Entrance Design . . . . . . . . 2-26

2.16 Conversion of Existing Single Family Dwellings2-27

2.17 Balconies and Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

2.18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

2.19 Building Materials and Finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.20 Parking Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

2.21 Architectural Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

ACCESSORY DWELLING UNITS

3.1 Site Organization, Planning, and Design . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2 Building Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3 City Approved Plans for Rent-Restricted ADUs . 3-11

MULTIFAMILY RESIDENTIAL AND MIXED USE

RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENTS

4.1 Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2 Pedestrian Access and Bicycle Parking . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.3 Driveways and Surface Parking Design . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.4 Walls and Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.5 Building Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.6 Services and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.7 Open Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.8 Landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.9 Site Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4.10 Massing, Form, and Proportions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.11  Roof Form and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

4.12 Facade Articulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4.13 Building Access and Entrance Design . . . . . . . . 4-34

4.14 Ground Floor Treatment–Residential . . . . . . . . . 4-38

4.15 Ground Floor Treatment–Commercial . . . . . . . . 4-40

4.16 Balconies and Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

4.17 Awnings, Sunshades, and Screens . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

4.18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

4.19 Building Materials, Colors, and Finish . . . . . . . . 4-48

4.20 Mitigation of Blank Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

4.21 Parking Garage Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

4.22 Architectural Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4.23 Bird Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

4.24 Signage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

DEFINITIONS

5.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Copyright © 2025, all rights reserved. Some of the images and photographs shown in this presentation are used for example imagery only and may be owned or copyrighted by others. As such, use is limited to this presentation and no right to publish or reuse the images is granted or inferred.

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 21
4 Piedmont Objective Design Standards PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025 EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 22
1 / Introduction
1-1
01 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3 How to use this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.4 Ministerial Design Review Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.5 Design Review Submittal Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 01 EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 23
1-2
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025

INTRODUCTION
With its well-maintained neighborhoods, abundant
greenery, attractive streetscapes and varied
topography, the City of Piedmont is renowned for its
distinct physical and architectural character. Piedmont has the largest per capita supply of pre-World War
II single-family housing in the State of California. A
diversity of homes and lot sizes can be found between
and within its different neighborhoods. This includes
modestly sized houses on flat parcels framed by
relatively rectangular blocks, multi-story and stepped
houses on irregular sized lots facing winding streets
that follow the sloping terrain, and large parcels
containing magnificent estates. Piedmont’s compact
civic and commercial district, with its nearby public
open spaces, acts as the hub for the city.

State laws such as SB 9, SB 35, AB 686 incentivize the
production of housing and direct the City of Piedmont
to take an active role in the planning for new housing
units, including housing affordable to all income levels in the Piedmont community. These Objective Design
Standards implement state housing laws by providing
clear, objective and enforceable design requirements
to facilitate streamlined review of eligible housing
projects. This means that the consistency of an eligible development application with the Objective Design
Standards will be considered and decided by the
Planning & Building Director (which is defined in the
City Code, and referred to as Director hereafter).

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 OBJECTIVES
The Piedmont Objective Design Standards have
been developed to be used by builders, design
professionals, interested neighbors, and City Staff.

They incorporate planning and land use provisions
from the General Plan, and relevant aspects of the
City Code, Chapter 17 Planning and Land Use (Zoning
Ordinance), henceforth referred to as the Zoning
Ordinance.

The Objective Design Standards demonstrate,
through photos, diagrams, and graphic examples,
how to determine appropriate design solutions to
address context, architectural character, building
form, landscape, site amenities and their relationship
to the street and neighboring properties. This allows
for a more comprehensive and consistent method for
project reviews, while outlining expectations by the
City Staff for project applicants and their neighbors.

The Objective Design Standards help implement
Housing Element policies and programs to streamline
the review of eligible development applications, such
as SB 9 and SB 35 development proposals.

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 24
1 / Introduction
1-3
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025

1.1.2 RELATIONSHIP TO THE GENERAL
PLAN
The General Plan consists of elements (chapters)
that set forth the City of Piedmont’s priority planning policies. These policies govern the Zoning Ordinance
and the Objective Design Standards. Among the
topics in the General Plan are the preservation of
existing terrain and natural vegetation, maintaining
the public rights-of-way, protecting public open space, maintaining compatibility among buildings within
established neighborhoods, ensuring the preservation
of existing structures, promoting sustainable
development and green building practices, and
ensuring reasonable accommodation to those with
disabilities.

The pertinent elements within the General Plan
that outline these policies and give direction
to the Objective Design Standards include the
Land Use Element, the Transportation Element,
the Environmental Hazards Element, the Natural
Resources and Sustainability Element, the Design
and Preservation Element, and the Housing Element.

Each element stipulates particular design policies and
standards that must be met by the Objective Design
Standards.

1.1.3 RELATIONSHIP TO THE ZONING

ORDINANCE
The Zoning Ordinance also governs the Objective
Design Standards. It translates the policies of the
General Plan into regulatory language. The design
standards in the Zoning Ordinance instruct the way in
which the Objective Design Standards may be applied.

Zoning districts are established to determine allowable land use and occupancies. Specific regulations are
included in the Zoning Ordinance and within the
Objective Design Standards for building and site
development, the administration of development
agreements, design review, permit approvals, and
enforcement.

As a city comprised primarily of well-maintained and
established residential districts, a major focus of the Zoning Ordinance is the preservation of the City of
Piedmont’s existing architectural and natural setting.

Nevertheless, the Zoning Ordinance provides the
flexibility for incremental growth within Piedmont’s
neighborhoods, allowing for modest changes to reflect
more current needs.

1.1.4 RELATIONSHIP TO THE

PIEDMONT DESIGN STANDARDS

AND GUIDELINES
The City of Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines
regulate the design and development of additions and
remodels to existing single family dwellings that do
not include new residential units, and existing and new commercial developments that do not include new
residential units. The design standards for Accessory
Dwelling Units (ADUs), Multifamily Residential, and
Mixed Use Residential projects that were formally
included in the Design Standards and Guidelines have
been superseded by the Objective Design Standards
in this document.

1.1.5 APPLICABILITY
The Objective Design Standards are offered as a
means to streamline the review of the following
eligible development applications:
■ 1-4 Unit Residential Developments
■ Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs)
■ Multifamily Residential Developments
■ Mixed Use Residential Developments
The Objective Design Standards are not applicable
to additions to or remodels of existing single family
dwellings that are unrelated to the development of a
new housing unit.

Applicants wishing to propose design approaches
differing from the Objective Design Standards may
voluntarily apply for discretionary design review, if
they choose to do so and communicate the request
to the Planning & Building Director in writing. In those cases, the project would be reviewed by the Planning
Commission and evaluated under the Piedmont
Design Standards and Guidelines.

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 25
1-4
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Fig. 1.2.1: Visual guide of where individual features are on each page.

1.2.1 DOCUMENT STRUCTURE
The Objective Design Standards and Guidelines are
organized in Chapters based on specific development
types in Piedmont - one-to-four residential units,
Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs), multifamily, and
mixed-use developments.

Each chapter includes the following sections which
then have subsections to provide guidance into two
design categories:

Site Organization, Planning, and Design
This section covers the layout of sites to support
cohesive neighborhoods, complement surrounding
buildings, bolster multimodal connectivity, and create
comfortable and inviting places. It also contains
Guidelines which communicate the City’s intent for
certain design requirements, but are not quantifiable.

Building Design
This section covers architectural detailing of buildings, including sculpting the building mass, articulating
facades, creating visual interest, and communicating
building functionality and hierarchy through design.

Defined Terms
Definitions for terms shown in italics are provided in
Chapter 5 — Definitions.

1.2 Structure
2-12 Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and deSign
02 2.6 Building Placement Activate the public realm by placing buildings near streets and public open spaces.

PURPOSE
Building placement should ensure that new housing
contributes to a walkable, context-sensitive, and livable neighborhood fabric. these objective standards are
intended to:
■ promote compatibility with the scale,
rhythm, and setbacks of surrounding
buildings;
■ preserve privacy, sunlight access, and open
space for residents and neighbors;
■ Support vibrant streetscapes through
thoughtful orientation and massing;
■ Facilitate efficient use of land while
maintaining a comfortable transition
between single-family and multi-family
housing types.

By guiding the siting and arrangement of buildings,
these objective standards help integrate smaller-scale
multifamily housing into established neighborhoods
in a way that supports both community character and
housing diversity.
garages
2 1
2 1

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.6.1 Street Yard Setback
Buildings shall comply with the street yard
setback of the respective zoning district.

S.2.6.2 Site Features and Structures in Street Yards
no fences or perimeter walls, retaining walls
greater than 30 inches tall as measured
from finished grade to top of wall, accessory
structures, or site features are allowed in the
street yard setbacks, unless the retaining
walls are used to support egress/ingress
infrastructure such as driveways for a
maximum height of 8 feet.

S.2.6.3 Multiple Units
Multiple units on one lot may be
accommodated in a single building in order
to emulate a single family home, or may be
accommodated in individual buildings (see
Figs. 2.6.1 and 2.6.2).

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.6.1 Consistency with Neighborhood Patterns
Buildings’ front setback from the street rightof-way should reflect the prevailing pattern found along other adjacent lots fronting the
same side of the street.

G.2.6.2 Public/Private Differentiation
the site landscaping should clearly
differentiate between the public right-ofway and the private space of the structure, delineating the front yard from the sidewalk.

Figure 2.6.1: Multiple units accommodated in a single building in order to emulate a single family home.

Figure 2.6.2: Multiple units accommodated in individual buildings, with the front unit addressing the street.

1.2.2 PAGE STRUCTURE
Refer to Fig. 1.2.1 for a visual guide of where to find individual features on each Subsection page. Each
Subsection includes the following:
■ Section Name is the topic group that
encompasses one or more Subsections
■ Subsection Name includes the Subsection
number and a title that briefly summarizes its
content.
■ Objective identifies the purpose or primary
objective of a Subsection.
■ Purpose explains the reasoning for a Subsection
and introduces larger considerations for that
specific topic.
■ Objective Standards are objective requirements
that are quantifiable and verifiable. Development
projects must comply with Standards identified
within this document (unless the Zoning
Ordinance has a different requirement).
■ Guidelines (Optional) outline best practices and
offer overarching design principles that help
clarify the design objectives. They are intended
to complement the mandatory design standards.

These are not considered objective standards
and are therefore optional.

Section Name
Chapter Number
Subsection Number
and Name
Objective
Purpose
Objective Standards
Guidelines (Optional)
Defined term in
italics
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 26
STREET
STREET
STREET
1 / Introduction1-5
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
The following infographics illustrate the step-by-step
process that designers and developers should follow
for designing a project and identifies the sections
of this document containing the relevant Design
Standards and Guidelines for each step.

1.3 How to Use This Document

1. BUILDING ENVELOPE
Determine the basic building envelope by referring to
the Zoning Ordinance (Chapter 17 of the Piedmont City
Code). Zoning standards such setbacks and building
heights define how much buildable area is available on
a given site.

2. SITE PLANNING
Examine the character of the site’s surroundings,
including neighboring buildings, significant landscape
features, and pedestrian and vehicle access. Use
the existing patterns of development to inform site
planning, organization, and design. Refer to the Site
Organization, Planning, and Design standards and
guidelines in the respective chapter for site standards such as location of pedestrian access, building entries and landscaping for open spaces.

Fig. 1.3.1: Building Envelope

2. BUILDING DESIGN
Design building massing and form to promote
visual interest, support active uses, and provide
appropriate transitions to neighboring structures. Use
facade articulation to create engaging, human-scale
development that contributes to a vibrant public realm.

Refer to the Building Design standards and guidelines
in the respective chapter for detailed direction on
massing breaks, facade treatments, entry design, and
window patterns and detailing.

Fig. 1.3.2: Site Planning Fig. 1.3.3: Building Design
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 27
1-6
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Development projects eligible to utilize the Objective
Design Standards and Guidelines are subject to the
Ministerial Design Review process, consistent with
State Law for the applicable development types.

Ministerial review refers to a type of government
review or approval that is non-discretionary —
meaning the decision-making authority must approve
a project as long as it meets all applicable laws and
regulations. There is no subjective judgment or
personal interpretation involved in the approval.

Key characteristics of ministerial review include:
■ By-right approval: If the applicant complies with
objective standards (like zoning, height, setbacks,
etc.), the project must be approved.
■ No public hearing required: Unlike discretionary
reviews, ministerial reviews do not involve public
comment or deliberation.
■ No environmental review under the California
Environmental Quality Act (CEQA): In California,
ministerial projects are exempt from the California
Environmental Quality Act (CEQA).
■ Objective standards only: Decisions are based on
quantifiable, measurable rules rather than design
preferences or policy considerations.

California state law requires that ADUs, new 1-4 unit
residential developments eligible under SB 9, and
certain multifamily residential projects eligible under SB 35 be reviewed through a ministerial process.

However, applicants wishing to deviate from the
Objective Design Standards may voluntarily apply
for discretionary design review before the Planning
Commission.

1.4 Ministerial Review Process

1.4.1 IMPLEMENTATION
The standards in this document are applicable to two
types of ministerial permits:
■ Ministerial Design Review: Proposals to construct
new 1-4 unit residential projects, multifamily
residential development, or mixed-use residential
development that meet the eligibility criteria of
Zoning Ordinance Sec. 17.67.030.
■ Accessory Dwelling Unit Permit: Proposals to
add an accessory dwelling unit (ADU) or junior
accessory dwelling unit (JADU), as defined in
Zoning Ordinance Sec. 17.38.020 and meet the
requirements of Division 17.38.

Each type of planning permit application has its
own unique approval process. The two diagrams
on the following pages map each type of permit
review process, from initial contact with the Planning
Department to a final approval for construction.

These diagrams enable project applicants, design
professionals and the general public to better
understand project review procedures.

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 28
1 / Introduction
1-7
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Fig. 1.4.1: Ministerial Design Review Process

1.4.2 MINISTERIAL DESIGN REVIEW

PROCESS
Applicable to:
■ 1-4 Unit Residential Developments
■ Multifamily Residential Developments
■ Mixed Use Residential Developments
Pre-application
meeting
Submit
Ministerial Application
with required plans
and supplemental
documents
Staff determines if the project
is eligible for streamlining
within 60 days (≤150 units)
within 90 days (>150 units)
Staff finalizes
review, Conditions of
Approval, and other
documentation
within 90 days (≤150 units)
within 180 days (>150 units)
Applicant submits
Notice of Intent
(NOI)
per Gov Code
NOI
Planning Staff
conducts
required
scoping process
with Native
American Tribes
optional but
highly recommended
Ministerial Application approved
expiration depends on percentage
of affordable units and their
affordability
Yes
Application meets
streamlining
eligibility criteria
No
Application does not
meet streamlining
eligibility criteria
Submit
Building
Permit
application
Building Permit
application reviewed
for conformance
with Building Code
within 30 days (≤25 units)
within 60 days (>25 units) Building Permit
issued
Revise and
resubmit
Staff provides written
comments detailing
inconsistencies and conflicts
with objective standards,
or requests additional
information needed to
make a determination
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 29
1-8
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Pre-application
meeting
optional but
highly recommended
Submit
Planning
Application
Staff review for
Completeness and
Conformance
within 30 days
Staff finalize
Conditions of Approval
and other documentation
within 30 days ADU Planning Application approved
valid for 18 months unless
Building Permit is issued
during that time
ADU Planning Application denied
may revise and resubmit
Resubmit
If incomplete
or does not
conform with
standards
Revise plans
Submit
Building
Permit
application
Building Permit
application reviewed
for conformance
with Building Code
Building Permit
issued
Fig. 1.4.2: Accessory Dwelling Unit Review Process

1.4.3 ACCESSORY DWELLING UNIT

REVIEW PROCESS
Applicable to:
■ Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs)
■ Junior Accessory Dwelling Units (JADUs)
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 30
1 / Introduction
1-9
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Pre-application
meeting
optional but
highly recommended
Submit
Planning
Application
Staff review for
Completeness and
Conformance
within 30 days
Staff finalize
Conditions of Approval
and other documentation
within 30 days ADU Planning Application approved
valid for 18 months unless
Building Permit is issued
during that time
ADU Planning Application denied
may revise and resubmit
Resubmit
If site-specific
adjustments
are needed
Revise plans
Submit
Building
Permit
application
Building Permit
application reviewed
for conformance
with Building Code
Building Permit
issued
plans further developed with items
including a detailed site plan,
engineering plans, and construction
details
Submit request
to obtain CAD files
from
Planning & Building
Request must affirm
agreement to a
10-year deed restriction,
designating the ADU unit
for low or very low-income
tenants.

Standard ADU planning
application fee waived for
applicants who use
a prototype.

Fig. 1.4.3: Accessory Dwelling Unit Review Process with ADU prototype plans

1.4.4 ACCESSORY DWELLING UNIT

REVIEW PROCESS WITH ADU

PROTOTYPE PLANS
Applicable to:
■ Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs) utilizing
prototype building elevations and floor plans
provided by the Planning & Building Department
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 31
1-10
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025

1.5 Design Review Submittal Guidelines

1.5.1 FORMS, FEES, NUMBER OF

PLANS AND PLAN SIZES

1. Planning Permit Application Form signed by
the property owner(s), or apply online via
eTRAKiT

2. Application Submittal Checklist Form. This
form may be found at the end of this chapter
and in more detail on each of the application
forms.

3. Fee payment, as specified on the application
form or online portal.

4. Electronic Plan Set Submittal. Instructions
for submitting planning applications
electronically are available on the
applications webpage of the City website
here: www.piedmont.ca.gov.

1.5.2 ITEMS TO BE INCLUDED IN THE
PLANS

1. Site Survey and Topographic Map (preferred
scale 1/8”)
Provide a survey and topographic map,
prepared within the last 12 months, accurately
showing contours and other features of the
existing terrain within the subdivision or
parcel, existing drainage channels, roads,
culverts, overhead and underground utility
lines and structures (Sewer, Gas, Water,
Electric) which affect the design of the
subdivision or parcel, wells and springs,
structures, retaining walls, show building
wall outlines, show spot grade elevations
at building corners, show existing floor
elevations; show existing roof eave and roof
peak elevations; show easements; provide
contour lines at a minimum of 2 ft. intervals,
significant trees with a minimum of 12” trunk
diameter, irrigation ditches, utility poles, other
improvements in their correct location, and
provide a north arrow. Elevations shall be in
accord with U. S. Geological Survey (1929
Sea Level datum.) The map shall be drawn to
an engineer’s scale large enough to show all
information clearly.

2. Tentative Map
A plat or map shall show the following
information. Where dimensioning is
appropriate, dimensions shall be annotated
to what is, in the surveyor’s professional
opinion, the appropriate degree of precision
based on the exiting or planned use of the
surveyed property.
a. Field Locations and City Monuments
b. Boundary, Descriptions, Dimensions, and
Closures
c. Easements, Servitudes, Rights of Way,
Access, and Documents

3. Housing Development Plan
A housing development plan consisting of the
architectural design (existing and proposed
site plan, floor plans, elevations, and details),
unit access, parking space(s), and civil
engineering design and calculations (grading,
foundation, framing, and utilities) for the
development of one or two new housing units
must be filed concurrently with the application
for any ministerial urban lot split filed under
SB 9 authority. If more than two new housing
units are proposed, file two application forms,
application materials, and associated fees.

4. Accessory Dwelling Unit (ADU)
Per sections 17.20.040.C and 17.28.040.C
of the Piedmont City Code, for lots that are
larger than 5,000 square feet, an ADU shall
be constructed:
a. when a new single-family residence is
proposed on a vacant lot.
b. when an existing single-family residence is
demolished for a remodel or reconstruction,
except when a single-family residence
is being reconstructed to the same or
similar square footage due to damage
or destruction by accident, fire, flood,
earthquake, or other act of nature.

Please include location of the proposed ADU
on the site plan and floor plans. A complete
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 32
1 / Introduction
1-11
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
ADU submittal will be reviewed along with an
ADU application. Please submit a separate
ADU application. Please note that separate
fees would apply for the ADU application.

5. Existing Site Plan (preferred scale 1/8”)
Please indicate the location of all existing
structures (including accessory structures),
retaining walls, fences, handrails, guardrails,
site features, trees, landscaping, hard-surface
areas, other outdoor amenities, lot lines, front,
side and rear yard setback lines, any body of
water (creek, pond, lake, riparian area, wetland,
flood hazard area, etc.) and easements.

Please outline the locations of structures on
adjacent properties (up to 25 feet from the
property line) and label their uses. Provide
setback dimensions from all existing structures
to lot lines (Setback means the required
distance that a building, structure or other
designated item must be located from a lot
line. Setbacks are measured from the lot line
to the footprint of the structure or building. See
Zoning Ordinance Sec. 17.90.020.).

Please show all curbs, sidewalks, street trees
and the street right-of-way bordering the
subject property.

Please show a North arrow, label adjacent
streets, and call out existing features. It is
preferred that the site plan shows the roof
and exterior wall outline of structures on the
property rather than the interior floor plans.

Show location of any existing exterior heat
pumps or other noise generating equipment.

See “proposed” below for formatting
instructions.

6. Proposed Site Plan (preferred scale 1/8”)
Please indicate the location of all existing
and proposed structures (including accessory
structures), retaining walls, fences, handrails,
guardrails, site features, trees, landscaping,
hard-surface areas, other outdoor amenities,
lot lines, front, side and rear yard setback
lines, any body of water (creek, pond, lake,
riparian area, wetland, flood hazard area, etc.)
and easements. Indicate utility service meters
(Water, Gas, Electrical).

Please outline the locations of structures
on adjacent properties (up to 25 feet from
the property line) and label their uses and
addresses. Provide setback dimensions from
all existing and proposed structures to lot
lines (Setback means the required distance
that a building, structure or other designated
item must be located from a lot line. Setbacks
are measured from the lot line to the footprint
of the structure or building. See Zoning
Ordinance Sec. 17.90.020.).

Please show all curbs, sidewalks, street trees
and the street right-of-way bordering the
subject property, and any changes proposed
to these features. Please show a North arrow,
show grade changes at the property line,
label adjacent streets, and call out existing
features and proposed modifications. It is
preferred that the site plan shows the roof
and exterior wall outline of structures on the
property rather than the interior floor plans.

Show a minimum 3-foot-wide unobstructed,
permanent and lighted all-weather path of
travel from ROW to entry door(s). Indicate
location of addresses markers for each
individual unit proposed. Show location of any
proposed exterior heat pumps or other noise
generating equipment. Please show each
proposed site plan either side by side on the
same page as the corresponding existing
floorplan or in a manner where a contrasting
outline of the existing construction is shown
on the proposed plan, if possible.

7. Roof Plans (Existing and Proposed)
(preferred scale 1/8”)
Roof plans should include the pitch,
overhangs, skylights, chimneys, vents, and
gutters. Roof plans may be shown on the
site plans. Please specify all existing and
proposed roof materials and color. Note roof
planes that will accommodate photovoltaic
panels to comply with requirements of
California Energy Code Section 150.1.c.14.

8. Existing Floor Plans (preferred scale 1/4”)
Please provide plans for all floor levels
including basements and attics, and include
room names, window and door locations,
built-in cabinets, appliance and fixture
locations, ceiling heights, exterior light
fixture locations and parking space interior
dimensions. Show the removal of any existing
features, including roofs, walls, ceilings,
windows, doors, built-in-cabinets, appliances,
fixtures and parking spaces. Provide window
and door marks that correspond to their
respective schedules.

Please show a north arrow and label the floor
level. See “proposed” below for formatting
instructions.

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 33
1-12
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
Show locations of any exterior wall
mounted water heater or other mechanical
equipment. For existing ADU show locations
of water heater and HVAC equipment. Show
level landing locations at each entry door.

9. Proposed Floor Plans (preferred scale 1/4”)
Please provide plans for all floor levels
including basements and attics, and include
room names, window and door locations,
built-in cabinets, appliance and fixture
locations, ceiling heights, exterior light
fixture locations and parking space interior
dimensions.

Please show a north arrow, label the floor
level, and call out proposed modifications.

Provide window and door marks that
correspond to their respective schedules.

Please show each proposed floorplan
either side by side on the same page as
the corresponding existing floorplan or in
a manner where a contrasting outline of
the existing construction is shown on the
proposed plan, if possible. Show locations
of any exterior wall mounted water heater or
other mechanical equipment. For proposed
ADU, show locations of water heater and
HVAC equipment. Show level landing
locations at each entry door.

10. Existing Elevations (preferred scale 1/4”)
Please provide North, South, East and West
elevations (proposed to be changed or
affected by new construction) including all
existing materials (including roofing materials),
styles and operational characteristics of
windows and doors and roof slopes. Provide
window and door marks that correspond to
their respective schedules.

Please include exterior vents, downspouts,
gutters and exterior light fixtures. Additionally,
if the height of the building is changing,
please show the average existing building
height (See Zoning Ordinance Sec. 17.90.020).

Please do not abbreviate architectural
terms. Label each elevation as “existing”
and indicate the direction of view (i.e. North,
South, East, West or Front, Rear, Left Side,
or Right Side). See “proposed” below for
formatting instructions.

11. Proposed Elevations (preferred scale 1/4”)
Please provide North, South, East
and West elevations (proposed to be
changed or affected by new construction)
including all proposed materials (including
roofing materials), styles and operational
characteristics of windows and doors and roof
slopes. Provide window and door marks that
correspond to their respective schedules.

Please include exterior vents, downspouts,
gutters and exterior light fixtures. Additionally,
if the height of the building is changing,
please show the average proposed
building height (See Zoning Ordinance Sec.

17.90.020.).

Please do not abbreviate architectural terms.

Label each elevation as “proposed” and
indicate the direction of view (i.e. North,
South, East, West or Front, Rear, Left Side, or
Right Side).

Please show each proposed exterior
elevation either side by side on the same
page as the corresponding existing
exterior elevation, or in a manner where
a contrasting outline of the existing
construction is shown on the proposed
elevation, if possible.

12. Building Section: When required for
additions and new construction (Preferred
scale ¼”)
Please provide a minimum one building cross
section showing the relationship between
existing and new construction, and/ or new
construction and existing grade.

13. Window Door Schedule
If your proposed project includes window
and/or door modifications, please submit
a window and door schedule which notes
existing and proposed window size, material,
operation, window recess, sash dimension, a
typical window detail in a partial wall section
showing the window recess dimension from
the face of the exterior wall, and divided
lite type (i.e. true divided lites or threedimensional simulated divided lites). Provide window and door marks that correspond
to the floor plans and elevations. At the
discretion of the Planning Director, a window
schedule can be omitted only if all the above
information is otherwise provided.

14. Graphic Calculations
Please submit plans which graphically
illustrate the required calculations with
an itemized list of existing and proposed
structures, landscape areas and floor area.

Calculations are expressed as percentages
and must be recorded on the permit
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 34
1 / Introduction
1-13
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
application form. Please request a graphic
calculations sample for your reference.

Separate graphic calculations are to be
submitted, as follows:
a. Existing and proposed lot coverage/
structures equals the number of square
feet of structures covering the lot divided
by the number of square feet in the lot.

For a complete definition of structure
coverage, please see Zoning Ordinance
Sec. 17.90.020.
b. Minimum landscape coverage equals
the number of square feet of green and
growing landscaped area divided by the
number of square feet in the lot. For a
complete definition of landscape please
see Zoning Ordinance Sec. 17.90.020.
c. Existing and proposed floor area ratio
(FAR) equals the number of square feet of
floor area divided by the number of square
feet in the lot. For a complete definition of
floor area, please see Zoning Ordinance
Sec. 17.90.020.

15. Photographs
Please provide photographs of the front
(street), rear and side views of the existing
structures on the subject property. Please
also provide a front (street) view of the
structures on the two adjacent properties.

The photographs may be placed either on
a standard permit application sheet size
and be part of the submittal package, or
may be placed on 8 ½” x 11” sheets as an
accompanying submittal package.

16. Landscape Plans
Landscape Plans should include lot lines,
indicate landscape areas, identification of
vegetation, the location of all structures,
lighting and hardscape surfaces. The
landscape plans may also include a plant list
including the size and spacing of plants to be
installed and the location of proposed planting.

Landscape plans must also address irrigation
and comply with the California Water Efficient
Landscape Ordinance (WELO). New house
on a vacant lot requires WELO, rehabilitated
landscape of 500 s.f. for a new house on a
developed lot requires WELO.

17. Access To Right-of-Way
The applicant must demonstrate access to
the lot from the public-right-of-way or fronting
roadway showing driveway slope, cross-slope
and width. Access may be by easement. If the
parcel to be developed is fronting on public
right of way, frontage improvements (curb
gutter/sidewalk) conforming with Public Works
Standards is required.

18. Drainage Plan
The drainage plan shall be prepared by
a licensed civil engineer and include the
following:
a. An outline of the development footprint of
any unit(s)/house(s) proposed within the
newly subdivided lots.
b. Geotechnical remediation / grading
improvements, amount of cut and fill,
c. Drainage and, depending upon the
parcel size, C.3 stormwater treatment
improvements or stormwater management
plan, e.g. Location of surface and
subsurface drainage facilities, bioretention,
and direction of runoff/drainage.

19. Utilities Plan
Provide details on how the lot will be served
with utilities including sewer, water, gas, and
electric. Indicate the points of connection and/
or meter locations for each.

20. Stormwater Requirements Checklist
All applications must complete the Applicability
C.3 Stormwater Requirements Worksheet.

21. Engineering Plan Set
Complete structural engineering plans and
calculations are required. Engineering must
be based on the specific soil conditions and
topography of the site, as analyzed in the
project Geotechnical Analysis completed
within the last calendar year. Engineering must
include a foundation plan, framing plans and
calculations.

22. Soils Report
A preliminary geologic and/or soils
reconnaissance report. Each report of a
geological investigation shall be prepared and
signed by a licensed engineering geologist..

The required report should be based on
the latest grading plan for the subject
development and shall reference the date of
that grading plan. All reports shall include the
following:
a. A detailed geologic map showing the
location and extent of any geologic hazard
or potentially hazardous soil condition
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 35
1-14
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
within or immediately adjoining the
subject property which warrants special
management and/or further evaluation.
b. Recommendations outlining an exploration
program to fully define and delineate any
geologic hazard or potentially hazardous
soil condition, and to accurately identify
developable areas,
c. Conclusions regarding the effect of any
geologic hazard or potentially hazardous
soil condition within or immediately
adjoining the project site on the design of
the proposed subdivision,
d. Recommendations for redesign of the
subdivision and/or recommendations
for construction procedure to mitigate
potentially hazardous conditions, if
warranted

23. Title Report
A title report not more than six months old.

24. List of Waivers
If the proposed project is seeking a waiver
from any objective standard, provide a letter
detailing the requested waiver (s).

25. Memorandum of Agreement
If the proposed project is on a property split
between City of Piedmont and City of Oakland,
provide a copy of the executed Memorandum
of Agreement between both cities.

26. Intent to Occupy Affidavit
(Applicable to 1-4 residential unit developments
submitted under Senate Bill (SB) 9.)

27. Biological Site Assessment
The applicant shall provide a Biological
Assessment (wildlife or botanical surveys) for
any project which could alter or damage the
habitat of special status species, as defined by
the California Department of Fish and Wildlife
or the US Fish and Wildlife Service, including
wetland species, nesting birds, Dusky Footed
Woodrats, roosting bats, et al.

28. Archeological and Tribal Cultural Resources
Prior to approval of development projects
(excluding small structures exempt under
CEQA) that have the potential to impact an
archaeological resource(s), such as through
grading, excavation for foundations or
basements, or new swimming pools, the
applicant shall provide an Archaeological
Resources Assessment that shall be
conducted under the supervision of an
archaeologist that meets the Secretary of
the Interior’s Professional Qualifications
Standards in either prehistoric or historic
archaeology. Assessments shall be completed
in accordance with the California Office of
Historic Preservation guidance and will follow
the Archaeological Resource Management
Reports (ARMR): Recommended Contents
and Format guidelines. If the Archaeological
Resource Assessment identifies resources that
may be affected by the project, Phase II testing
and evaluation will be required. If resources
are determined significant or unique through
Phase II testing and site avoidance is not
possible, appropriate site-specific mitigation
measures shall be identified in the Phase II
evaluation. These measures may include,
but would not be limited to, the Applicant’s
submittal of a Phase III data recovery program,
avoidance, or other appropriate actions to be
determined by a qualified archaeologist.

29. Paleontological Site Assessment
For new development that involves ground
disturbance within the high sensitivity
Pleistocene alluvial fan and fluvial deposits
(Qpaf) geologic unit, the project applicant
shall provide a report prepared by a Qualified
Paleontologist who shall direct all mitigation
measures related to paleontological resources.

If evidence of subsurface paleontological
resources is found during construction,
excavation and other construction activity
shall cease and the construction contractor
shall contract a qualified paleontologist to
evaluate the find and make appropriate
recommendations. If warranted, the
paleontologist shall prepare and implement a
standard Paleontological Resources Mitigation
Program for the salvage and curation of the
identified resources.

30. Historic Resources Site Assessment
The applicant shall provide a historic resources
assessment including State of California
Department of Parks and Recreation (DPR) 523
forms for development projects involving the
demolition or substantial alteration (alteration
of 30 percent or more of the building exterior)
of buildings 45 years or older. DPR forms shall
include a Primary Record (523A), Location Map
(523J), and appropriate detailed recording
forms (e.g., BSO Record (523B), Archaeological
Site Record (523C), or District Record (523D)).

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 36
1 / Introduction
1-15
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
The forms shall be prepared by a qualified
architectural historian or historian who meets
the Secretary of the Interior’s Professional
Qualifications Standards (PQS) in architectural
history or history (as defined in Code of
Federal Regulations, Title 36, Part 61). If the
property is already listed in the NRHP or CRHR
or if DPR forms or an historical resources
evaluation (HRE) has been prepared for the
property in the past five years, preparation of
new DPR forms shall not be required.

31. Sewer Capacity Study (if an SB9 application
is for 3 or more units)
The applicant must provide a sewer capacity
study prepared by a licensed civil engineer
within the last 12 months that meets the
requirements of Piedmont City Code Section

8.12 and includes estimated amounts of
effluent generated from the project for average
daily and peak flow conditions. Additionally,
the analysis shall evaluate the existing flow in
the sewer main where the effluent from the
proposed units will flow to evaluate if sufficient
capacity is available for the additional flows.

Prior to Submitting an Application
If an applicant believes that any of the above
requirements do not pertain to their project,
they should call the Planning Division at
(510) 420-3050 and make an appointment
to meet with a planner. Applicants and their
agents (architect, contractor, engineer, etc.)
are encouraged to discuss the application
with the Planning staff early in the planning
process. Planning staff will be happy to review
all procedures with applicants and answer any
questions applicants may have. There is no
fee charged for any meetings or discussions
prior to the submittal of an application fee.

Please note that all housing development
applications, including ADU application,
will require a building permit application if
approved.

EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 37
1-16
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
01 Introduction
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 38
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-1
ONE-TO-FOUR RESIDENTIAL UNIT DEVELOPMENTS 02

SITE ORGANIZATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN

2.1 Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.2 Urban Lot Splits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3 Site Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.4 Building Access and Entrance Design . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.5 Vehicular Access and Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.6 Building Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.7 Walls and Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2.8 Services and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2.9 Open Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2.10 Landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.11 Site Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 02

BUILDING DESIGN

2.12 Massing, Form, and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2.13 Roof Form and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

2.14 Facade Articulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

2.15 Building Access and Entrance Design . . . . . . . . 2-26

2.16 Conversion of Existing Single Family Dwellings2-27

2.17 Balconies and Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

2.18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

2.19 Building Materials and Finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.20 Parking Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

2.21 Architectural Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 39
2-2
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

SITE ORGANIZATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN
02 PURPOSE
New developments and additions and alterations
to existing buildings and lots should reflect the
characteristics of the surrounding context to help
create and maintain cohesive neighborhoods. Design
strategies for each development can vary depending
on a project’s size, location, topography and
relationship to streets.

The standards and guidelines in this chapter are
intended to guide new 1–4 unit residential buildings
in Piedmont so that they are compatible with the city’s established neighborhood character—defined by
varied architectural styles, mature landscaping, and
a strong sense of scale—while supporting the City’s
housing goals in a context-sensitive manner.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.1.1 Adherence to Zoning Development
Standards
New developments shall adhere to the
development standards for Urban Lot
Splits and Two-Unit Housing Developments
specified in Chapter 17 of the Piedmont City
Code.

S.2.1.2 Adherence to Objective Design Standards
In addition to compliance with Chapter 17
zoning standards, new 1-4 unit developments
shall adhere to the objective design standards
outlined in this chapter. However, per Chapter
17 an exception from a development standard
shall be granted if the standard would have
the effect of physically precluding:
a. an urban lot split of a vacant parcel where
the resulting lot size is 1,200 square feet or
more for both parcels;

2.1 Context
Ensure that new 1–4 unit housing blends with the character, scale, and rhythm of existing neighborhoods while supporting gentle density and a walkable, community-oriented environment.

Figure 2.1.1: The objective standards and guidelines in this chapter are intended to ensure that new 1–4 unit residential buildings in Piedmont are compatible with the city’s established neighborhood character.
2 new units designed
with residential scale and
appearance
Accessory Dwelling Unit
(ADU) above garage
S.2.1.3 Guidelines (Optional)
New 1–4 unit developments are encouraged
to consult the optional supplemental
guidelines included in each section. These
guidelines outline best practices and offer
overarching design principles that help clarify
the design objectives. They are intended to
complement the mandatory design standards
but are generally not objective or quantifiable.
b. an urban lot split of a parcel with existing
development, where the resulting lot size is
1,200 square feet or more for both parcels,
and the urban lot split does not increase
any nonconformity with underlying zoning
regulations for the parcel with existing
development; or
c. the construction of up to two units that are
800 square feet in floor area or less, each.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 40
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-3
Site organization, planning, and design
02 PURPOSE
Urban lot splits are intended to allow increased
housing diversity, affordability, and accessibility
within established neighborhoods. By facilitating
the subdivision of single-family lots, smaller, more
attainable housing options for a range of household
types and income levels can be created.

Lot splits promote efficient land use, encourage
walkable and vibrant communities, and align with local
and regional goals for sustainable growth, equitable
housing opportunities, and climate resilience.

By applying the objective design standards, lot splits
will meet the above stated purpose, while supporting
neighborhood character.

Urban Lot Splits shall be governed by Piedmont City
Code Chapter 17.54.050 Urban Lot Split Standards,
and Piedmont City Code Chapter 19 Subdivisions.

Objective design standards that preclude the
development of two lots, each containing an 800
square foot primary structure, shall not be imposed.

2.2 Urban Lot Splits
Increase housing supply and diversity while being sensitive to neighborhood character.

Neither lot can be
less than 40% of
the original lot area,
or be smaller than
1,200 square feet
Neither lot can be
less than 40% of
the original lot area,
or be smaller than
1,200 square feet
Access
easement
to the public
right-of-way

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.2.1 Lot Sizes
a. One lot shall not be less than 40 percent
of the lot area of the original lot (see Fig.

2.2.1).
b. Each of the newly created lots is no smaller
than 1,200 square feet (see Fig. 2.2.1).

S.2.2.2 Number of Units
Once a lot has been divided pursuant to the
Urban Lot Split provisions, each lot is allowed
to contain up to two units in one or two
primary buildings, inclusive of any Accessory
Dwelling Units (ADUs) or Junior Accessory
Dwelling Units (JADUs) (see Fig. 2.2.2)
S.2.2.3 Accessory Dwelling Units
a. Projects Without Urban Lot Split:
■ One ADU and/or JADU is allowed on the
lot in addition to two primary dwelling units,
with the total not exceeding four units.
b. Projects with Urban Lot Split:
■ One ADU or Junior ADU is allowed on the
lot if the lot contains one primary dwelling
unit, with the total not exceeding two units.
■ No ADU or JADU is allowed when the lot
contains two primary dwelling units.

S.2.2.4 Lot Access
a. Each lot shall have minimum 3-foot
pedestrian pathway to the public right-ofway, either through direct lot frontage or an easement through the existing lot. The
easement shall be dedicated as a public
right of way if used for egress.

Figure 2.2.1:With lots splits, one lot shall not be less than 40 percent of the lot area of the original lot, and the newly created lots shall be no smaller than 1,200 square feet.

LOT 1
LOT 2
LOT 1
LOT 2
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 41
2-4
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 b. Vehicular driveways to the new lot, where
parking is required or provided, shall meet
the driveway width and slope standards
outlined in Section 2.4.
c. Access easements shall be recorded prior
to final map recordation.
d. Final map to be recorded prior to issuance
of a building permit.

S.2.2.5 Lot Frontage
The lot shall have a minimum frontage of 60
feet.

S.2.2.6 Flag Lots
Flag lots are not permitted under an urban
lot split permit. If a new lot is created
without direct access to the public right-ofway, an access utility easement(s) shall be provided through the original lot, under the
provisions in Piedmont City Code Chapter

19. The easement shall meet the following
requirements:
a. The easement shall have a minimum width
of 12 feet.
b. The easement shall provide access for
utilities to be connected to the public right
of-way.
c. The easement shall provide direct and
unobstructed access to a public way for
egress.

Figure 2.2.2: Maximum number of units under various configurations (this is not an exhaustive set of examples). (Source: Association of Bay Area Governments (ABAG)) S.2.2.7 Existing Dwellings
If an urban lot split is proposed for a property
with an existing dwelling unit:
a. the split must result in the existing dwelling
unit (including all attached accessory
structures like deck, exterior stairs) being
completely located on the same lot; and
b. the urban lot split does not increase any
nonconformity with underlying zoning
regulations for the parcel with existing
development.

S.2.2.8 Utilities
a. The new lot shall have separate utilities,
including but not limited to electric, gas,
water, and sewer. The new lot shall adhere
to the standards outlined in the Piedmont
THIS DOCUMENT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE LEGAL ADVICE OR OPINIONS REGARDING SPECIFIC FACTS. FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT SB 9, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR OWN LEGAL COUNSEL.

SENATE BILL 9 (SB 9): AN OVERVIEW

WHAT IT IS AND HOW IT IMPACTS RESIDENTIAL LAND USE
Senate Bill 9 (SB 9) is a new California State Law taking effect January 1, 2022.

This overview was published in July 2022 – the law has since been amended. SB 9 changes existing limits on how many homes can be built on a lot zoned as singlefamily. Similar to previous state legislation on Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs), SB 9 is intended to support the availability of more modestly priced homes by encouraging building of smaller houses on small lots.

WHAT DOES SB 9 DO?
SB 9 MAKES IT EASIER TO: BUILD UP TO 4 HOMES

ON A PARCEL IN A SINGLE-FAMILY ZONE & SUBDIVIDE A LOT INTO TWO THAT CAN BE SMALLER THAN REQ MIN. SIZE
Used together, this allows 4 HOMES where 1 was primary home was allowed before.

SB 9 makes this easier by waiving public hearings for the two actions.

WHAT CAN I DO ON MY LOT?
Add new homes to existing parcel • Divide existing house into multiple units • Divide parcel and add homes Illustrations are based on a preliminary analysis of the law. Details are subject to change and are for informational purposes only.

See the following page for qualification details and limitations.

VACANT LOT

LOT WITH

SINGLE-FAMILY HOME

LOT WITH
NONCONFORMING DUPLEX1

LOT WITH SINGLE-FAMILY

HOME AND AN ADU
BEFORE
No units 1 PRIMARY UNIT 2 PRIMARY UNITS 1 PRIMARY UNIT
+ 1 ADU/JADU2

ADD UNITS,

NO LOT SPLIT
Up to 2 PRIMARY UNITS
+ Up to 2 ADUs/JADUs3
Up to 2 PRIMARY UNITS4
+ Up to 2 ADUs/JADUs3 (No additional units)5 Up to 2 PRIMARY UNITS4+ 1 ADU/JADU3

ADD UNITS

AND LOT SPLIT
Up to 4 TOTAL UNITS Up to 4 TOTAL UNITS Up to 4 TOTAL UNITS Up to 4 TOTAL UNITS If you’re NOT splitting a lot:
• SB 9 does not limit the number of ADUs/JADUs (B2, D2) – but other laws might.

If you ARE splitting a lot:
• Jurisdictions can limit the 2 lots to 4 units total, including any ADUs/JADUs, and may choose not to permit ADUs/JADUs.

SINGLE-UNIT DEVELOPMENTS
SB 9 can be used to develop single units –
but projects must comply with all SB 9
requirements.
1 Legally constructed but not currently permitted. Check your local ordinance for nonconforming use policies.
2 Junior Accessory Dwelling Units (JADUs) are small (max. 500ft 2) rentable units within a single-family structure. See your jurisdiction’s specifications for more details.
3 The exact number and type of ADUs/JADUs allowed should be confirmed based on project specifics.
4 Added primary unit can be new construction or a split of the existing house. 5 Check local nonconforming use rules for more information about ADUs/JADUs.

Public Works Standard Details, available
on the Department of Public Works
Department page on www.piedmont.
ca.gov.
b. Utility easements shall be recorded prior to
final map recordation.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.2.1 Grading
Shared driveways encouraged where there
is an opportunity for two lots to utilize the
same driveway; widths shall be as specified in
Section 2.5.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 42
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-5
Site organization, planning, and design
02 PURPOSE
Grading shall promote compatibility with surrounding
topography and neighborhood character while
facilitating accessible site circulation, utility placement, and stormwater management in compliance
with applicable building, safety, subdivision, and
environmental standards.
1-4 unit developments in Piedmont should be designed to integrate with existing topography.

2.3 Site Grading

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.3.1 Grading or Regrading of Lots
When existing lot topography is proposed to
be changed, grading shall not result in any of
the following:
a. Retaining walls centered on lot lines,
resulting in portions of the wall encroaching
onto neighboring properties (retaining walls
including any associated drainage must
be constructed entirely within the property
boundary);
b. Creation of retaining walls taller than
30 inches above finished grade within
required street setbacks, unless the
retaining walls are used to support egress/
ingress infrastructure such as driveways for
a maximum height of 8 feet;
c. Retaining walls along side lot lines taller
than four feet as measured from finished
grade to top of wall;
d. Retaining walls taller than 8 feet and
longer than 50 feet not within the building
footprint along the rear lot line or any
side lot line within the rear setback, as
measured from finished grade to top of
wall;
e. Cut and/or fill exceeding 16 feet in height
from top to toe;
f. Cut or graded slopes exceeding 30%; or
g. Graded slopes not contoured to blend
Figure 2.3.1:Site grading for new developments limited to 16 feet in height maximum from top to toe from cut and/or fill, and cut/fill slope no greater than 30%.

Existing grade
Cut 16’ max
Cut 16’ max
Cut 16’ max
Cut 16’ max
Cut/Fill
30% max
with existing terrain, such that proposed
cuts and fills exceed one foot of added/
subtracted rise for each one and one-half
feet of run.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 43
2-6
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 Figure 2.3.2: “Stepping down” with the slope reduces the building’s effective visual bulk and avoids the appearance of an excessively large, bulky building.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.3.1 Grading Best Practices
On steeply sloping properties, it is
important to minimize building bulk. This
is accomplished by respecting existing
topography and following the contours of the
existing slope. “Stepping down” with the slope
reduces the building’s effective visual bulk
and avoids the appearance of an excessively
large, bulky building (see Fig. 2.3.2).
a. Plan developments on hillside sites should
follow the existing topography, maintain
significant site views, and not obscure the
silhouette of prominent ridge lines.
b. Where cut-and-fill slopes are unavoidable
on hillside sites, sculpt them to blend with
the adjacent terrain.

G.2.3.2 Natural Amenities
Preserve on-site natural amenities such as
mature trees, creeks, and riparian corridors
and integrate them into the site planning and
organization as design features or organizing
elements. For example, locate a courtyard
or an outdoor recreational space around an
existing mature tree.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 44
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-7
Site organization, planning, and design
02 2.4 Building Access and Entrance Design
Maximize pedestrian access and shape project identity around clearly defined, inviting entrances.

PURPOSE
Well-designed and easily accessible building
entrances perform a key role in the overall design and
character of neighborhoods.

Entrances visible from the street help to animate
neighborhoods and make them safe and walkable.

Building entrances include doorways and elements
such as stoops stairways, landings, and porches. They
add visual interest to the building and streetscape.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.4.1 Building Entrance Locations
a. A minimum of one unit located along public
rights-of-way must have the primary building
entrance facing this right-of-way and not
rear yards, or opening onto a porch with an
entrance that faces the street. Additional
units on such lots may face the right-of-way.
b. Buildings fronting the street yard must
include their entry along the street yard (see
Fig. 2.4.1).
c. All buildings not fronting a street must have
their entry facing or visible from the street
or a walkway connecting to the street (see
Fig. 2.4.2).

S.2.4.2 Pedestrian Walkways
A minimum three-foot wide permanent,
unobstructed pedestrian pathway constructed
of noncombustible materials (as defined in the
California Building Code) shall be provided to
access entrances of each dwelling unit.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.4.1 Visible Entries
The entryways to the new residences should
be visible from the street. No fencing or
intervening structures on private property
should obstruct the sightline from the sidewalk
to the entryways.

Figure 2.4.1: Buildings fronting the street yard must include their entry along the street yard.

Figure 2.4.2: All buildings not fronting a street must have their entry facing or visible from the street by a walkway connecting to the street.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 45
2-8
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 Separate driveways from pedestrian rights-of-way.

PURPOSE
The purpose of vehicle access and parking standards
is to ensure that new residential projects provide
safe, efficient, and convenient access for residents
and visitors while minimizing negative impacts
on surrounding neighborhoods. These objective
standards aim to balance the need for sufficient
parking with the goal of maintaining the character of
the community.

DRIVEWAY WIDTH STANDARDS

DESCRIPTION MINIMUM
WIDTH

MAXIMUM
WIDTH
For a residential driveway
leading to a single car garage,
single car
10’-0” * 12’-0”
For a residential driveway
leading to a double car
garage, double car carport of
unenclosed spaces
10’-0” * 18’-0”
* For any units for which the closest portion of the parking enclosure is located in excess of 75 feet from the closest street, the minimum driveway width is 12 feet for up to two parking spaces, or 18 feet for more than two parking spaces.

DRIVEWAY BACKUP STANDARDS

DESCRIPTION MINIMUM
BACKUP
DISTANCE *

MAXIMUM
BACKUP
DISTANCE *
For an existing residential
driveway less than 10 feet in
width
18’-0” 50’-0”
For a new or existing residential
driveway 10 feet or greater in
width
18’-0” 75’-0”
* Backup distance is measured between the inside edge of sidewalk to the front wall of the parking enclosure.

2.5 Vehicular Access and Parking
Table 2.5.1: Driveway Width Standards
Table 2.5.2: Driveway Backup Standards

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.5.1 Driveways and Curb Cuts
a. Driveway widths shall adhere to the
standards in Table 2.5.1: Driveway Width
Standards.
■ New driveways shall not be less than 10
feet in width.
b. Driveways shall adhere to the backup
standards in Table 2.5.2: Driveway Backup
Standards.
c. For corner lots, provide the curb cut
on the side street or the street with
lesser pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular
circulation.
d. All driveway cuts must be a minimum of 10
feet from the beginning of any curb return
of a street.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 46
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-9
Site organization, planning, and design
02 DRIVEWAY TURNAROUND STANDARDS

DESCRIPTION MINIMUM
WIDTH

MAXIMUM
DEPTH
For a turnaround in front of
a one car garage or carport,
including driveway width and
turnaround hammerhead
25’-0” 44’-6”
For a turnaround in front of
a two car garage or carport,
including driveway width and
turnaround hammerhead
34’-0” 44’-6”
Table 2.5.3: Driveway Turnaround Standards
Figure 2.5.1:Driveway turnarounds
PIEDMONT DESIGN STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES:

3. SITE DESIGN

OFF STREET PARKING AND DRIVEWAY STANDARDS

3.07.04 DRIVEWAY TURN AROUND STANDAR
Driveways that exceed the maximum backup distance shall have a t immediately adjacent to the front wall of the garage or carport.

Note: Existing driveways and turnarounds that do not meet these necessarily considered “unusable” as provided in Zoning Ordinanc The turnaround
allow a standard
maneuver and a
a forward direct
One (1) two-poi
(1) forward mot
motion (See the

DESCRIPTION
For a turnarou
front of a one
garage or carp
For a turnarou
front of a two
garage or carp
S.2.5.2 Access to Driveways
a. For developments with two or fewer
dwelling units, vehicles may enter or exit
the driveway in either direction – pulling
forward or backing up.
b. For developments with three or more
dwelling units, vehicles must exit the
driveway pulling forward; configurations
requiring vehicles to back down the
driveway in reverse are not permitted.

S.2.5.3 Driveway Turn-Arounds
Driveways that exceed the maximum backup
distance shall have a turnaround area
immediately adjacent to the front wall of the
garage or carport. The turnaround shall be
adequate in size to allow a standard vehicle
one (1) two-point maneuver and an exit onto a
public street in a forward direction.
■ One (1) two-point maneuver consists of one
(1) forward motion and one (1) backward
motion (See Figure 2.5.1: Driveway
turnarounds).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 47
2-10
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 DRIVEWAY GRADIENT
*DRIVEWAY LENGTH REQUIREMENT
Up to 14’ Maximum 10%
From 14’-1” to 24’ Maximum 10% for the first 10’;
Maximum 15% for the remaining
length to garage entrance
Greater than 24’-1” Maximum 10% for the first 10’;
Maximum 15% for the last 10’
adjacent to the garage entrance;
Maximum 20% between these
two points
The cross slope of driveways shall not exceed 5%
*Driveway length measured from the start of the driveway at the property line.
58 Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
04 c. When a development has multiple
individual garages or tuck-under parking,
access shall be provided from an internal
driveway instead of multiple curb cuts
along these streets (see Fig. 4.3.1 and Fig.

4.3.3).
d. Do not create single-purpose driveways
to roll out solid waste bins or access utility
rooms. These facilities shall be accessed
through internal driveway aisles or shared
with the main driveway.
e. Locate curb cuts at least 20 feet away
from publicly-accessible open spaces and
pedestrian and bicycle entrances, except
within porte-cochères and for sites with
less than 60 feet of street frontage.

S.4.3.5 Drivew�� width
Driveway width shall be a minimum of 12 feet
and a maximum of 20 feet . Exception- Fire
lanes and driveways required by local utility
companies (see Fig. 4.3.5).

S.4.3.6 Drivew�� Design
a. When provided, driveway ramps shall start
at the property line at the same elevation
as the street right-of-way and meet the
requirements mentioned in Table 4.3.1:

Driveway gradient standards (also see Fig.

4.3.2).
b. When provided, driveways and driveway
ramps must meet the Standard Details per
City of Piedmont Public Works Department.

Fig. 4.3.2:  Maximum driveway slope based on length from property line.

Table 4.3.1:  Driveway gradient standards

DRIVEWAY GRADIENT
*DRIVEWAY LENGTH REQUIREMENT
Up to 14’ Maximum 10%
From 14’-1” to 24’ Maximum 10% for the fi rst 10’;
Maximum 15% for the remaining
length to garage entrance
Greater than 24’-1” Maximum 10% for the fi rst 10’;
Maximum 15% for the last 10’
adjacent to the garage entrance;
Maximum 20% between these
two points
*Driveway length measured from the start of the driveway at the property line.

Fig. 4.3.3:  Individual garages and tuck-under parking
accessed from a shared driveway located at the
side of the property.

Property Line Property Line Property Line
Face of Curb
Face of Curb
Face of Curb
STREET
STREET
STREET
GARAGE
FLOOR
GARAGE
FLOOR
GARAGE
FLOOR
Right
of Way
Right
of Way
Right
of Way
0-14’
14’-1” - 24’
>24’-1”
10’
10’
10’
10% slope
Max Up
10% slope
Max Up
10% slope
Max Up
15% slope
Max Up
20% slope
Max Up
15% slope
Max Up
10% slope
Max Down
10% slope
Max Down
10% slope
Max Down
15% slope
Max Down
20% slope
Max Down
15% slope
Max Down
ADMINISTRATIVE DRAFT  May 27, 2025
Figure 2.5.2: Driveway gradients
Table 2.5.4: Driveway Gradient Standards
S.2.5.4 Driveway Gradient
a. When provided, start the ramp for driveways
at the property line at the same elevation as
the street right of way and meet the slope
requirements mentioned in Table 2.5.4:

Driveway gradient standards.
b. The cross slope of driveways shall not
exceed 5 percent.

S.2.5.5 Numbers of Curbcut
a. Vacant lot:
■ On a vacant lot, no more than one driveway
curb cut is allowed.
■ Units on two lots created through an urban
lot split with only one lot having frontage
on a public right-of-way must share one
driveway, with an access easement to the
lot that does not have frontage recorded as
necessary, with a Homeowners Association
or covenant recorded with the final map
addressing shared responsibility for
driveways and curb cut, site drainage,
trash and recycling, utilities, and general
maintenance.
b. Lot with an existing home:
■ Two driveway curb cuts are allowed only
if the existing site layout or other physical
constraints physically precludes shared use
of a single driveway curb cut.
■ The maximum width of a second curb cut
where allowed shall be consistent with
the City of Piedmont Department of Public
Works Standard Details.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 48
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-11
Site organization, planning, and design
02 S.2.5.6 Maximum Garage Width
a. For garages that face the street, the
maximum width allowed is the amount
needed to fit two cars side by side.
b. A garage facing the street may not occupy
fifty percent or more of the width of the
primary structure.

S.2.5.7 Carports
New or expanded carports must be located
behind or to the side of the buildings in
relation to any streets fronting the subject
property. They may not be located between a
building and the street.

S.2.5.8 Stacked and Tandem Parking
a. Required parking spaces are allowed
to be stacked through mechanical
means, provided spaces assigned to
different dwelling units can be accessed
independently.
b. Tandem spaces are not allowed. All required
parking spaces must conform with Piedmont
City Code division 17.30.

S.2.5.9 Stormwater Management
Integrate green stormwater infrastructure and
Low Impact Development (LID) infrastructure
into design of surface parking areas per C.3
checklist.

S.2.5.10 Driver Visibility
Maintain driver visibility while entering or
exiting a development site from the public
realm by keeping the sides of the driveway
clear of landscaping and screening elements
exceeding 30 inches in height from finished
grade.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.5.1 Parking Location
a. Placing garages to the rear or side of
buildings is encouraged (see Fig 2.5.3).
b. Site and building design shall be utilized to
minimize the impact of parking aprons and
garages on the streetscape.

G.2.5.2 Visual Impact
Garage layout and design should minimize the
visual impact of the garage door and parking
apron on the streetscape.

Figure 2.5.3: Placing garages to the rear or side of buildings is encouraged.

Figure 2.5.4: Example of a carport in the rear yard provides sense of openness and maintains flexibility for uses in the private open space.

Yes Yes
DESIGN GUIDELINES:

4. The siting of a new detached or attached garage on a parcel should minimize any adverse impacts on the residence which it serves.

5. The design of a new detached or attached garage should avoid compromising the amenities of the residence it will serve, such as converting a yard into a garage, blocking a view, or reducing its sense of openness.

DESIGN COMMENTS:

A. An attached garage as a
horizontal extension to the front
face of the residence.

B. A carport in the rear yard provides a
sense of openness and maintains
flexibility for uses in the private
open space.

C. In new construction, the
perpendicular wing with the garage
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 49
2-12
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 2.6 Building Placement
Activate the public realm by placing buildings near streets and public open spaces.

PURPOSE
Building placement should ensure that new housing
contributes to a walkable, context-sensitive, and livable neighborhood fabric. These objective standards are
intended to:
■ Promote compatibility with the scale,
rhythm, and setbacks of surrounding
buildings;
■ Preserve privacy, sunlight access, and open
space for residents and neighbors;
■ Support vibrant streetscapes through
thoughtful orientation and massing;
■ Facilitate efficient use of land while
maintaining a comfortable transition
between single-family and multi-family
housing types.

By guiding the siting and arrangement of buildings,
these objective standards help integrate smaller-scale
multifamily housing into established neighborhoods
in a way that supports both community character and
housing diversity.

Garages
2 1
2 1

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.6.1 Street Yard Setback
Buildings shall comply with the street yard
setback of the respective zoning district.

S.2.6.2 Site Features and Structures in Street Yards
No fences or perimeter walls, retaining walls
greater than 30 inches tall as measured
from finished grade to top of wall, accessory
structures, or site features are allowed in the
street yard setbacks, unless the retaining
walls are used to support egress/ingress
infrastructure such as driveways for a
maximum height of 8 feet.

S.2.6.3 Multiple Units
Multiple units on one lot may be
accommodated in a single building in order
to emulate a single family home, or may be
accommodated in individual buildings (see
Figs. 2.6.1 and 2.6.2).

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.6.1 Consistency with Neighborhood Patterns
Buildings’ front setback from the street rightof-way should reflect the prevailing pattern found along other adjacent lots fronting the
same side of the street.

G.2.6.2 Public/Private Differentiation
The site landscaping should clearly
differentiate between the public right-ofway and the private space of the structure, delineating the front yard from the sidewalk.

Figure 2.6.1: Multiple units accommodated in a single building in order to emulate a single family home.

Figure 2.6.2: Multiple units accommodated in individual buildings, with the front unit addressing the street.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 50
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-13
Site organization, planning, and design
02 2.7 Walls and Fences
Minimize the visual prominence of walls and fences.

Figure 2.7.1: Retaining walls in street yards shall be no taller than 30 inches from finished grade. Where a single large retaining wall greater than 20 feet in length is used, its design shall incorporate a planting strip and irrigation system at its toe strip to allow for the planting of screening vegetation, or planting strip with irrigation system shall be incorporated at the top of the wall.

Yes
Yes
No
DESIGN GUIDELINES:

3. Where a single large retaining wall is
used, its design should incorporate a
planting strip and irrigation system
at its toe strip to allow for the
planting of screening vegetation, or
planting strip with irrigation system
should be incorporated at the top of
the wall. Ideally, both toe and top
planting strips should be provided.

4. The design of stepped or terraced
retaining walls should incorporate
planting strips to allow for the
planting of screening vegetation at
each level. A toe planting strip is
preferred because the vegetation it
supports is generally a more
effective visual screen than
overhanging vegetation.

5. Stepped retaining walls should be
consistent and should not result in
significant alterations to the natural
topography. The example shown at
right violates this principle and
detracts from the views from the
street right-of-way.

PURPOSE
Walls and fences should provide privacy, security,
and delineation of private and shared spaces
while maintaining the open quality of Piedmont’s
streetscape. They should support a pedestrian-friendly
environment by maintaining visibility at key frontages, ensuring compatibility with adjacent properties, and
enhancing the aesthetic quality of the development.

Materials, height, and placement should balance
resident needs for privacy with community integration
and visual openness.

Figure 2.7.2: Privacy fencing with a finished appearance on both sides

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.7.1 Height of Fences and Retaining Walls in
Front/Street Yards
a. No walls or fences of any height will be
allowed in the 20 -foot street yard setback,
except for retaining walls. Retaining walls
in the street yard shall be no taller than
30 inches tall as measured from finished
grade, unless the retaining walls are used
to support egress/ingress infrastructure
such as driveways for a maximum height of
8 feet.
b. Fences, gates or free standing walls of any
height are not allowed in the street yard.

S.2.7.2 Retaining Wall Materials
Retaining wall material shall be concrete, tile,
brick, split face block, or El Dorado stone.

CMU is allowed provided it is covered with
plaster stucco a minimum of 1/2 inch thick.

S.2.7.3 Planting Strips Alongside Retaining Walls
Where a single large retaining wall greater
than 20 feet in length is used, its design shall
incorporate a 6-inch or larger planting strip
and irrigation system at its toe strip to allow
for the planting of screening vegetation and/
or a planting strip with irrigation system at the
top of the wall (see Fig. 2.7.1).

S.2.7.4 Side and Rear Yard Fencing
Fencing up to 6 feet in height is allowed
outside the street yard setback, provided
portions closer 5 feet or closer to the building
are built of noncombustible materials (as
defined in the California Building Code).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 51
2-14
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 Figure 2.7.3: Privacy fencing with a finished appearance on both sides and a wood lattice top
S.2.7.5 Visibility
a. A retaining wall, hedge, or vegetation
located adjacent to a driveway may be no
taller than 30 inches within 10 feet of the
front edge of the property, so that it does
not obstruct the view of a driver exiting a
driveway.
b. No fence, wall, retaining wall, hedge, or
vegetation may be erected or grown in the
front or street side yard of a corner lot to
a height of more than 30 inches within the
sight distance zone, defined as a triangular
area formed by measuring 30 feet along
the front and side lot lines along the right-of
way from their “extended” intersection and
connecting these two points.

S.2.7.6 Gates
a. A gate located in a street or side yard
fence or wall should be a minimum 36
inches in width in order to accommodate an
emergency stretcher.
b. If a gate in a fence or wall located within
street or side yards and permitting access
to rear yards has a lock, it will require
a Knox Box for access by emergency
services.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 52
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-15
Site organization, planning, and design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.8.1 Location of Ground-Mounted Equipment
a. Equipment must not be placed within
required street yard setbacks unless
required by the utility service provider as
demonstrated by written documentation
from the provider.
b. Placement must not obstruct pedestrian
paths, fire lanes, or site lines at driveways
and intersections.

S.2.8.2 Screening of Ground-Mounted Equipment
a. Equipment shall be fully screened from
public view, with screening at least 6 inches
higher than the equipment but no more
than 6 feet tall (except for planting), unless
otherwise required for safety or noise
control.
b. Equipment shall be fully screened using one
or more of the following:
■ Solid wood or composite fencing (see Fig.

2.8.1)
■ Masonry walls finished to match the
primary structure
■ Evergreen landscaping or trellises
with climbing vines (minimum 3 feet at
installation, achieving full screening within
two years)
c. In new construction, conduits shall not
be exposed on exterior walls and shall
be embedded in walls or within a chase
designed for such use.

2.8 Services and Utilities
Locate services, utilities, and their access away from street view.

PURPOSE
Properly designed and located services and utilities
support functional service access, maintain the
aesthetic quality of residential areas, and contribute to a high-quality living environment for all residents.
d. In retrofits, surface mounted conduits may
be a concealed in a gutter or raceway
system provided they are painted the same
color as the wall.

S.2.8.3 Wall-Mounted Equipment
a. Wall-mounted water heaters must either:
■ Be mounted inside the dwelling; or
■ If mounted outside, must be enclosed in a
cabinet and painted the same color as the
adjacent wall.
b. Wall-mounted heat pump units must be
screened by fencing or walls built from
noncombustible materials (as defined in the
California Building Code) if placed 6 feet or
more above ground.

Figure 2.8.1: Example of a wallmounted water heater enclosed in a cabinet.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 53
2-16
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 S.2.8.4 Roof-Mounted Equipment (except solar
equipment)
Roof mounted equipment shall be:
a. Located so as not to be visible from any
adjacent street, which shall mean not
visible from the sidewalk level of the
opposite side of any street fronting the site;
b. Located at least five feet from the edge of
any roof of a street-facing building façade;
or
c. Screened with an enclosure that matches
the color and texture of the building
exterior.

S.2.8.5 Location of Refuse and Recycling
Containers
Common refuse and recycling containers shall
not be located:
a. Within any required street setback, except
during staging for pickups, or unless on a
sloping lot in which the portion of the lot
outside of the setback is uphill or downhill
from the street;
b. Within any required parking and
landscaped areas, except during staging
for pickups;
c. Within any other area required to remain
unencumbered, according to fire and
other applicable building and public safety
codes.

Figure 2.8.2: Example of refuse container enclosure
S.2.8.6 Design of Refuse and Recycling Container
Enclosures
a. All trash bins shall be enclosed and shielded
from view from the public right-of-way and
neighboring properties.
b. Trash enclosures shall be of a height at least
4 inches taller than the carts, and shall be
any of the following:
■ Any solid fence, wall, or combination of a
fence and wall at least 4 feet in height and
up to 6 feet in height (see Fig. 2.8.1).
■ An open fence up to 6 feet in height
in combination with dense evergreen
landscaping.
c. Trash enclosures may be provided
separately for each unit, or may be
combined for multiple units provided the
grouped enclosure meets the above design
standards.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.8.1 Utilities Screening
a. Conceal runs of all supply, exhaust and
venting plumbing, conduits, and flues within
the walls of a building. If concealment is
infeasible, the run should be minimized,
discretely placed, and painted to match
the adjacent wall. Multiple conduits may be
combined if allowed into one concealed
chase.
b. If allowed by utility companies and
Fire Department, screen or paint utility
connections to blend in with the exterior
materials to which they are mounted.
c. In unusual circumstances such as
conversion of an existing dwelling, when
it is physically not possible to install wall
mounted equipment inside a building,
equipment may be mounted within an
enclosed alcove on the exterior of a
building, provided that the alcove door is
flush with the exterior wall and painted to
match the surrounding wall material, and all
plumbing and electrical lines are not visible
on the exterior. Vents for equipment must
not project more than 12 inches from the
roof or wall surface.

G.2.8.2 External venting
The placement of ports or exterior wall
openings for clothes dryer vents, kitchen and
stove exhaust fans, air conditioning equipment
and other appliances should be sensitive
to their acoustical impacts on adjacent
residences.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 54
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-17
Site organization, planning, and design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.9.1 Private Open Spaces
Any private open space designated for
individual units shall have a minimum area of
35 square feet.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.9.1 Private Open Spaces
Private open spaces should be directly
accessible from and adjacent to the
associated dwelling unit (see Fig. 2.9.1).

G.2.9.2 Semi-Private Open Spaces
Create semi-private open spaces to transition
between the public realm and residential
units.

G.2.9.3 Solar Exposure
Proposed open spaces should be oriented
appropriately for solar exposure when possible
to create a more comfortable micro-climate.

2.9 Open Spaces
Open spaces define community character and create livable environments.

Figure 2.9.1: Examples of small open spaces for
individual units.

PURPOSE
The purpose of open spaces in 1–4 unit “missing
middle” housing developments is to foster livable,
healthy, and connected residential environments
by providing shared and private outdoor areas that
enhance quality of life, promote social interaction
among neighbors, support environmental sustainability,
and contribute to the neighborhood’s visual character.

These spaces must be thoughtfully integrated into
the site design to balance privacy with community,
ensure access to light and air, and offer opportunities for recreation, gardening, and passive enjoyment for
residents of all ages.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 55
2-18
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.10.1 Street Yard Setback Landscaping
a. The 20-foot street setback area must be
landscaped except for areas of ingress and
egress.
b. No artificial turf is permitted in street yards
or street-facing side yards.

S.2.10.2 Interior Side and Rear Setback Landscaping
a. Provide a fence or landscape screening
(e.g., hedges or trellises) along side and rear
property lines (see Fig. 2.10.1).
■ If a project is proposing to convert existing
home to a duplex or adding a second floor
to make two units, fencing/landscape
screening must be provided.
■ If a project is proposing a lot split and
developing only the resulting parcel,
fencing/landscape screening is only
required for the resulting parcel where the
new development is proposed.
b. Landscape screening shall be a minimum
of six feet tall at maturity.
c. Artificial turf is allowed in interior side and
rear yards, but as a hardscape material, it
does not count towards the 30% landscape
minimum.

2.10 Landscaping
Create welcoming places and enhance the quality of the environment with sustainable landscaping areas.

PURPOSE
Landscaping softens open spaces and buildings to
create welcoming, attractive places and maintain
privacy between neighbors. Rather than being used as
an afterthought to mask inappropriately positioned or
designed structures, they should instead be part of a
comprehensive site development design scheme and
should be compatible with the design of structures
found on the property.

Green stormwater infrastructure and Low Impact
Development (LID) techniques when used for
landscaping can create unique features, manage
stormwater, and enhance environmental quality and
character of developments.

Figure 2.10.1: This side yard incorporates hedges along the property line to provide landscape screening. This example also includes windows placed high for to provide privacy between neighbors.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 56
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-19
Site organization, planning, and design
02 S.2.10.3 Plants
a. Plant size at maturity shall not exceed:
■ 30 inch height within 10 feet of a sidewalk
or driveway.
■ The height of any building aperture within
10 feet of the aperture.
b. Plant species shall be native, low-water
usage, and low maintenance, meeting
Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance
requirements.
c. Planting shall cover at least 30 percent of
the entire development site and provide
shade in south-facing and west-facing
areas.

S.2.10.4 Trees
a. Tree wells shall be at least four feet larger
than the tree trunk diameter at maturity.
b. Designate 700 cubic feet of noncompacted soil for small trees, 1400 cubic feet of non-compacted soil for
medium trees, and 2100 cubic feet of
non-compacted soil for large trees to allow
trees to reach their maturity. Structural
soil systems, soil cells, or continuous soil
trenches are example of ways to reach to
the above soil volumes.
c. When planting trees on green roofs,
provide a minimum soil depth of 36
inches and soil volume for each tree as
identified in (c), and irrigation to support the
vegetation.

S.2.10.5 Tree Distances from Buildings
Notwithstanding Fire Code requirements for
the Wildland-Urban Interface (WWUI), the
following minimum distances shall be provided
from the center of trees to the edges of
buildings for all trees to reach maturity and to
prevent unnecessary tree removal:
a. Five feet for small trees (a tree which is a
maximum of 25 feet in height or canopy
spread at maturity),
b. 12 feet for medium trees (a tree which is
26 to 50 feet at height or canopy spread at
maturity), and
c. 20 feet for large trees (a tree which is 51
feet or more at height or canopy spread at
maturity).

S.2.10.6 Vertical Clearances
a. Provide minimum vertical clearance for tree
canopies at maturity as follows:
■ 14 feet around driveways, and
■ 10 feet for tree canopies immediately
adjacent to sidewalks and patios.

S.2.10.7 Onsite Drainage
Drainage shall comply with current version
of the C.3 Stormwater Program guidelines as
adopted by the Alameda County.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.10.1 Existing Trees
Existing mature trees should be preserved and
incorporated as part of the overall landscape
design.

G.2.10.2 Shading
a. Place planting according to sunlight needs
b. Locate shade trees strategically to reduce
building energy consumption.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 57
2-20
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Site organization, planning, and design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.11.1 Orientation
Orient all site lighting directly downwards to
prevent light pollution and excess glare in the
public realm.

S.2.11.2 Outdoor Lighting Fixtures
a. Exterior lighting shall be shielded, directed
downward, and located only at exterior
doors and along the path of travel from the
public right-of-way.
b. The source of the light (light bulb) shall not
be visible from 4 feet away from the fixture
(see Figs. 2.11.1 and 2.11.2).
c. Flood-lights, LED flashing, and strobe
lighting are prohibited.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.11.1 Outdoor Lighting Fixtures
a. Install energy-efficient lighting fixtures that
provide an adequate level of lighting for the
safety of building occupants and visitors,
without spilling onto adjacent properties
b. Use daylight sensors for site lighting to limit
excess lighting and conserve energy.
c. Choose fixtures with Backlight, Up light, and
Glare (BUG) rating of B0, U0, G0.

G.2.11.2 Landscape Lighting
Incorporate subtle landscape lighting that
highlights key features without overwhelming
the natural surroundings.

2.11 Site Lighting
Use lighting to create safe and inviting places.

Figure 2.11.1: Example of exterior lighting that is shielded, directed downward, located along the path of travel from the public right-of-way.

Figure 2.11.2: Examples of exterior lighting that are shielded and directed downward.

PURPOSE
Site lighting should ensure safety, security, and
accessibility for residents and visitors while preserving neighborhood character and minimizing light pollution.

Lighting should enhance the pedestrian experience,
support wayfinding, and provide adequate illumination
for shared paths, entries, and parking areas without
negatively impacting adjacent properties or the
nighttime environment.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 58
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-21
02 2.12 Massing, Form, and Scale
Buildings with design, form, and massing similar to surrounding buildings support a cohesive urban fabric.

Figure 2.12.1: Duplex with two side-by-side units

PURPOSE
New 1-4 unit developments should be designed to
be compatible with the surrounding neighborhood
context while supporting increased housing diversity.

These objective standards aim to promote housescale building forms that integrate into established residential areas, preserve neighborhood character,
and support a walkable, livable environment.

Figure 2.12.2: Duplex with two stacked units
Figure 2.12.3: Duplex with detached Accessory Dwelling Unit (ADU)
Figure 2.12.4: Urban lot split with two duplexes (one on each lot)
Garages
2 1
1 2
Garages
2 1
ADU
Garages
2 1
3 4
Garages

BUILDING DESIGN
LOT 1
LOT 2
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 59
2-22
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.12.1 Allowed Building Types
a. Detached building with one unit.
b. Duplex consisting of two side-by-side units,
both along the front of the building and
within a single building massing. The type
has the appearance of a medium-to-large,
single-unit house.
c. Duplex consisting of two stacked units, both
along the front of the building and within a
single building massing. The type has the
appearance of a medium-to-large, singleunit house.
d. Accessory Dwelling Units (ADUs) and Junior
Accessory Dwelling Units (JADUs), subject
to the limitations specified in Section 2.2.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.12.1 Neighborhood Compatibility
New buildings should be physically
integrated into the neighborhood. Maintaining
compatibility with the scale and mass of the
existing buildings on contiguous lots prevents
the new structures from overpowering or
dominating the existing buildings within the
neighborhood.

Figure 2.12.5: This example features two units
accommodated in a single building in order to emulate a single family home.

Figure 2.12.6: This example has one unit in the front
facing the street, and a second unit at the rear.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 60
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-23
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.13.1 Roof Articulation
Rooflines twenty-five feet or longer that face
a street or an adjacent residential use shall be
articulated with recessed or projecting gabled
roof elements, roof dormers, changes in roof
heights, changes in direction or pitch of roof
slopes, and other similar methods.

S.2.13.2 Skylights
Skylights are permitted provided they are
flat-profile skylights that project no more than
12 inches from the roof surface, or tubular
daylighting devices with a maximum 14 inch
diameter tube.

S.2.13.3 Gutters
All gutters shall contain features to direct
rainwater away from exterior walls including
one or more of the following:
a. Projecting eaves (minimum 12-inch
projection)
b. Scuppers (minimum 12-inch projection if no
downspouts are used)
c. Gutters with downspouts

2.13 Roof Form and Design
Design roofs to be compatible with surroundings and add character to buildings.

PURPOSE
Roof form and design are important for how new
buildings contribute to the visual coherence and
character of the surrounding neighborhood while
supporting the scale, variety, and livability appropriate to their residential context. Roof designs should help
reduce the perceived mass of larger structures, create
architectural interest, and support functional needs
such as drainage, solar energy systems, and habitable
attic space. These objective standards promote
compatibility with adjacent single-family homes
and reinforce a human-scaled streetscape through
thoughtful variation in form, pitch, orientation, and
detail.

Figure 2.13.1: The variation in roof form provides scale and visual interest.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 61
2-24
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
4 / Multifamily And Mixed-use Developments 45
variations in roof and parapet heights.

Flat roofs allow for a contemporary design and
provide space for multipurpose facilities including
community spaces, low maintenance green roofs,
green stormwater infrastructure, renewable energy
generation, and mechanical equipment required for
the building.
d. Parapet and flat membrane roofing.

Parapet segments may not exceed 25 feet
in length without interruption in height or
form.
e. Roof decks that are enclosed on the sides
and rear, either partially or completely,
provided the deck and deck occupants are
not visible from the right-of-way or adjacent
single-family property within 300 feet.

Fig. 4.11.1: Examples of common roof forms.
needed to achieve a net zero energy
consumption result on site.

S.4.11.2 Continuity
Break the continuity of pitched roofs and
roofs with horizontal eaves more than 150 feet
in length using gables, building projections, or
other building articulation.

S.4.11.3 Roof Treatment
Design buildings with at least one of the
following roofline edge treatments:
a. A decorative cornice treatment (other than
colored stripes or bands)
b. A sloped roof with overhangs that extend
a minimum 12 inches and maximum 36
inches, including the eave and gutter
profile (see Fig. 4.11.4).
c. A parapet not exceeding the maximum
height as allowed by the underlying Zoning
district.

Flat
Gable
Flat (with parapet)
Gable
A-Frame
Hipped
Shed
Hip and Valley
Cross Hipped
ADMINISTRATIVE DRAFT | March 31, 2025
02 Figure 2.13.2: Examples of common roof forms.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.13.1 Preferred Roof Forms
a. While flat roofs are allowed, gabled roofs,
hipped roofs, and other traditional styles are
preferred (see Fig. 2.13.2).
b. Roofs should include overhangs and eaves
appropriate to the architectural style of the
building.

G.2.13.2 Mechanical Equipment
Group vents, exhausts, and other roof
penetrations so that they do not create visual
clutter.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 62
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-25
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.14.1 Horizontal Articulation
a. Facades over 25 feet in length (measured
parallel to the street) must include at least
one horizontal wall plane offset of at least
2 feet.
b. Articulation must occur at a minimum
interval of every 20 to 30 feet.
c. Acceptable methods of articulation are:
■ Projecting or recessed bays, at least 2 feet
in depth
■ Building step-backs, at least 2 feet in depth
■ Covered porches, stoops, or loggias with
a minimum depth of at least three feet and
a minimum horizontal area of thirty square
feet
■ Variation in roof form

2.14 Facade Articulation
Design buildings with attractive, timeless, and sophisticated architecture.

PURPOSE
The design and articulation of building façades adds
to the visual richness of developments and creates
patterns and scale within neighborhoods. Elements
such as bay windows, changes in plane and height,
and differentiation of materials and colors facilitate
façade articulation and mitigate the monolithic
appearance of large walls and roofs.

Figure 2.14.1: Examples of horizontal articulation elements. covered porch
variation offset
in roof
form
projecting bay
covered porch
projecting bay
offset variation in roof form
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 63
2-26
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.15.1 Individual Unit Expression
Each dwelling must have a distinct entry,
visible and oriented toward the street, or a
pedestrian walkway, or common open space.

S.2.15.2 Entry Recesses and Projections
Primary building entrances must include
weather protection with one of the following:
a. A recess in the building wall with a
minimum width of 4 feet and depth of 3
feet.
b. A roofed projection (such as a porch) with
a minimum depth of at least three feet and
a minimum horizontal area of thirty square
feet. Roofed projections may encroach
into required street yard setbacks up to a
maximum three feet.

S.2.15.3 Addressing Standards
New and existing buildings shall be provided
with approved address identification:
a. The address identification shall be legible
and placed in a position that is visible from
the street or road fronting the property.
b. Address identification characters shall
be clearly distinguishable from their
background by ensuring the characters are
a light color on a dark background, or a dark
color on a light background.
c. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers
or alphabetical letters. Numbers shall not be
spelled out.

2.15 Building Access and Entrance Design
Provide welcoming entries that contribute to the streetscape.

PURPOSE
Well-designed and easily accessible entrances
perform a key role in the overall design and character
of neighborhoods. Elements such as stoops stairways,
landings, and porches add visual character to the
building and streetscape.
d. Each character shall be not less than 4
inches high with a minimum stroke width of
1/2 inch.
e. Where required by the fire code official,
address identification shall be provided in
additional approved locations to facilitate
emergency response.
f. Where access is by means of a private road
and the building cannot be viewed from
the public way, a monument, pole or other
sign or means shall be used to identify the
structure.
g. Address identification shall be maintained
and remain in perpetuity.

Figure 2.15.1: Buildings shall be provided with approved address identification that is legible and placed in a position that is visible from the street or road fronting the property.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 64
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-27
Building Design
02 2.16 Conversion of Existing Single Family Dwellings
Maintain architectural integrity of homes converted into multiple units.

PURPOSE
Conversion of single-family homes into multiple units
should involve thoughtful planning and respect of the
existing neighborhood setting.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.16.1 Preserve Street Presence
Retain existing porches and stoops. An
alteration shall not result in the enclosure of
an existing porch.

S.2.16.2 Original Architectural Details and Materials
Construction of additions and alterations
a shall not obscure, damage, destroy or
remove any original architectural details or
materials of an existing main building, except
as necessary to construct and integrate an
addition.

Original architectural details refer to any
distinctive or unique design elements,
features, or materials that were part of the
building’s initial construction, including:
■ original brickwork
■ specific types of stone cladding
■ handcrafted wood siding
■ unique plaster finishes
■ carved woodwork
■ decorative iron railings
■ cornices, medallions
■ specific molding around windows and
doors
■ pattern of exterior tiles; and
■ detailed trims.

S.2.16.3 Second Story Additions
The floor area of any upper (second or higher)
story may not exceed 100% of the floor area
of the story directly below plus the area of any
recesses on the story directly above.

S.2.16.4 Raising a Building to Create a New Ground/
First Floor
An existing single story structure can be raised
to create a new full story under the original
structure if the project incorporates all of the
following design treatments:
a. The finished floor level of the new full
story is at or above the average grade of
the highest and lowest portion of the lot
covered by the existing structure, and on
the front elevation at least two stair steps
above grade.
b. The height of the new first floor, as
measured from the top of the floor joist to
the bottom of the ceiling joist, shall match
the height of the original lower floor.
c. In instances when a building is raised more
than 50% of the height of the original lower
floor, as measured from grade to the top of
the floor joist, entry porches and stairs shall
be relocated to the new lower floor.
d. The grade at the bottom of the staircase or
the front of the entire building is elevated
to provide terraced landings necessary to
step up to the existing staircase without
extending the staircase.

Figure 2.16.1: Example of a single family home converted into a duplex. The entrance to the second unit is at the back of the porch.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 65
2-28
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
02 S.2.16.5 Roof Forms
a. An addition or alteration shall maintain the
roof form(s) of the existing building and
match the existing roof pitch.
b. An addition, or alteration, must include
eaves that match the eaves on the existing
building, including depth.

S.2.16.6 Materials
The primary exterior material(s) used on an
addition or alteration, must be selected from
primary exterior materials of the existing
building.

S.2.16.7 Garage Conversions
A garage conversion shall either:
a. Maintain the garage door design on the
exterior if adjacent to a driveway or garage
apron; or
b. If the garage door design is to be
eliminated and window(s) and/or door(s)
installed, then:
■ The driveway may be maintained with the
existing paved area except for a 36-inchwide, minimum, area for low planting between the driveway and the subject wall
of the converted garage, and except for a
maximum 60-inch-wide path to an entry
door;
■ The outline of the previous garage door(s)
shall no longer be visible; and
■ The walls replacing the previous garage
door(s) must match the existing house’s
wall material and color.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.16.1 Sensitive Conversion
Consider converting the main home into a
duplex or triplex by reconfiguring the interior,
adding a rear or side addition, or converting
the basement/attic.

G.2.16.2 Maintain Neighborhood Character
a. Keep the street yard and maintain a clear
front door.
b. Avoid placing parking in the street yard
setback — tuck it behind or beside the
home.
c. Maintain existing landscaping, including
hedges and trees.

G.2.16.3 Addition Design
If additions are necessary, they should be
subordinate to the original structure and
placed to the rear or side of the building.

Figure 2.16.2: Garage converted to new unit with garage door design and driveway apron maintained.

Figure 2.16.3: If the garage door design is to be eliminated and window(s) and/or door(s) installed, the driveway may be maintained with the existing paved area except for a 36-inchwide, minimum, planting area between the driveway and the subject wall of the converted garage, and except for a maximum 60-inch-wide path to the entry door.

Garage
converted
into new unit
Garage door
design on the
exterior and
driveway apron
maintained
Garage
converted
into new unit
Garage door
removed
36” min wide
planting area
60” max path
to entry door
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 66
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-29
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.17.1 Balconies
a. Balconies shall be made of wood or metal,
and may be open or covered (see Fig. 2.17.1).
b. Second floor balconies shall have a
minimum height clearance of 10 feet from
grade. Supporting brackets shall have 8 feet
minimum clearance from grade.
c. Balcony railings must be constructed with
balusters, posts or pickets that are no
more than 1.5 inches wide and are spaced
at least 3 inches apart. Alternatively, the
railing can be constructed with tempered
glass or clear polycarbonate panels.

The applicant shall submit a material
specification sheet and a construction
drawing that clearly indicates the
dimensions and spacing of all railing
components.

S.2.17.2 Roof Decks
a. Roof decks are only permitted when
located on an upper floor of a multi-story
building where the deck is situated above a
projecting lower floor.
b. Stand-alone decks situated on rooftops are
not permitted.

S.2.17.3 Neighbor Privacy
a. Balconies and decks within 15 feet from
side or rear property lines shall utilize
screening barriers (min. 5 ft. 6 in.) to prevent
views toward an adjacent property line.

2.17 Balconies and Decks
Balconies and decks enhance enjoyment of the outdoors, and can add detail and visual interest to buildings.

Figure 2.17.1: Balconies shall be made of wood or metal, and may be open or covered.

PURPOSE
Balconies and decks serve as private or semi-private
open spaces that enhance the livability of 1–4 unit
developments. These elements provide residents
with direct access to outdoor areas for relaxation,
gardening, and social interaction, particularly in
compact environments where private yards may be
limited or unavailable. Well-designed balconies and
decks contribute to quality of life, support indooroutdoor living, and can be strategically located to ensure privacy, minimize noise impacts, and promote
a sense of community while respecting adjacent
properties.

Figure 2.17.2:Roof decks are only permitted when located on an upper floor of a multi-story building where the deck is situated above a projecting lower floor, and shall be screened if located within 15 feet of side or rear property lines.

Roof deck
situated above
a projecting
lower floor
Screening barrier
Min 5’-6” tall
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 67
2-30
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
Window inset min. 2”
from building facade
Trim min. 3” wide and 1”
thick
12” offset min.
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.18.1 Window Recess or Trim
a. For windows on street-facing building
facades, provide a recess of at least two
inches in depth from the building facade
(see Fig. 2.18.1).
b. When no inset is provided for a window,
provide a minimum of three inches wide and
one-inch-thick exterior window trim
(see Fig. 2.18.1).
c. Use the same color for all window frames
and trims along a building facade.
d. Foam is not permitted as a window trim
material.

S.2.18.2 Window Placement and Privacy
a. New windows facing existing dwellings
(on abutting property) within 10 feet of the
property line shall be offset (horizontal and
vertical) by a minimum of twelve inches, as
measured from the window frame, from the
adjacent property window frame to avoid
direct view into adjacent properties (see Fig.

2.18.2).
b. Second-story windows within 10 feet of
property lines must be:
■ Translucent/frosted glass up to 6 feet
above the floor;
■ Clerestory; or
■ Face away from (be perpendicular to) the
property line

2.18 Windows
Windows as an important architectural element.

PURPOSE
In addition to their functional aspects, windows are
an important component in the overall architectural
design. Window placement and design ensure
compatibility with the neighborhood’s character while
maximizing the functionality and livability of the units.

Figure 2.18.1: Windows that are inset from the building facade help create a shadow detail that adds to the
richness of the building facade. For windows on building walls of wood exterior materials, provide a trim or recess of at least two inches in width, or a combination of trim and recess at least two inches in width
4 / Multifamily And Mixed-use Developments 65

BUILDING DESIGN
Placeholder text - Design buildings with attractive, timeless, and sophisticated architecture that is contemporary 04 and corresponds to the existing neighborhood.

4.18 Windows

PURPOSE
Buildings with no or few windows do not engage with
the street and are often over-reliant on mechanical
systems and are unsustainable. Sealed off spaces can
be less healthy due to poor air quality. Windows that
respond to context, climate and orientation will create a cityscape that is interesting and sustainable.

Individual in-window and through-wall air conditioning
units are undesirable as they become dirty with lack of external maintenance. Replacement with mismatched
units creates a haphazard appearance.

STANDARDS
S.4.18.1 Privacy
Windows to primary living spaces within 10
feet of or facing a side setback or within 25
feet of and facing another unit on-site shall:
a. Be angled away from the adjacent side
setback line a minimum of 30 degrees,
measured from a line perpendicular to the
side setback line,
b. Have a minimum sill height of 42 inches
from the finished floor, or
c. Use permanently translucent or frosted
glazing.

S.4.18.2 Openable windows
When openable windows are provided at a
ground floor facade with zero front setback,
they shall either open inwards or be recessed
at least three feet so that they do not interfere
with the pedestrian movement on the
sidewalk.

S.4.18.3 Window alignment at Shared Property Lines
Do not directly align windows on a building
facade parallel to and within 20 feet of shared
property line with windows on the adjacent
property.

Fig. 4.18.1: Examples of windows by operation.

WINDOW

ANGLE/PRIVACY
Fig. 4.18.2: Placeholder diagram - window
Awning
Fixed
Double Hung
Casement
Double Hung with
divided lites
Casement with
divided lites
Sliding
ADMINISTRATIVE DRAFT | March 31, 2025
Figure 2.18.2: Windows shall be offset 12 inches from
windows on adjacent dwellings, or use obscured glass.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 68
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-31
Building Design
02 S.2.18.3 Divided Lites/Simulated Divided Lites
If windows include mullion/muntin grids,
simulated divided-lite grilles are acceptable
only if they are located on both the outside
and inside faces of the window, have spacer
bars between the double panes of glass, and
a thickness of at least 1/2 inch on each side of
the window.

S.2.18.4 Glazing
Reflective tinting of glazing is not permitted.

S.2.18.5 Materials
a. Foam is not permitted as a window material
b. Vinyl is not a permitted window material,
unless it is paintable.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.18.1 Window Hierarchy
Maintain window hierarchy of primary and
secondary windows by providing greater level
of detail for the former such as divided lites,
increased size, and arches. In all cases, there
should be consistency in window proportions,
operation, trim, and appearance.

Figure 2.18.4: For windows on building walls of stucco, provide a recess of at least two inches from the outer wall surface. Figure 2.18.3: For windows on building walls of wood exterior materials, provide a trim or recess of at least two inches in width, or a combination of trim and recess at least two inches in width.

Figure 2.18.5: Windows with three-dimensional divided-lite grilles
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 69
2-32
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.19.1 Primary Building Materials
A primary building material shall mean a
material that covers 60 percent or more of a
facade surface area excluding windows. When
there is a change in exterior building material,
the material change shall occur at the inside
corner of a building form, or a minimum of 8
feet beyond an outside corner. The following
primary cladding materials are allowed:
a. Wood
b. Composition board siding
c. Fiber cement siding
d. Stucco (minimum 2-coat)
e. Stone (real stone – not faux stone – and
shall extend vertically to the foundation)
f. Stone-colored brick (shall extend vertically to
the foundation)
g. Brick or brick veneer (shall extend vertically
to the foundation)
S.2.19.2 Secondary Building Materials
A secondary building material shall mean a
material that covers 40 percent or less of a
facade surface area excluding transparent
surfaces. The following secondary cladding
materials are allowed:
a. Metal (wrought iron, copper, bronze) with a
non-reflective finish
b. Terra-cotta tile
c. Brick or brick veneer (shall extend vertically
to the foundation)
d. Glazed tile

2.19 Building Materials and Finishes
The quality of the materials helps define a building’s character and creates durability.

PURPOSE
The choice of building materials and finishes
ensures that new housing blends seamlessly into
existing neighborhoods while promoting durability,
sustainability, and design quality. The selection
and application of materials and finishes should
support cohesive architectural character, enhance
visual interest at the pedestrian scale, and reinforce
neighborhood identity.

S.2.19.3 Wood and Fiber Cement Siding
Wood siding includes horizontal siding
consisting of shakes, shingles, shiplap, tongue
and groove, v-groove, or lapped profiles in
wood or materials that emulate wood such as
fiber cement. Vertical siding includes board
and batten or v-groove profiles in wood or
materials that emulate wood such as fiber
cement.
■ Board siding materials shall provide a
minimum exposure of 6 inches.
■ Board Siding Materials shall either be
factory finished; or stained or primed and
painted on all six sides.
■ Vertical board or board and batten siding
should be detailed with uniform exposure
widths.

S.2.19.4 Stone and Brick Siding
a. Face brick and stone shall provide full
units or custom corner modules at outside
corners.
b. Adhered masonry and tile should provide
mitered joints or manufacturer’s adhered
whole corner piece at outside corners to
create the appearance of a corner block.
c. All Masonry Materials shall provide 3/8”
maximum concave or v-joint mortar or grout
joints in colors matching the color of the
block or tile material.
d. Where masonry spans an opening, masonry
units shall be oriented to provide an arch,
jack arch, masonry lintel, or soldier row
extending beyond the opening.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 70
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-33
Building Design
02 S.2.19.5 Prohibited Materials
The following materials shall be prohibited:
a. Vinyl siding
b. T1-11 siding
c. Plastic
d. Sheet fiberglass
e. Rolled metal sheet, rolled residential
aluminum siding, and extruded aluminum
siding
f. Concrete blocks
S.2.19.6 Roof Materials
All materials listed below are allowed for
roofs:
a. Dimensional (‘architectural’) asphalt shingle
b. Composition shingle
c. Spanish barrel tile, regularly or irregularly
laid, and brown or brown-red in color
d. Concrete roof tiles
e. Slate tile
f. Powder-coated standing seam metal in a
non-reflective dark brown or dark bronze
color.
g. Modified bitumen, tar and gravel (or other
granular), PVC, SPF (flat roofs only)
h. Cool roof membrane roofing, nonreflective and medium gray color (flat roofs only, concealed by solid raised parapets no
less than 36” in height)
S.2.19.7 Trim and Utilities Materials
a. Downspouts shall be round or rectangular
metal; PVC not allowed.
b. Gutter shall be half round or ogee-profile
metal; PVC not allowed.
c. Railings shall have square balusters, turned
spindles in wood or metal; PVC trim not
allowed.
d. Trim shall be wood, composition board,
fiber-cement board, and molded millwork
for built-up sections. For soffits and
porch ceilings, exterior-grade paintable
gypsum sheathing, plaster, T&G wood,
exposed rafters, or composite. Continuous
perforated soffit materials and the use of
vinyl panel systems are not permitted.

S.2.19.8 Timber Protection
Exterior timber should be protected from decay
by stain and sealant.

S.2.19.9 Ferrous Material Protection
Exterior ferrous metals should be protected
from corrosion either using galvanized,
stainless, or weathering steel.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.2.19.1 Alternating Siding Exposures
Alternating horizontal lap siding exposures
should be considered where ground floors
benefit from a greater level of detail.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 71
2-34
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
02 OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.20.1 Covered Parking
All required parking must be covered, either
by a carport or enclosed garage.

S.2.20.2 Tandem Parking
Required parking may not be provided in a
tandem configuration.

S.2.20.3 Attached Garages
a. In order to limit the appearance of new or
expanded attached garages that face the
street, garage width shall not exceed fifty
percent of the linear street-facing building
facade of any 1-4 unit development.
b. Attached garages located on the front of
the building shall be recessed at least 5 feet
behind the front elevation wall plane of the
primary dwelling unit.

S.2.20.4 Detached Garages
a. The width and depth of the garage shall
not exceed the dimensions of the minimum
parking required for the primary unit(s);
b. The garage height shall not exceed 60%
of the height of the primary unit or 16 feet,
whichever is higher;
c. When both the primary unit and garage are
newly constructed, the same materials shall
be used for each.

S.2.20.5 Shared Garages
Shared garages shall not be wider and
deeper than a maximum of 25 feet.

2.20 Parking Design
Accommodate parking needs while respecting neighborhood character.

Figure 2.20.1: The garage door in this example is situated behind the front elevation wall plane.

PURPOSE
Thoughtful design of garages, driveways, and carports
should support neighborhood character, reduce visual
dominance of vehicles, minimize curb cuts and paving,
and maintain a pedestrian-oriented streetscape.

Parking elements should be safe, functional, and
visually subordinate to the overall building design.

S.2.20.6 Garage Doors
All garages are to have electrically motorized
doors that cover their vehicular entrances.

S.2.20.7 Carports
a. Carports shall be located behind or to the
side of the primary structure.
b. Carports shall utilize the same materials and
have the same paint colors as the primary
structure.
c. Structural supports (posts/columns) must
be designed as finished architectural
elements (e.g., wood, steel, or masonry —
no unfinished metal poles).
d. Trash and storage areas within or adjacent
to carports must be enclosed with fire
resistant construction or screened from
view, and must be outside the required
parking space minimum dimensions.

S.2.20.8Gates
Any existing or new driveway gates in front of a
garage or carport shall be motorized.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 72
2 / One-to-four Residential Unit Developments
2-35
Building Design
02 2.21 Architectural Lighting
Create safe and inviting places with lighting that highlights buildings’ distinctive elements while respecting neighbors.

PURPOSE
Architectural lighting is intended to enhance safety,
support neighborhood compatibility, and highlight
key architectural features in a manner that is both
functional and context-sensitive. Lighting should
create a welcoming environment for residents and
visitors, ensure visibility and security at entries and walkways, and contribute to the overall aesthetic of
the development without disrupting neighbors or
impacting the night sky.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.2.21.1 Building-Mounted Lighting
Lights on the building facade shall be
incorporated into facade design for all
facades. Fixtures shall be:
a. Fully shielded and directed downward onto
the building facade and onto paving of
entrance areas;
b. The same materials as the building trim/
accent; and
c. Covered with frosted or opaque glass.

S.2.21.2 Floodlighting
The use of floodlights is prohibited.

S.2.21.3 Electrical Boxes and Conduits
a. Electrical boxes shall be placed on the nonstreet facing facade. b. Electrical boxes on a street facing facade
shall be enclosed by a covering that utilizes
he same material and colors as the structure
it is installed on.
c. Conduits cannot be exposed on exterior
walls and must be embedded either in walls
or landscaping.

Figure 2.21.1: Lights on the building facade shall fully shielded and directed downward onto the building facade and onto paving of entrance areas.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 73
2-36
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
Building Design
02 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 74
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-1

BUILDING DESIGN
ACCESSORY DWELLING UNITS 03

APPLICABILITY

3.1 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

SITE ORGANIZATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN

3.2 Site Organization, Planning, and Design . . . . . . . 3-3

BUILDING DESIGN

3.3 Building Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

CITY APPROVED ADU PLANS

3.4 City Approved Plans for Rent-Restricted ADUs . 3-12 03 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 75
3-2
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
03 In this chapter, the term “ADU” shall refer to both
Accessory Dwelling Units and Junior Accessory
Dwelling Units as defined in Chapter 17 of the
Piedmont City Code, unless otherwise specified.

S.3.1.1 Zoning Standards
All ADUs are subject to the zoning standards
as outlined in Chapter 17 of the Piedmont City
Code.

S.3.1.2 Government Code Section 66323
Qualifications
Government Code section 66323 creates four
categories of ADUs that are only subject to
the zoning standards outlined in Chapter 17 of
the Piedmont City Code, and are not subject
to the additional standards or guidelines in
this chapter.

The four categories of ADUs specified in
section 66323 are:
a. Single-Family Converted ADUs and
JADUs. One ADU per lot is permitted
within the converted space of a proposed
or existing single-family dwelling or
accessory structure. This type of ADU must
have exterior access and setbacks for fire
and safety but is not subject to a four-foot
side and rear yard setback.
■ ADUs converted from accessory structures
are eligible for a 150 square-foot expansion
to accommodate ingress and egress. For
example, if a second story from a single
family dwelling is converted into an ADU,
a stairwell of not more than 150 square
feet could be added, among other types

3.1 Applicability
of ingress and egress configurations that
comply with the local building code.
■ In addition, one JADU per lot is permitted
within the proposed or existing space
of a single-family dwelling or attached
accessory structure and must have exterior
access, side and rear setbacks for fire and
safety.
■ JADUs must also comply with the
provisions of JADU Law found in
Government Code sections 66333-66339.

For the purposes of constructing a JADU,
attached garages are part of a single family
dwelling.
b. Single-Family Detached ADUs. One
detached new construction ADU that
does not exceed four-foot side and rear
yard setbacks is permitted on lots with an
existing or proposed single-family dwelling.

The maximum unit size is 800 square feet
with a height limitation as specified in
Chapter 17 of the Piedmont City Code.
c. Multifamily Converted ADUs. ADUs may
be created within the portions of existing
multifamily structures that are not used as
livable space. At least one ADU is allowed
within an existing multifamily dwelling, as
well as up to 25 percent of the existing
multifamily dwelling units. Examples of
structures that are not used as livable space
include, but are not limited to: storage
rooms, boiler rooms, passageways, attics,
basements, or garages.
d. Multifamily Detached ADUs. Up to two
detached ADUs are allowed on a lot that
has a proposed multifamily dwelling, or up
to eight detached ADUs are allowed on a lot
with an existing multifamily dwelling, not to
exceed the number of existing units on the
lot. These ADUs are subject to four foot rear
and side yard setbacks, and height limits as
specified in Chapter 17 of the Piedmont City
Code. A setback on an existing multifamily
dwelling that is less than four feet is
not required to be modified in order to
accommodate an ADU.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 76
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-3

SITE ORGANIZATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN
03 PURPOSE
The purpose of Accessory Dwelling Unit (ADU) and
Junior Accessory Dwelling Unit (JADU) regulations in
Piedmont is to facilitate the development of wellintegrated, context-sensitive ADUs that expand the City’s housing options while preserving neighborhood
character, ensuring public safety, and maintaining
community livability.

These regulations are intended to support housing
affordability, provide opportunities for multigenerational living, and align with state housing law, all while respecting the unique scale and design qualities
of Piedmont’s residential neighborhoods.

3.2 Site Organization, Planning, and Design
Maintain privacy and support thoughtful design and site planning, as well as encourage coordination and cooperation between neighbors.

Figure 3.2.1:The entrance of the ADU is greater than 10 feet from the shared property line and does not duplicate the entry of the primary dwelling.

ADU entrance Primary dwelling
entrance
Figure 3.2.2: The entrance(s) of the ADU(s) should be oriented away from adjacent neighbors where feasible.

ADU entrance
oriented
towards primary
dwelling and
away from
neighbor
Primary
dwelling
Neighboring
dwelling

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.3.2.1 Pedestrian Access
ADUs shall have a 3-feet wide minimum
continuous paved pedestrian pathway
connecting it to the public right-of-way.

S.3.2.2 Entrance Orientation
Entrances closer than 10 feet measured to
a side property line shall be oriented away
from adjacent neighbors, either facing the
public right-of-way or facing the interior of the
property.
■ Exception: An existing doorway on an
existing structure may remain in place as
the ADU entrance.

S.3.2.3 Relationship to Entrance of Primary
Residence
The entrance to the ADU shall have an entry
doorway that is clearly subordinate to the
primary dwelling (smaller than the primary
residence entry, receded, and/or on a
different wall plane).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 77
3-4
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

SITE ORGANIZATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN
03 Figure 3.2.3: A 6-foot-tall fence, wall, or vegetative screen is a requirement for any newly constructed detached ADU in a new residential addition. If a wood fence, it must have top and bottom rails, and have the same appearance on
both sides (or an equivalent landscape screen), and not be positioned within 5 feet of the structure.

Figure 3.2.4: Wood fences may not be positioned within 5 feet of the structure. Any portion of the enclosure within 5 feet of the structure shall be non-combustible, such as a concrete or masonry wall and/or a metal gate.

Wood fence
Metal gate
Concrete/masonry
wall or columns
S.3.2.4 Screening Between Properties
For any detached ADU or ADU-related
residential addition, the developer must
provide a solid fence, wall, or vegetative
screen at least 6 feet tall along the side and/
or rear property lines adjacent to the ADU
and its path of travel from the public right-ofway, (excluding areas within the street yard setback).
■ Exception if there is a shared driveway with
a neighboring property.

S.3.2.5 Fire Safe Landscaping and Fencing
Construction of any ADU or JADU shall
be designed to meet fire safe vegetation
requirements as determined by the Piedmont
Fire Marshal. This includes (but is not limited
to) eliminating vegetation and/or wooden
fencing within 5 feet of all sides of the
structure.

S.3.2.6 Curb Cuts
No new sidewalk curb cut is permitted as part
of an ADU or JADU construction.

S.3.2.7 Street Trees
No street tree may be removed as part of an
ADU or JADU construction.

S.3.2.8 Site Grading
Site grading shall adhere to Objective
Standards for 1-4 Residential Unit
Developments, found in Section 2.3 of
Chapter 2.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 78
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-5

BUILDING DESIGN
03 PURPOSE
The ADU building design Objective Standards
are intended to ensure that accessory dwelling
units are thoughtfully integrated into existing
residential properties in a way that is compatible
with neighborhood character, maintains privacy for
adjacent properties, and supports a high quality of
design. These standards promote ADUs and JADUs
that respect the scale, form, and architectural integrity of primary residences.

3.3 Building Design
Design Accessory Dwelling Units to be complementary to primary residences and the surrounding neighborhood.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.3.3.1 Design Compatibility
ADUs that are either (a) an addition to an
existing structure, or (b) situated in front of the
primary dwelling and viewable from the street
shall include:
a. Use of the same wall material, or wall
material that visually appears the same as
the existing primary residence, including
color and texture;
b. Use of same trim material and trim profile;
c. Use of same roof form, roofing material and
roof slope;
d. Use of the same window size, proportion,
operation, recess or reveal, divided light
pattern (true divided lights or 3-dimensional
simulated divided lights), and spacing
distance between placements of windows;
e. Use of same building ornamentation,
including exterior trim;
f. Use of the same foundation materials and
foundation appearance above grade;
g. Use of the same wall plate height and roof
eave height, projection, and materials;
h. Use of same railing design and material;
and
i. Use of an entry doorway that is not located
on the same facade as the entry door to
the primary residence.

Figure 3.3.1: This horizontal addition
to the primary residence uses the
same exterior wall material and
ornamentation to unify the addition
with the main building.

Figure 3.3.2: In this example the new
ADU window (lower level) matches the
placement, proportions, and divided
lights of the existing corner window on
the upper floor.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 79
3-6
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 S.3.3.2 Rear Yard ADUs
a. ADUs that are in the rear yard and not
visible from the street may match the
existing architectural style of the primary
residence or structure to which they are an
addition per S.3.3.1, but are also allowed to
incorporate a different style.
b. Skylights mounted on sloped roofs may face
the primary residence, but shall not face
adjacent properties.

S.3.3.3 Window Recess or Trim
a. For windows on street-facing building walls,
provide a recess of at least two inches in
depth from the building facade (see Fig.

3.3.5).
b. When no inset is provided for a window,
provide a minimum of three inches wide and
one-inch-thick exterior window trim
(see Fig. 3.3.5).
c. Use the same color for all window frames
and trims along a building facade.
d. Foam is not permitted as a window trim
material.

Figure 3.3.3: This ADU incorporates similar architectural design and materials as the adjacent primary dwelling.

Figure 3.3.4: In this example the ADU
below the kitchen of the primary
residence replicates the building’s
architecture and takes advantage of
the existing plumbing layout.

S.3.3.4 Window Placement and Privacy
a. New windows within 10 feet of, and on a
wall facing, an adjacent dwelling shall either:
■ have frosted/translucent glazing, or
■ unless a required egress, have a sill height
at least 6 feet above the floor, in which
case the glazing can be clear.
■ New windows facing existing dwellings
(on abutting property) within 10 feet of the
property line shall be offset (horizontal and
vertical) by a minimum of twelve inches, as
measured from the window frame, from the
adjacent property window frame to avoid
direct view into adjacent properties (see
Fig. 3.3.2).

Window inset min. 2”
from building facade
Window and trim
combined inset min. 2”
Figure 3.3.5: Windows that are inset from the building
facade help create a shadow detail that adds to the
richness of the building facade. For windows on building walls of wood exterior materials, provide a trim or recess of at least two inches in width, or a combination of trim and recess at least two inches in width
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 80
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-7

BUILDING DESIGN
03 4 / Multifamily And Mixed-use Developments 65
property.






WINDOW

ANGLE/PRIVACY

 
 
 

Fig. 4.18.2: Placeholder diagram - window
12” offset min.

Figure 3.3.6: Windows shall be offset at least 12 inches from windows on adjacent dwellings, or use obscured
glass.

S.3.3.5 ADUs Located Above or Below Detached
Garages
ADUs that are located over or below
detached garages are subject to the following
requirements:
a. Stairs or access to the ADU shall not
encroach into any required parking area.

Stairs may encroach into the parking area
of a garage; provided, that the front end of
a standard size automobile can fit under the
stair projection. The bottom of the stairwell
shall be a minimum of 5 feet above the
garage floor.
b. If facing a neighboring property line, second
floor non-egress windows shall either:
■ have frosted/translucent glazing, or
■ have a sill height at least 6 feet above the
floor, in which case the glazing can be
clear.
c. Second floor windows shall be offset
at least twelve inches (horizontally and
vertically) from neighbor’s windows to
maximize privacy.

S.3.3.6 Two-Story ADUs
a. Maximum building height (measured from
finished grade):
■ Detached ADU: Maximum height of 18 feet,
or 20 feet if needed to match the primary
dwelling’s roof pitch.
■ Attached ADU: Maximum height shall be
the lesser of 25 feet or the height of the
primary dwelling.
b. Maximum floor-to-ceiling heights shall be no
greater than 9 feet for the ground floor, and
up to the roof height on the second floor.
c. The second story shall be stepped back a
minimum of 2 feet from the first story along
any side or rear property line facing an
adjoining residential lot.
d. If facing a neighboring property line, second
floor non-egress windows shall either:
■ have frosted/translucent glazing, or
■ have a sill height at least 6 feet above the
floor, in which case the glazing can be
clear.
e. Second floor windows shall be offset
at least twelve inches (horizontally and
vertically) from neighbor’s windows to
maximize privacy.

Existing
window
New
window
Figure 3.3.7: New windows within 10 feet of, and on a
wall facing, an adjacent dwelling shall have frosted and translucent glazing, unless a window is installed so that the sill height is at least 6 feet above the floor.

Adjacent
property
Property
line
Window sill height
6 feet min. above
floor
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 81
3-8
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 S.3.3.7 Maximum Height of Balconies, Patios, and
Decks
Construction of any new balcony, patio, and/
or deck greater than 30 inches above grade
is not permitted.

S.3.3.8 Exterior Lighting
Exterior lighting shall be shielded, directed
downward, and located only at exterior doors
and along the path of travel from the public
right-of-way. The source of the light (light
bulb) shall not be visible from 4 feet away
from the fixture.

S.3.3.9 Addressing Standards
a. ADUs shall have approved address
identification that is separate from the
primary residence.
b. The address identification shall be placed
in a position that is visible from the street or
road fronting the property.
c. The address number shall also be mounted
next to ADU exterior door for way finding
purposes.
d. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers
or alphabetical letters. Numbers shall not be
spelled out.
e. Each character shall be not less than 4
inches high with a minimum stroke width of
1/2 inch.
f. Identification characters shall be clearly
distinguishable from their background by
ensuring the characters are a light color on
a dark background, or a dark color on a light
background.

Figure 3.3.8: The ADU follows existing grade with
minimal retaining walls. The porch is 30 inches above
grade.

Figure 3.3.9: This lighting example
includes a shielded design so that
the source of the light (light bulb) is
not visible from 4 feet.

Figure 3.3.10: Examples of exterior lighting that are shielded and directed downward.

Figure 3.3.11: ADUs shall be provided with approved address identification that is placed in a position that is visible from the street or road fronting the property. The address number shall also be mounted next to ADU exterior door for way finding purposes.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 82
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-9

BUILDING DESIGN
03 S.3.3.10 Location of Ground-Mounted Equipment
a. Equipment must not be placed within
required street yard setbacks unless
required by the utility service provider as
demonstrated by written documentation
from the provider.
b. Placement must not obstruct pedestrian
paths or fire lanes.

S.3.3.11 Screening of Ground-Mounted Equipment
a. Screening shall be fully screened from
public view, with screening at least 6 inches
higher than the equipment but no more
than 6 feet tall (except for planting), unless
otherwise required for safety or noise
control.
b. Equipment shall be fully screened using one
or more of the following:
■ Solid wood or composite fencing (see Fig.

3.3.10)
■ Masonry walls.
■ Evergreen landscaping or trellises
with climbing vines (minimum 3 feet at
installation, achieving full screening within
two years)
c. In new construction, conduits shall not
be exposed on exterior walls and shall
be embedded in walls or within a chase
designed for such use.
d. In retrofits where installations cannot be
embedded in walls, surface mounted
conduits shall be a concealed in a gutter or
raceway system and painted to match.

Figure 3.3.12:Example of utility screening enclosure
S.3.3.12 Wall-Mounted Equipment
a. Wall-mounted water heaters must either:
■ Be mounted inside the ADU; or
■ If mounted outside, must be enclosed in a
cabinet and painted to match the adjacent
wall color.
b. Wall-mounted heat pump units must be
screened if placed 6 feet or more above
ground, using screening standards as
outlined in S.3.2.13..

S.3.3.13 Roof-Mounted Equipment (except solar
equipment)
Roof mounted equipment shall be:
a. Located so as not to be visible from any
adjacent street, which shall mean not
visible from the sidewalk level of the
opposite side of any street fronting the site;
b. Located at least five feet from the edge of
any roof of a street-facing building facade;
or
c. Screened with an enclosure that matches
the color and texture of the building
exterior.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 83
3-10
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 S.3.3.14 Refuse and Recycling Containers
a. ADUs may request a separate refuse and
recycling account from the primary dwelling,
but are not required to.
b. Refuse and recycling containers shall not be
located:
■ Within any required street setback, except
during staging for pickups, or unless on a
sloping lot in which the portion of the lot
outside of the setback is uphill or downhill
from the street;
■ Within any required parking and
landscaped areas, except during staging
for pickups;
■ Within any other area required to remain
unencumbered, according to fire and
other applicable building and public safety
codes.

S.3.3.15 Design of Refuse and Recycling Container
Enclosures
a. All trash bins shall be enclosed and visually
screened from view from the public right-ofway and neighboring properties. b. Trash enclosures shall be of a height at least
4 inches taller than the carts, and shall be
any of the following:
■ Any solid fence, wall, or combination of a
fence and wall at least 4 feet in height and
up to 6 feet in height (see Fig. 3.3.11).
■ An open fence up to 6 feet in height
in combination with dense evergreen
landscaping.

Figure 3.3.13: Example of refuse container enclosure
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 84
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-11

BUILDING DESIGN
03 GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.3.3.1 Windows
Consider orienting windows of an ADU to
face the interior yard, in order to maximize
natural light into the ADU and minimize
privacy impacts on neighbors.

G.3.3.1 Adaptability and Versatility
Consider designs that can be adapted to
different uses and needs over time, such as
a rental property or a living space for aging
family members.

S.3.3.2 Garage Conversions
An ADU garage conversion should consider
either:
a. Maintaining the garage door design on the
exterior if adjacent to a driveway or garage
apron (see Fig. 3.3.13); or
b. If the garage door design is to be
eliminated and window(s) and/or door(s)
installed, then:
■ Add a planting area between the driveway
and the subject wall of the converted
garage, at least 36 inches in width, and a
path to the entry door (see Fig. 3.3.14); and
■ Remove the outline of the previous garage
door opening.

Yes
I. The ADU to the right, created by the conversion
of an existing detached garage, maintains the
exterior appearance of a garage door and
maintains the paved area in the driveway to the
previous garage.

5.03.03 FIRE SAFE CONSTRUCTION

1. Construction of any ADU or JADU shall be designed to meet fire safe construction and vegetation requirements as determined by the Piedmont Fire Marshal.

5.03.04 STANDARD CONDITIONS OF APPROVAL

1. Prior to the start of construction, the developer shall obtain a Building Permit issued by the Building Official. A list of standard conditions of approval required for construction will be maintained by the Planning & Building Director and will be provided with Accessory Dwelling Unit and Junior Accessory Dwelling Unit application forms.

5.03.05 CITY APPROVED PLANS FOR RENT-RESTRICTED ADUs
California law and Health and Safety Code Section 65583(c)(7) require cities, towns, and counties to develop a plan that incentivizes and promotes the creation of ADUs that can be offered at affordable rent to lower-income renters. Division 17.38.075 of the City Code establishes an incentive program to homeowners to use City approved plans consistent with this section of the Design Standards and Guidelines. The pre-approved plans, approved by the City Council and owned by the City of Piedmont, for the construction of a new detached ADUs and/or a JADU conversion can be found in Appendix A of the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. The digital files will be shared with applicants according to this section Figure 3.3.16:This ADU, created by the conversion of an existing detached garage, maintains the exterior appearance of a garage door and maintains the paved area in the
driveway to the previous garage.

Figure 3.3.17:Not recommended:
• The outline of the previous garage door remains as
incongruous exterior trim in the example above.
• Previous garage driveway apron does not include a
landscape strip along the wall of the ADU.
• Windows and doors lack 3-dimensional simulated divided lights.

Garage
converted
into ADU
Garage door
design on the
exterior and
driveway apron
maintained
Garage
converted
into ADU
Garage door
removed
36” min wide
planting area
60” max path
to entry door
Figure 3.3.14: Garage converted to ADU with garage door design and driveway apron maintained.

Figure 3.3.15:If the garage door design is to be eliminated and window(s) and/or door(s) installed, the driveway could be maintained with the existing paved area except for a planting area between the driveway and the subject wall of the converted garage (at least 36 inches in width), and a path to the entry door.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 85
3-12
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 PURPOSE
California law and Health and Safety Code Section
65583(c)(7) require cities, towns, and counties to
develop a plan that incentivizes and promotes the
creation of ADUs that can be offered at affordable
rent to lower-income renters. Division 17.38.075 of
the City Code establishes an incentive program to
homeowners to use City approved plans consistent
with this section of the Objective Design Standards.

The pre-approved plans, approved by the City
Council and owned by the City of Piedmont, for the
construction of a new detached ADUs and/or a JADU
conversion can be found in this chapter. The digital
files will be shared with applicants according to this
section.

3.4 City Approved Plans for Rent-Restricted ADUs
An incentive program for homeowners to use City approved plans to facilitate construction of ADUs.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.3.4.1 Use of Plans
The Director may authorize an applicant’s
use of floor plans and elevations to obtain
Planning Division approval of an Accessory
Dwelling Unit Permit, if all of the following
findings are made:
a. The design unit meets the requirements of
Section 17.38.060 of the City Code.
b. The roofing material and exterior siding
material of the proposed unit are the same
as that of the primary residence.
c. The plans are the same as those in this
chapter of the Piedmont Objective Design
Standards with only a 3 percent variation or
less in any one dimension.

S.3.4.2 Affordability Covenant
If the approval is granted, the applicant must
record a covenant requiring a rent level
affordable to households of very low income,
and the accessory dwelling unit shall be
subject to all the requirements set forth in City
Code Section 17.38.075.

S.3.4.3 Prototype Plans
The following pages of this chapter consists
of the prototype building elevations and floor
plans for accessory dwelling units (ADUs),
the use of which is subject to Piedmont City
Code Sec. 17.38.075. The Planning & Building
Director is authorized to share CAD files for
eligible applications.

The plans sets include three different singlestory accessory dwelling units that are codecompliant, feasible on a typical Piedmont lot, and demonstrative of design priorities
and preferences expressed by the Piedmont
community. Included are:
a. A detached studio ADU, 500 gross square
feet, shown in Tudor, Craftsman, and
Spanish styles.
b. A detached one-bedroom ADU, 800 gross
square feet, shown in Tudor, Craftsman,
and Spanish styles.
c. A garage conversion, 484 gross square
feet.

These are “Planning permit-ready” designs
that can be submitted to Piedmont’s Planning
Department for issuance of Planning permit
for rent-restricted ADUs for a period of 10
years. The ADU designs must then be further
developed with items including a detailed
site plan, engineering plans, and construction
details, and submitted to Piedmont’s Building
Department for formal review and issuance of
a Building permit.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 86
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-13

BUILDING DESIGN
03 A1 B1
C1
A1-2
1 UNIT ENTRANCE

MUST FACE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY OR

INTERIOR OF PROPERTY
EGRESS WINDOW, 3'-0" SILL

HEIGHT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
PORCH +/-6" ABOVE EXISTING
GRADE, 30" MAXIMUM.

STORAGE LOFT ABOVE

SLEEPING NOOK WHERE

ROOF IS PITCHED
A1-2
2 3 A1-2
A1-2 4
HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN COIL

WITH OUTDOOR
CONDENSER. SOUND
LIMIT - 50 dBA MEASURED

AT NEAREST PROPERTY
LINE

HVAC MAY NOT PROJECT
INTO REQ. SETBACKS

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES

FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES

TO BE ELECTRIC
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER
A1
CS3
CS2
FA1
B0
B2
CS2
AW1
B1
C1

W/D KITCHEN WH
BATH
CLOSET
274 SF

LIVING / SLEEPING

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

FENCE

ADU AND PATH OF

TRAVEL MUST BE
SCREENED BY 6'

TALL FENCE,

EXCEPT WITHIN
THE 20' STREET

YARD SETBACK
19'-0" 8'-2"
11'-3" 5'-10"
28'-11"
16'-1" 2'-5"
3'-3" 15'-1" 10'-8" 8'-4"
CS FA

FIXED OVER
AWNING

DOUBLE CASEMENT

WIDTH WIDTH HEIGHT
HEIGHT
AW
AWNING
HEIGHT
WIDTH
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 500 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: 8'-0", WITH POTENTIAL TO

MAKE VAULTED
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING / SLEEPING - 274 SF
- LIGHTING: 21.9 SF (8%) IS REQUIRED.

APPROXIMATELY 49.0 SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 11.0 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 50.8 SF
PROVIDED.

OTHER NOTES:
- FRONT ENTRANCE FACES THE PUBLIC

RIGHT OF WAY OR THE INTERIOR OF

PROPERTY
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- WUI FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS AT PORCH,

ROOF, DECKING, AND EAVES
- FOR DOWNSLOPING LOTS, BUILDING BASE

WILL REQUIRE WATER TABLE / COURSE BAND

WITH CONTRASTING DARKER STUCCO TO THE

GROUND LEVEL
- REQUIRED SETBACKS ARE 4' FOR REAR AND
SIDE YARDS AND 20' FOR STREET YARDS. ROOF

EAVES MAY PROJECT INTO SETBACKS

CODE NOTES

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED.

SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:20 PM
A1-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM

WINDOW SCHEDULE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
AW1 AWNING 2'-6" 2'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD TEMPERED GLASS AT BATHROOM CS2 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-6" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD EGRESS WINDOWS INDICATED W/ ★ CS3 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-6" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
FA1 FIXED OVER
AWNING
2'-8" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD

DOOR SCHEDULE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

SIDELIGHTS VARY BY STYLE, SEE

ELEVATIONS
B0 EXTERIOR DOOR 2'-0" 6'-8" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

TO WATER HEATER CLOSET
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8" WD
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8" WD
C1 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD
1/2" = 1'-0" A1 STUDIO - TUDOR - FLOOR PLAN 1

A - STUDIO

ROOM AREA

A - STUDIO
LIVING / SLEEPING 274 SF
KITCHEN 78 SF
BATH 41 SF
CLOSET 14 SF
W/D 9 SF
WH 5 SF
421 SF
GSF: 500 SF

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 234 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 87
3-14
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 10" / 12"
16'-0"

PV PANELS

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE

WOOD ACCENT TRIM

AROUND OPENINGS

EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON

BOTH SIDES OF ENTRANCE
8'-0"
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"
16'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"
16'-0"
HVAC

OUTDOOR CONDENSER

DOOR TO ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER HEATER

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"
16'-0"
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
1/4" = 1'-0"
10/4/2022 1:44:22 PM
A1-2
10/04/2022

ELEVATIONS

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/4" = 1'-0" A1 - TUDOR - SOUTH ELEVATION 1
1/4" = 1'-0" A1 - TUDOR - NORTH ELEVATION 2
1/4" = 1'-0" A1 - TUDOR - EAST ELEVATION 3
1/4" = 1'-0" A1 - TUDOR - WEST ELEVATION 4

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 235 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 88
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-15

BUILDING DESIGN
03 A1 B1
C1
A2-2
1 UNIT ENTRANCE

MUST FACE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY OR

INTERIOR OF PROPERTY
HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN

COIL WITH OUTDOOR
CONDENSER. SOUND
LIMIT - 50 dBA

MEASURED AT

NEAREST PROPERTY
LINE

HVAC MAY NOT
PROJECT INTO REQ.

SETBACKS

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES

TO BE ELECTRIC
EGRESS WINDOW, 3'-0" SILL

HEIGHT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
PORCH +/-12" ABOVE EXISTING
GRADE, 30" MAXIMUM.

STORAGE LOFT ABOVE

SLEEPING NOOK WHERE

ROOF IS PITCHED
A2-2
2 3 A2-2 A2-2 4 FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES 24" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER
SH1
A1
B1
CS2
CS2
AW1
B0
FA1
B2
C1
274 SF

LIVING / SLEEPING

W/D KITCHEN WH
BATH
CLOSET

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

SIDE YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

FENCE

ADU AND PATH OF

TRAVEL MUST BE
SCREENED BY 6'

TALL FENCE,

EXCEPT WITHIN
THE 20' STREET

YARD SETBACK
19'-0" 8'-2"
28'-11"
5'-10" 11'-3"
16'-1" 2'-5"
3'-3" 15'-1" 10'-8"
CS
FA

FIXED OVER
AWNING

DOUBLE CASEMENT
WIDTH
WIDTH
HEIGHT
HEIGHT
AW
AWNING
HEIGHT
WIDTH
SH

TRIPLE SINGLE
HUNG
WIDTH
HEIGHT
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 500 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: 8'-0", WITH POTENTIAL TO

MAKE VAULTED
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING / SLEEPING - 274 SF
- LIGHTING: 21.9 SF (8%) IS REQUIRED.

APPROXIMATELY 49.0 SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 11.0 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 50.8 SF
PROVIDED.

OTHER NOTES:
- FRONT ENTRANCE FACES THE PUBLIC

RIGHT OF WAY OR THE INTERIOR OF

PROPERTY
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- WUI FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS AT PORCH,

ROOF, DECKING, AND EAVES
- FOR DOWNSLOPING LOTS, BUILDING BASE

WILL REQUIRE WATER TABLE / COURSE BAND

WITH CONTRASTING DARKER STUCCO TO THE

GROUND LEVEL
- REQUIRED SETBACKS ARE 4' FOR REAR AND
SIDE YARDS AND 20' FOR STREET YARDS. ROOF

EAVES MAY PROJECT INTO SETBACKS

CODE NOTES

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED.

SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:26 PM
A2-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM

DOOR SCHEDULE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

SIDELIGHTS VARY BY STYLE, SEE

ELEVATIONS
B0 EXTERIOR DOOR 2'-0" 6'-8" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

TO WATER HEATER CLOSET
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8" WD
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8" WD
C1 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD
1/2" = 1'-0" A2 STUDIO - CRAFSTSMAN - FLOOR PLAN 1

WINDOW SCHEDULE - CRAFTSMAN

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
AW1 AWNING 2'-6" 2'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD TEMPERED GLASS AT BATHROOM CS2 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-6" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD EGRESS WINDOWS INDICATED W/ ★ CS3 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-6" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
FA1 FIXED OVER
AWNING
2'-8" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
SH1 TRIPLE SINGLE
HUNG
2'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD

A - STUDIO

ROOM AREA

A - STUDIO
LIVING / SLEEPING 274 SF
KITCHEN 78 SF
BATH 41 SF
CLOSET 14 SF
W/D 9 SF
WH 5 SF
421 SF
GSF: 500 SF

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 236 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 89
3-16
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 5" / 12"
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

PV PANELS

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE

WOOD ACCENT TRIM

AROUND OPENINGS

EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON

BOTH SIDES OF ENTRANCE

STUCCO PORCH

DECORATIVE WOOD

DETAILS, TRUSSES AND

BRACKETS
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-0"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-6"
8'-0" 16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-0"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-6"
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING FINISH MASONRY

VENEER BASE
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-0"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-6"
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
HVAC

OUTDOOR CONDENSER

DOOR TO ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER HEATER
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-0"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-6"
SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
1/4" = 1'-0"
10/4/2022 1:44:28 PM
A2-2
10/04/2022

ELEVATIONS

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/4" = 1'-0" A2 - CRAFTSMAN - SOUTH ELEVATION 1
1/4" = 1'-0" A2 - CRAFTSMAN - WEST ELEVATION 4 1/4" = 1'-0" A2 - CRAFTSMAN - NORTH ELEVATION 2 1/4" = 1'-0" A2 - CRAFTSMAN - EAST ELEVATION 3

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 237 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 90
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-17

BUILDING DESIGN
03 A1 B1
C1
A3-2
1 UNIT ENTRANCE

MUST FACE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY OR

INTERIOR OF PROPERTY
3 A3-2
A3-2
2 A3-2 4

FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER
HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN

COIL WITH OUTDOOR
CONDENSER. SOUND
LIMIT - 50 dBA

MEASURED AT

NEAREST PROPERTY
LINE

HVAC MAY NOT
PROJECT INTO REQ.

SETBACKS

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES

TO BE ELECTRIC
EGRESS WINDOW, 3'-0" SILL

HEIGHT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
PORCH +/-12" ABOVE EXISTING
GRADE, 30" MAXIMUM.

CS2
AW1
B0
B2
FA1
A1
CS3
B1
CS2
C1
CLOSET

W/D KITCHEN WH
BATH
274 SF

LIVING / SLEEPING

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

SIDE YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

FENCE

ADU AND PATH OF

TRAVEL MUST BE
SCREENED BY 6'

TALL FENCE,

EXCEPT WITHIN
THE 20' STREET

YARD SETBACK
19'-0" 8'-2"
5'-10" 11'-3"
28'-11"
16'-1" 2'-5"
3'-3" 15'-1" 10'-8"
CS FA

FIXED OVER
AWNING

DOUBLE CASEMENT

WIDTH WIDTH HEIGHT
HEIGHT
AW
AWNING
HEIGHT
WIDTH
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 500 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: 8'-0", WITH POTENTIAL TO

MAKE VAULTED
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING / SLEEPING - 274 SF
- LIGHTING: 21.9 SF (8%) IS REQUIRED.

APPROXIMATELY 49.0 SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 11.0 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 50.8 SF
PROVIDED.

OTHER NOTES:
- FRONT ENTRANCE FACES THE PUBLIC

RIGHT OF WAY OR THE INTERIOR OF

PROPERTY
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- WUI FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS AT PORCH,

ROOF, DECKING, AND EAVES
- FOR DOWNSLOPING LOTS, BUILDING BASE

WILL REQUIRE WATER TABLE / COURSE BAND

WITH CONTRASTING DARKER STUCCO TO THE

GROUND LEVEL
- REQUIRED SETBACKS ARE 4' FOR REAR AND
SIDE YARDS AND 20' FOR STREET YARDS. ROOF

EAVES MAY PROJECT INTO SETBACKS

CODE NOTES

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED.

SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:32 PM
A3-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM

WINDOW SCHEDULE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
AW1 AWNING 2'-6" 2'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD TEMPERED GLASS AT BATHROOM CS2 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-6" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD EGRESS WINDOWS INDICATED W/ ★ CS3 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-6" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
FA1 FIXED OVER
AWNING
2'-8" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD

DOOR SCHEDULE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

SIDELIGHTS VARY BY STYLE, SEE

ELEVATIONS
B0 EXTERIOR DOOR 2'-0" 6'-8" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

TO WATER HEATER CLOSET
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8" WD
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8" WD
C1 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD
1/2" = 1'-0" A2 STUDIO - SPANISH - FLOOR PLAN 1

A - STUDIO

ROOM AREA

A - STUDIO
LIVING / SLEEPING 274 SF
KITCHEN 78 SF
BATH 41 SF
CLOSET 14 SF
W/D 9 SF
WH 5 SF
421 SF
GSF: 500 SF

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 238 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 91
3-18
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH

EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON

BOTH SIDES OF ENTRANCE DECORATIVE IRON

RAILINGS

WOOD ACCENT TRIM

AROUND OPENINGS
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"
8'-6" 16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"
HVAC

OUTDOOR CONDENSER

DOOR TO ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER HEATER
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"
SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
1/4" = 1'-0"
10/4/2022 1:44:35 PM
A3-2
10/04/2022

ELEVATIONS

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/4" = 1'-0" A3 - SPANISH - SOUTH ELEVATION 1
1/4" = 1'-0" A3 - SPANISH - NORTH ELEVATION 2
1/4" = 1'-0" A3 - SPANISH - EAST ELEVATION 3
1/4" = 1'-0" A3 - SPANISH - WEST ELEVATION 4

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 239 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 92
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-19

BUILDING DESIGN
03 B1-2
1 HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN COIL WITH
OUTDOOR CONDENSER. SOUND LIMIT -
50 dBA MEASURED AT NEAREST

PROPERTY LINE
HVAC MAY NOT PROJECT INTO REQ.

SETBACKS

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES TO

BE ELECTRIC

EGRESS WINDOW,
3'-0" SILL HEIGHT

ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
PORCH 12" ABOVE EXISTING
GRADE, 30" MAXIMUM
3 B1-2
B1-2
2 B1-2 4

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER
CS4
FA1
CS1 CS1
A1
FA1
FA1 CS4
FA1
FA1 AW1
C1 C1
D1
B2
B3
B2

FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER

UNIT ENTRANCE

MUST FACE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY OR

INTERIOR OF PROPERTY
321 SF

LIVING RM
135 SF

BEDROOM
CLOSET
KITCHEN CLOSET HALL LINEN CL.

UTILITY CLOSET
BATH

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

SIDE YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

FENCE

ADU AND PATH OF TRAVEL MUST
BE SCREENED BY 6' TALL FENCE,
EXCEPT WITHIN THE 20' STREET

YARD SETBACK
10'-8" 9'-1" 8'-4" 9'-7"
39'-9"
11'-4" 10'-9"
12'-10"
16'-9" 7'-2"
3'-3" 19'-1" 17'-6"
A1 B1
C1 D1
CS FA

FIXED OVER
AWNING

DOUBLE CASEMENT

WIDTH WIDTH HEIGHT
HEIGHT
AW
AWNING
HEIGHT
WIDTH
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 800 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: 8'-0", WITH POTENTIAL TO

MAKE VAULTED
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING RM - 321 SF
- LIGHTING: 25.7 SF (8%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 49.0
SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 12.8 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 56.4
SF PROVIDED.

BEDROOM - 135 SF
- LIGHTING: 10.8 SF (8%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 25.4
SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 5.4 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 28.71
SF PROVIDED.

CODE NOTES
OTHER NOTES:
- FRONT ENTRANCE FACES THE PUBLIC

RIGHT OF WAY OR THE INTERIOR OF

PROPERTY
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- WUI FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS AT

PORCH, ROOF, DECKING, AND EAVES
- FOR DOWNSLOPING LOTS, BUILDING

BASE WILL REQUIRE WATER TABLE /

COURSE BAND WITH CONTRASTING

DARKER STUCCO TO THE GROUND LEVEL

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED.

SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:39 PM
B1-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/2" = 1'-0" B1 1-BED - TUDOR - FLOOR PLAN 1
DOOR SCHEDULE - 1 BEDROOM

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

SIDELIGHTS VARY BY STYLE, SEE

ELEVATIONS
B0 EXTERIOR DOOR 2'-0" 6'-8" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

TO WATER HEATER CLOSET
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8" WD
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8" WD
C1 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT
PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD
D1 DOUBLE SWING -

SINGLE FLAT
PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD WITH PARTIAL LOUVERS
WINDOW SCHEDULE - 1BED

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
AW1 AWNING 2'-6" 2'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD TEMPERED GLASS AT BATHROOM CS1 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
CS4 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
3'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD EGRESS WINDOWS INDICATED W/ ★ FA1 FIXED OVER
AWNING
2'-8" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
B - 1 BEDROOM

ROOM AREA

1.1 1-BEDROOM
LIVING RM 321 SF
BEDROOM 135 SF
KITCHEN 106 SF
BATH 53 SF
HALL 30 SF
CLOSET 21 SF
UTILITY CLOSET 14 SF
COAT CLOSET 7 SF
LINEN CL. 3 SF
689 SF
GSF 800 SF

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 240 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 93
3-20
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 9" / 12"

PV PANELS

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE

WOOD ACCENT TRIM

AROUND OPENINGS

EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON

BOTH SIDES OF ENTRANCE
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"
8'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
HVAC

OUTDOOR CONDENSER
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH MASONRY

VENEER BASE
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

STUCCO FINISH MASONRY

VENEER BASE
FINISHED FLOOR 6"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 8'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 16'-0"
TOP OF PLATE 9'-0"
SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
1/4" = 1'-0"
10/4/2022 1:44:41 PM
B1-2
10/04/2022

ELEVATIONS

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/4" = 1'-0" B1 - TUDOR - SOUTH ELEVATION 1
1/4" = 1'-0" B1 - TUDOR - WEST ELEVATION 4 1/4" = 1'-0" B1 - TUDOR - NORTH ELEVATION 2 1/4" = 1'-0" B1 - TUDOR - EAST ELEVATION 3

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 241 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 94
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-21

BUILDING DESIGN
03 B2-2
1 B2-2
2 3 B2-2
B2-2 4
HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN COIL WITH OUTDOOR
CONDENSER. SOUND LIMIT - 50 dBA

MEASURED AT NEAREST PROPERTY LINE
HVAC MAY NOT PROJECT INTO REQ.

SETBACKS

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES TO

BE ELECTRIC

EGRESS WINDOW,
3'-0" SILL HEIGHT

ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
PORCH 12" ABOVE EXISTING
GRADE, 30" MAXIMUM.

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER

FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER
FA1 AW1
FA1 CS3
FA1
A1
SH2
FA1
CS4
B2
B2
D1
B3
C1 C1
4'-0"

UNIT ENTRANCE

MUST FACE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY OR

INTERIOR OF PROPERTY
BATH
CLOSET
CLOSET
LINEN CL.

UTILITY CLOSET

KITCHEN
HALL
135 SF

BEDROOM
321 SF
LIVING RM FA1

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

SIDE YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

FENCE

ADU AND PATH OF TRAVEL MUST
BE SCREENED BY 6' TALL FENCE,
EXCEPT WITHIN THE 20' STREET

YARD SETBACK
10'-8" 9'-1" 8'-4" 9'-7"
11'-4" 10'-9"
12'-10"
39'-9"
16'-9" 7'-2"
3'-3" 19'-1" 17'-6"
CS
FA

FIXED OVER
AWNING

DOUBLE CASEMENT
WIDTH
WIDTH
HEIGHT
HEIGHT
AW
AWNING
HEIGHT
WIDTH
SH

TRIPLE SINGLE
HUNG
WIDTH
HEIGHT
A1 B1
C1 D1
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 800 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: 8'-0", WITH POTENTIAL TO

MAKE VAULTED
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING RM - 321 SF
- LIGHTING: 25.7 SF (8%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 49.0
SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 12.8 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 56.4
SF PROVIDED.

BEDROOM - 135 SF
- LIGHTING: 10.8 SF (8%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 25.4
SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 5.4 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 28.71
SF PROVIDED.

CODE NOTES
OTHER NOTES:
- FRONT ENTRANCE FACES THE PUBLIC

RIGHT OF WAY OR THE INTERIOR OF

PROPERTY
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- WUI FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS AT

PORCH, ROOF, DECKING, AND EAVES
- FOR DOWNSLOPING LOTS, BUILDING

BASE WILL REQUIRE WATER TABLE /

COURSE BAND WITH CONTRASTING

DARKER STUCCO TO THE GROUND LEVEL

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED.

SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:46 PM
B2-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/2" = 1'-0" B2 1-BED - CRAFTSMAN - FLOOR PLAN 1
WINDOW SCHEDULE - 1BED CRAFTSMAN

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
AW1 AWNING 2'-6" 2'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD TEMPERED GLASS AT BATHROOM CS1 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
CS4 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
3'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD EGRESS WINDOWS INDICATED W/ ★ FA1 FIXED OVER
AWNING
2'-8" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
SH2 TRIPLE SINGLE
HUNG
2'-6" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
DOOR SCHEDULE - 1 BEDROOM

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

SIDELIGHTS VARY BY STYLE, SEE

ELEVATIONS
B0 EXTERIOR DOOR 2'-0" 6'-8" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

TO WATER HEATER CLOSET
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8" WD
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8" WD
C1 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT
PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD
D1 DOUBLE SWING -

SINGLE FLAT
PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD WITH PARTIAL LOUVERS
B - 1 BEDROOM

ROOM AREA

1.1 1-BEDROOM
LIVING RM 321 SF
BEDROOM 135 SF
KITCHEN 106 SF
BATH 53 SF
HALL 30 SF
CLOSET 21 SF
UTILITY CLOSET 14 SF
COAT CLOSET 7 SF
LINEN CL. 3 SF
689 SF
GSF 800 SF

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 242 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 95
3-22
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 PV PANELS

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING

MASONRY

VENEER BASE

WOOD ACCENT TRIM

AROUND OPENINGS

EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON

BOTH SIDES OF ENTRANCE

STUCCO PORCH

DECORATIVE WOOD

DETAILS, TRUSSES

AND BRACKETS
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"
8'-6"

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING

MASONRY

VENEER BASE
HVAC

OUTDOOR CONDENSER
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING MASONRY

VENEER BASE
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"

SHINGLE ROOFING

WOOD SIDING MASONRY

VENEER BASE
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 15'-8"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"
SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
1/4" = 1'-0"
10/4/2022 1:44:48 PM
B2-2
10/04/2022

ELEVATIONS

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/4" = 1'-0" B2 - CRAFTSMAN - SOUTH ELEVATION 1
1/4" = 1'-0" B2 - CRAFTSMAN - NORTH ELEVATION 2
1/4" = 1'-0" B2 - CRAFTSMAN - EAST ELEVATION 3
1/4" = 1'-0" B2 - CRAFTSMAN - WEST ELEVATION 4

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 243 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 96
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-23

BUILDING DESIGN
03 B3-2
1 3 B3-2
B3-2
2 B3-2 4
HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN COIL WITH OUTDOOR
CONDENSER. SOUND LIMIT - 50 dBA

MEASURED AT NEAREST PROPERTY LINE
HVAC MAY NOT PROJECT INTO REQ.

SETBACKS

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES TO

BE ELECTRIC

EGRESS WINDOW,
3'-0" SILL HEIGHT

ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
PORCH 12" ABOVE EXISTING
GRADE, 30" MAXIMUM

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER

FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
24" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER
FA1 AW1
FA1 CS4
FA1
A1
CS1 CS1
FA1
CS4

UNIT ENTRANCE

MUST FACE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY OR

INTERIOR OF PROPERTY

KITCHEN CLOSET
CLOSET
HALL
LINEN CL.

UTILITY CLOSET
BATH
135 SF

BEDROOM
321 SF

LIVING RM

REAR YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

SIDE YARD SETBACK
4'-0" REQ.

FENCE

ADU AND PATH OF TRAVEL MUST
BE SCREENED BY 6' TALL FENCE,
EXCEPT WITHIN THE 20' STREET

YARD SETBACK
10'-8" 9'-1" 8'-4" 9'-7"
11'-4" 10'-9"
12'-10"
39'-9"
16'-9" 7'-2"
3'-3" 19'-1" 17'-6"
CS FA

FIXED OVER
AWNING

DOUBLE CASEMENT

WIDTH WIDTH HEIGHT
HEIGHT
AW
AWNING
HEIGHT
WIDTH
A1 B1
C1 D1
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 800 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: 8'-0", WITH POTENTIAL TO

MAKE VAULTED
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING RM - 321 SF
- LIGHTING: 25.7 SF (8%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 49.0
SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 12.8 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 56.4
SF PROVIDED.

BEDROOM - 135 SF
- LIGHTING: 10.8 SF (8%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 25.4
SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 5.4 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 28.71
SF PROVIDED.

CODE NOTES
OTHER NOTES:
- FRONT ENTRANCE FACES THE PUBLIC

RIGHT OF WAY OR THE INTERIOR OF

PROPERTY
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- WUI FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS AT

PORCH, ROOF, DECKING, AND EAVES
- FOR DOWNSLOPING LOTS, BUILDING

BASE WILL REQUIRE WATER TABLE /

COURSE BAND WITH CONTRASTING

DARKER STUCCO TO THE GROUND LEVEL

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED.

SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:52 PM
B3-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/2" = 1'-0" B3 1-BED - SPANISH - FLOOR PLAN 1
WINDOW SCHEDULE - 1BED

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
AW1 AWNING 2'-6" 2'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD TEMPERED GLASS AT BATHROOM CS1 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
2'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD
CS4 DOUBLE

CASEMENT
3'-0" 4'-6" ALUM. CLAD WD EGRESS WINDOWS INDICATED W/ ★ FA1 FIXED OVER
AWNING
2'-8" 4'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
DOOR SCHEDULE - 1 BEDROOM

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

SIDELIGHTS VARY BY STYLE, SEE

ELEVATIONS
B0 EXTERIOR DOOR 2'-0" 6'-8" ALUM. CLAD WD
OR WD

TO WATER HEATER CLOSET
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8" WD
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8" WD
C1 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT
PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD
D1 DOUBLE SWING -

SINGLE FLAT
PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8" WD WITH PARTIAL LOUVERS
B - 1 BEDROOM

ROOM AREA

1.1 1-BEDROOM
LIVING RM 321 SF
BEDROOM 135 SF
KITCHEN 106 SF
BATH 53 SF
HALL 30 SF
CLOSET 21 SF
UTILITY CLOSET 14 SF
COAT CLOSET 7 SF
LINEN CL. 3 SF
689 SF
GSF 800 SF

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 244 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 97
3-24
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 16'-0" MAX ALLOWED

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH

DECORATIVE IRON

RAILINGS

WOOD ACCENT TRIM

AROUND OPENINGS
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-5"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH
HVAC

OUTDOOR CONDENSER
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-5"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-5"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"

PARAPET WITH BARREL

TILE AT EDGE

STUCCO FINISH
16'-0" MAX ALLOWED
FINISHED FLOOR 1'-0"
GROUND LEVEL 0"
CEILING FINISH 9'-6"
TOP OF ROOF 14'-5"
TOP OF PLATE 10'-0"
SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
1/4" = 1'-0"
10/4/2022 1:44:55 PM
B3-2
10/04/2022

ELEVATIONS

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/4" = 1'-0" B3 - SPANISH - SOUTH ELEVATION 1
1/4" = 1'-0" B3 - SPANISH - NORTH ELEVATION 2
1/4" = 1'-0" B3 - SPANISH - EAST ELEVATION 3
1/4" = 1'-0" B3 - SPANISH - WEST ELEVATION 4

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 245 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 98
3 / Accessory Dwelling Units
3-25

BUILDING DESIGN
03 283 SF

LIVING / SLEEPING
22'-0"
22'-0"

KITCHEN
WH W/D

BATH RM CLOSET
HVAC
DUCTED ELEC. FAN

COIL WITH

OUTDOOR
CONDENSER.

SOUND LIMIT - 50
dBA MEASURED AT

NEAREST

PROPERTY LINE

HVAC MAY NOT

PROJECT INTO
REQ. SETBACKS

ELECTRIC HEAT

PUMP WATER
HEATER

KITCHEN

ALL APPLIANCES TO

BE ELECTRIC

FOR BATHROOM FIXTURES
2'-0" MIN. CLEARANCE

FOR KITCHEN APPLIANCES
2'-0" MIN. CLEARANCE

CLEARANCE
30" SHOWER

ADDITIONAL WINDOWS

WHERE PERMITTED
B3 B3 B3
A1
B1 B1
B2
C3
15" MIN.

EXISTING

RESIDENCE
3'-0" WIDE PLANTER ACROSS

PRIOR GARAGE DOOR
8'-10" 8'-11"
11'-9" 9'-0"
20'-8"
B3

SINGLE HUNG
WIDTH
HEIGHT
A1 B1
C1
GROSS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 484 SF
CEILING HEIGHTS: DEPENDENT ON EXISTING
CONDITION, MIN 7'-6"
LIGHT AND AIR REQUIREMENTS:

LIVING / SLEEPING - 283 SF
- LIGHTING: 22.6 SF (8%) IS REQUIRED.

APPROXIMATELY 26.6 SF PROVIDED.
- VENTILATION: 11.32 SF (4%) IS
REQUIRED. APPROXIMATELY 16.08 SF
PROVIDED.

OTHER NOTES:
- THE UNIT FEATURES ALL ELECTRICAL

APPLIANCES
- 3'-0" WIDE PLANTER REQUIRED ACROSS THE

LOCATION OF THE PRIOR GARAGE DOOR,

EXCEPT FOR WIDTH OF THE ENTRANCE DOOR

CODE NOTES

WINDOW NOTES

1. ANY NEW WINDOWS WITHIN 10 FEET OF AN ADJACENT DWELLING SHALL HAVE FROSTED GLAZING.

2. ALL WINDOWS TO BE RECESSED 2" FROM THE WALL PLANE.

3. RESCUE WINDOWS SHALL COMPLY W/ THE FOLLOWING:
- MIN. OPENING HEIGHT 24"
- MIN. OPENING WIDTH 20"
- MAX. 44" MEASURED FROM THE FLOOR
- 5.7 SQ. FT. MIN. AREA

4. BATHROOM WINDOWS AND WINDOWS WITHIN DOOR SWING TO BE TEMPERED. SCALE

ISSUE DATE

PROJECT

PRINTED
BUILDING DEPT STAMPINGARCHITECTURE | URBANISM | DESIGN

CONSULTANTS
As indicated
10/4/2022 1:44:56 PM
C1-1
10/04/2022

FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT ADDRESS
1915

PIEDMONT
ADU

PROGRAM
1/2" = 1'-0" C1- GARAGE 1

2.1 GARAGE CONVERSION

ROOM AREA

2.1 GARAGE
LIVING / SLEEPING 283 SF
KITCHEN 55 SF
BATH RM 48 SF
CLOSET 12 SF
W/D 8 SF
WH 6 SF
412 SF
GSF 484 SF

DOOR SCHEDULE - GARAGE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT COMMENTS
A1 EXT. UNIT ENTRY 3'-0" 7'-0" DETAIL TO MATCH ARCHITECTURAL

STYLE OF MAIN HOUSE
B1 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-4" 6'-8"
B2 INTERIOR DOOR 2'-8" 6'-8"
C3 DOUBLE SLIDING -

SINGLE FLAT PANEL
4'-0" 6'-8"

WINDOW SCHEDULE - GARAGE

TYPE DESCRIPTION WIDTH HEIGHT COMMENTS
B3 DOUBLE HUNG 3'-0" 4'-0" DETAIL TO MATCH ARCHITECTURAL STYLE OF

MAIN HOUSE

REVISIONS
NO. DATE.

ATTACHMENT B Agenda Report Page 246 of 293
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 99
3-26
Piedmont Objective Design Standards

BUILDING DESIGN
03 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 100
MULTIFAMILY, COMMERCIAL (APPROVED 04

MINISTERIALLY), AND MIXED-USE DEVELOPMENTS

SITE ORGANIZATION, PLANNING, AND DESIGN

4.1 Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2 Pedestrian Access and Bicycle Parking . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.3 Driveways and Surface Parking Design . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.4 Walls and Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.5 Building Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.6 Services and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.7 Open Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.8 Landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.9 Site Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 04

BUILDING DESIGN

4.10 Massing, Form, and Proportions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.11  Roof Form and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

4.12 Facade Articulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4.13 Building Access and Entrance Design . . . . . . . . 4-34

4.14 Ground Floor Treatment–Residential . . . . . . . . . 4-38

4.15 Ground Floor Treatment–Commercial . . . . . . . . 4-40

4.16 Balconies and Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

4.17 Awnings, Sunshades, and Screens . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

4.18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

4.19 Building Materials, Colors, and Finish . . . . . . . . 4-48

4.20 Mitigation of Blank Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

4.21 Parking Garage Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

4.22 Architectural Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4.23 Bird Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

4.24 Signage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 101
4-2
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
SiIteTE ORGA organiz NIZatATiIoOn, NPLA plannin NNINgG, AanNdD DESesIiGgNn *
*
*
Retail entrance located
closest to the transit stop
Alternate building entrance
Primary entrance located
close to the transit stop
Driveways located away
from transit stops
04 PURPOSE
New developments and additions and alterations
to existing buildings and lots should reflect the
characteristics of the surrounding context to help
create and maintain cohesive neighborhoods.

Design strategies for each development can vary
depending on a project’s size, location, topography
and relationship to streets, transit, and pedestrian
circulation. Smaller blocks and more frequent
street connections enhance pedestrian and bicycle
movement and safety. For larger sites, it is important
to use internal circulation to connect developments
with their surroundings and integrate better into their context.

Developments near transit should maximize access
to transit through building orientation and entrance
locations. Locating active ground floor frontages and
amenities near transit stops also encourages the use
of transit by creating a safe environment and access
route for residents, employees and visitors.

4.1 Context
Understand the importance of individual locations and how they respond to and connect with the surrounding context.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.1.1 Building Entrance
For sites with a street-facing property line
within 500 feet of a transit stop, locate the
primary building entrance at the building
facade closest to the transit stop (see Fig. 4.1.1).

S.4.1.2 Driveways
Do not locate driveways within 30 feet of bus
stops, rail stations, and light rail corridors,
unless there is no alternative location.

Grading
a. To minimize impacts on existing terrain,
do not cut deeper than 10 feet below the
natural grade and fill higher than three feet
above the natural grade on sites greater
than 20 percent of slope.
b. Grading within 10 feet of property line may
not create retaining walls more than four
feet above finished grade (see Fig. 4.1.1).

Transit stops
Pedestrian
building entrances
Vehicular
connections
Fig. 4.1.1: Building entrances located close to transit stops.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 102
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-3
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 G.4.1.4 Natural amenities
Preserve on-site natural amenities such as
mature trees, creeks, and riparian corridors
and integrate them into the site planning and
organization as design features or organizing
elements. For example, locate a courtyard
or an outdoor recreational space around an
existing mature tree.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.1.1 Uses and Density
a. Locate residential and mixed-use activities
near similar existing, planned, and allowed
uses to reinforce surrounding activities,
uses, and patterns of streets and block
sizes.
b. In mixed-use developments, arrange active
frontages, such as retail stores, offices,
restaurants, and on-site amenities on the
part of site closest to transit stops.
c. Locate the highest intensity of any
development(s) near transit stops.

G.4.1.2 Pedestrian Connections
Create accessible pedestrian connections
between new construction, transit stops,
and community facilities such as parks, trails,
community centers, religious buildings, and
schools.

G.4.1.3 Grading
a. Plan developments on hillside sites to
follow the existing topography, maintain
significant site views, and not obscure the
silhouette of prominent ridge lines.
b. Where cut-and-fill slopes are unavoidable
on hillside sites, sculpt them to blend with
the adjacent terrain (see Fig. 4.1.2).

Existing grade
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Fig. 4.1.2: Site grading for new developments limited to 10’ from natural grade.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 103
4-4
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 4.2 Pedestrian Access and Bicycle Parking

PURPOSE
Pedestrian and bicycle entrances connect buildings to
their surroundings and encourage street activity. They
should be clearly identifiable and easily accessible.

Orienting them towards streets helps create active
sidewalks and promotes a safe public realm.

Maximize pedestrian access and shape project identity around entrances that accommodate both pedestrians and bicycles.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.2.1 Primary Building Entrances
When a mixed-use development with
commercial uses on the ground floor has
multiple street-facing facades:
a. Locate the primary building entrance for
commercial uses along the building edge
that faces a main street or a public open
space.
b. Locate the primary building entrance
for residential uses at the side street to
maximize the leasable space for commercial
uses.
c. Locate the primary entrances to commercial
uses and residential lobbies at the ground
floor level.

S.4.2.2 Multiple Entrances
When developments have multiple entrances,
locate secondary entrances based on the
following priority:

1. Public transit (when located within 500 feet
of the development site)

2. Main streets

3. Side streets (if they exist)

4. Publicly-accessible open spaces

5. Alleys or internal site circulation (if provided)

6. Provide direct access to the residential
lobby for each building in a development
from the street or publicly-accessible
pedestrian walkways. If there is more than
one residential lobby in one building, access
shall be provided for at least one lobby.

S.4.2.3 Ground floor residential unit entrances
All ground floor residential units fronting a
street or paseo shall have either one or a
combination of:
a. A primary front door access from the street
or paseo; or
b. A patio, balcony, or similar private open
space placed along the street or paseo that
is at least five feet wide and five feet deep.
■ If provided, the enclosure/railing for such
an amenity shall be at least 50 percent
transparent.
■ If a patio or balcony is provided, it shall
be a minimum of 12 inches above the
sidewalk grade.

S.4.2.4 Pedestrian Pathway
A minimum five-foot wide pedestrian pathway
shall be provided to access building entrances,
lobbies, and ground floor dwelling units, unless
otherwise specified in Piedmont City Code or
required by Fire Code (see Fig. 4.2.3).
a. The pathway shall be unobstructed and shall
have a minimum clear height of one story.

When fences are provided for security, fence
gates shall not be considered obstructions
for the purpose of this standard.
■ Exception for additions and renovationsIf the existing side yard is narrower than five feet, a minimum three-foot-wide
pedestrian pathway shall be allowed to
access the additions in the rear of an
existing building.

Fig. 4.2.1: Example of a conveniently-located and clearlyvisible pedestrian and bicycle entrance.

Fig. 4.2.2: Vehicular rated decorative paving at driveway shared with a pedestrian pathway leading to unit entrances.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 104
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-5
Site organization, planning, and Design
Min 5’
Min 5’
Min 5’
04 ■ Exception for individual ground floor
units- Pathway to individual ground floor
units may be as narrow as three feet.
b. The pathway can be shared between new
and existing buildings on the same site if it
does not traverse through another dwelling
unit or garage.
c. When ground floor units are entered
from a driveway, the pedestrian pathway
is allowed to be shared with the drive.

Permeable and vehicular rated decorative
paving or stamped concrete is allowed at
the driveway, to emphasize the pedestrian
character (see Fig. 4.2.2).

S.4.2.5 Long-term Bicycle Parking Location
Long-term bicycle parking must be located on
the same lot as the use it serves and in any of
the following locations:
a. In a parking facility,
b. In an enclosed bicycle locker, or
c. In a fenced, covered, and locked bicycle
storage area.

S.4.2.6 Bicycle and Auto Parking Clearance
Provide at least five feet of horizontal
clearance between vehicle and bicycle
parking spaces (see Fig. 4.2.4).

S.4.2.7 Long-term Bicycle Parking
Long-term bicycle parking must meet the
following requirements:
a. Provide a minimum of one long-term
bicycle parking space for every four
residential units.
b. Provide long-term bicycle parking equal to
at least 15 percent of the required vehicular
parking for commercial uses.

S.4.2.8 Short-term Bicycle Parking
Short-term bicycle parking must meet the
following requirements:
a. Provide short-term bicycle parking at a
rate of 10 percent of the required vehicular
spaces or housing units, whichever is
greater.
b. Short-term bicycle spaces shall be a
stationary, securely anchored bicycle rack
to which a bicycle frame and one wheel
(two points of contact) can be secured if
both wheels are left on the bicycle. One
such bicycle rack may serve multiple bicycle
parking spaces.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.2.1 Pedestrian and Bicycle Entrances
Place pedestrian and bicycle entrances such
that they are connected to transit stops via
streets, pedestrian walkways, and paseos lined
with active frontages, either directly or via a
path of travel uninterrupted by a driveway or
parking area.

G.4.2.2 Pedestrian and Bicycle paths
For medium and large development sites,
create pedestrian walkways and bicycle paths
that provide easy access to and through the
development site from public rights-of-way.
a. When short-term bicycle parking is located
in the street right -of-way, provide Class 2
racks.

Fig. 4.2.3: Unobstructed 5’ wide pedestrian pathway.

Fig. 4.2.4: Distance between vehicle and bicycle parking within the same parking garage.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 105
4-6
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
STREET

TUCK-UNDER PARKING SPACES
Internal driveway
04 4.3 Driveways and Surface Parking Design

PURPOSE
Driveways and curb cuts for vehicular access to a
development can create large gaps in the streetwall,
increase safety risks for pedestrians and bicyclists, and negatively impact the continuity of walkways and active frontages. Sharing driveways, limiting the number of
driveways for each development, and designing them
thoughtfully can help mitigate some of these negative
impacts.

For structured/podium parking, see Section 4.21 Parking Garage Design.

Separate driveways from pedestrian rights-of-way and other multi-modal transportation services.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.3.1 Surface Parking Location
Locate surface parking in the rear or side
of the site. Parking in the front setback is
allowed only if the site slopes up or down
more than 10 percent from the front property
line to the rear.

S.4.3.2 Parking Setback
When parking is located in the front setback
area or at the front property line:
a. It shall occupy less than 50 percent of the
frontage length for lots with less than 100
feet of street frontage.
b. It shall occupy less than 25 percent of
the street frontage for lots with a street
frontage of 100 feet or greater.
c. Parking in the front setback is not allowed in
the required 20-foot setback for individual
ground floor units.

S.4.3.3 Driveway Location
a. Locate driveway to the side or rear of the
development site (see Fig. 4.3.1).
b. On corner lots, locate parking facilities along
side streets and at least 10 feet away from
street intersections and building entrances.

S.4.3.4 Curb Cuts and Driveway Location
a. Provide a maximum of one curb cut for
driveway access per 100 feet of street
frontage per development.
b. Locate curb cuts at least 20 feet away
from publicly-accessible open spaces and
pedestrian and bicycle entrances, except
within porte-cochères or sites with less than
60 feet of street frontage, which are allowed
to located curb cuts a minimum of 10 feet
away.
c. For corner lots, locate curb cuts to be at
least 10 feet from the beginning of a curb
return of a street (see Fig. 4.3.5).
d. For corner lots, provide the curb cut on the
side street unless no other alternative is
available.
e. When a development has multiple individual
garages or tuck-under parking, access
shall be provided from an internal driveway
instead of multiple curb cuts along these
streets (see Fig. 4.3.1 and Fig. 4.3.4). Fig. 4.3.1: An internal driveway to access tuck-under parking spaces located along the side of the development.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 106
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-7
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 Fig. 4.3.3: Maximum driveway slope based on length from property line.

Table 4.3.1: Driveway gradient standards

DRIVEWAY GRADIENT
*DRIVEWAY LENGTH REQUIREMENT
Up to 14’ Maximum 10%
From 14’-1” to 24’ Maximum 10% for the first 10’;
Maximum 15% for the remaining
length to garage entrance
Greater than 24’-1” Maximum 10% for the first 10’;
Maximum 15% for the last 10’ adjacent
to the garage entrance; Maximum
20% between these two points
*Cross slopes shall be a maximum of 5%. Where utilized as shared access for pedestrians and vehicles cross slopes shall be a maximum of 2%
*Driveway length is measured from the start of the driveway at the property line.

Fig. 4.3.2: Planting at surface parking with at least 5’ wide landscape finger islands protected with curbs.

Fig. 4.3.4: Individual garages and tuck-under parking
accessed from a shared driveway located at the
side of the property.

Property Line Property Line Property Line
Face of Curb
Face of Curb
Face of Curb
STREET
STREET
STREET
GARAGE
FLOOR
GARAGE
FLOOR
GARAGE
FLOOR
Right
of Way
Right
of Way
Right
of Way
0-14’
14’-1”–24’
>24’-1”
10’
10’
10’
10% slope
Max Up
10% slope
Max Up
10% slope
Max Up
15% slope
Max Up
20% slope
Max Up
15% slope
Max Up
10% slope
Max Down
10% slope
Max Down
10% slope
Max Down
15% slope
Max Down
20% slope
Max Down
15% slope
Max Down
Min 5’
Max 10
spaces
Fig. 4.3.5: Curb cut located at least 10’ from the beginning of curb return for corner lots.

Curb cut
min 10’ from
curb return
Side Street
Main Street
Driveway
Curb return
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 107
4-8
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 f. Do not create single-purpose driveways
to roll out solid waste bins or access utility
rooms. These facilities shall be accessed
through internal driveway aisles or shared
with the main driveway.

S.4.3.5 Driveway width
Driveway width shall be a minimum of 12 feet
and a maximum of 20 feet . Exception- Fire
lanes and driveways required by local utility
companies (see Fig. 4.3.6).

S.4.3.6 Driveway Design
a. When provided, driveway ramps shall start
at the property line at the same elevation
as the street right-of-way and meet the
requirements mentioned in Table 4.3.1:

Driveway gradient standards (also see
Fig. 4.3.3).
b. When provided, driveways and driveway
ramps must meet the Standard Details per
City of Piedmont Public Works Department.

S.4.3.7 Parking Stalls
Locate the first parking stall in a surface
parking lot at least 30 feet away from the
back of curb (see Fig. 4.3.6).

S.4.3.8 Pedestrian Walkways
For surface parking lots with more than 15
parking spaces, provide at least a five-footwide pedestrian walkway at a minimum of every 200 feet to connect buildings and
parking or other walkways (see Fig. 4.3.6).

S.4.3.9 Planting at Surface Parking
a. Provide at least five-foot-wide landscape
finger islands at a maximum interval of 10
parking stalls (see Fig. 4.3.6).
b. Protect planted islands and stormwater
retention areas from vehicles by curbs or
wheel stops (see Fig. 4.3.2).
c. Planting and screening elements shall be
held back a minimum of five feet from the
edge of a driveway and be no taller than
three feet to maintain driver visibility.

S.4.3.10 Security gates for Surface Parking
When provided, locate security gates and
check point kiosks a minimum of 40 feet from
the property line to provide enough on-site
queuing length for at least two vehicles to
stack.

S.4.3.11 Screening
Screen at least 75 percent of surface parking
from main streets, side streets, public open
spaces, and adjacent sites with MixedUse and Residential General Plan land use designations using landscaping or three-foottall architectural elements that (at least one of the following):
a. Utilize the same materials, colors, and
lighting fixtures as the site or building
facades on the property for at least 75
percent of the area.
b. Are covered with landscaping or public art
for at least 75 percent of the total length
along public open spaces, main streets,
and side streets.

Fig. 4.3.6: Surface parking with landscape islands and
pedestrian walkways.

Fig. 4.3.7: Example of stormwater infrastructure in surface parking lots.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.3.12 Driveway Materials
Vary the color and texture of paving materials
to distinguish pedestrian and vehicular areas,
improve pedestrian safety, and minimize asphalt
usage, using colored, textured, or patterned
concrete pavers or aggregate.

G.4.3.13 Stormwater Management
Integrate stormwater infrastructure and Low
Impact Development (LID) infrastructure into
parking lot design.

Min 18’
from street
Max 20’
Min 5’
Max 10
stalls
Min 5’
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 108
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-9
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 4.4 Walls and Fences

PURPOSE
Walls and fences provide privacy, security, and
delineation of private and shared spaces while
contributing to the overall neighborhood character.

They should support a pedestrian-friendly environment
by maintaining visibility at key frontages, ensuring
compatibility with adjacent properties, and enhancing
the aesthetic quality of the development. Materials,
height, and placement should balance resident needs
with community integration and visual openness.

Minimize the visual prominence of walls and fences.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.4.1 Perimeter Features Height
When provided, limit the height of retaining
walls in street-facing yards to a maximum of
30 inches.

S.4.4.2 Retaining Wall Height
If the street-facing change in grade is greater
than 30 inches, a series of retaining walls
interspersed by planting areas in a stepped
or terraced fashion shall be constructed
to minimize the retaining wall’s monolithic
appearance according the following:
a. Each retaining wall step shall be a
maximum of 30 inches tall.
b. The steps shall be at a minimum of two feet
intervals at minimum two feet intervals (see
Fig. 4.4.1).

S.4.4.3 Retaining Wall Design
Retaining wall material shall be concrete or
CMU covered with plaster stucco a minimum
of half (1/2) inch thick. They could be covered
with other masonry materials including tiles,
stone etc.

S.4.4.4 Freestanding Walls and Fences at shared
property lines
Provide a minimum six feet tall and maximum
eight feet tall fence or freestanding wall along
property lines shared with single-family uses
on lots in Zone A.

S.4.4.5 Fencing over Retaining Walls
Fencing on top of retaining walls or adjacent
to retaining walls along side and rear shared
property lines shall not exceed eight feet in
height, measured from the lowest grade on
either side of the retaining wall (see Fig. 4.4.2).

S.4.4.6 Screening of Retaining Walls
Where a retaining wall taller than four feet is
used, incorporate a planting strip and irrigation
system at its toe strip to allow for the planting
of screening vegetation and/or a planting strip
with irrigation system at the top of the wall.
a. Planting strip must be a minimum three feet
long and two feet wide.
b. If three feet planting strip cannot be
provided, use one-foot wide and one-foot
deep planting pockets to provide vines that
can grow on the wall surface.

S.4.4.7 Materials
Fences and walls shall have the same materials
and color as that of the primary or secondary
building materials.
a. When the fence is not within five feet of the
primary structure, other materials including
metal, wood, stone, concrete and stucco are
allowed.

S.4.4.8 Gates
Residential security gates, when installed, shall
be no more than 50 percent opaque.

Fig. 4.4.1: Stepped retaining walls to avoid a monolithic appearance.

Fig. 4.4.2: Fencing on top of retaining walls along side and rear shared property lines.

Grade change
more than 4’
Stepped retaining
walls, no taller than
30” each
Max 8’
GRADE

RETAINING
WALL
FENCE 4’
4’
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 109
4-10
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
A
Frontage
A+B > 75% of W
Corner Lot
Place at and for a minimum of 25’ from the
intersecting front and side street setback lines
W
Min 25’
B
Min 25’
Site frontage = X’
Front setback
Open space
width >25% of X’
and area > 225 sf
Building frontage > 18”
from setback
04 4.5 Building Placement

PURPOSE
Places designed for people encourage interaction
and connections between people and environment.

Locating buildings with active frontages along streets
and public spaces such as sidewalks, paseos, parks,
and plazas helps frame the space and contributes
energy, visual interest, and eyes-on-the-street.

Activate the public realm by locating buildings near streets and public open spaces.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.5.1 Frontage
a. Build a minimum 75 percent of ground-floor
building frontage at or within 18 inches
of the required front setback to create a
continuous street wall (see Fig. 4.5.1 and
Fig. 4.5.3).
b. Exception. This standard does not apply if
any of the following conditions exist:
■ Ground floor residential units with
dooryards that meet Table 4.13.3:

Dimension standards for entrance
dooryards or stoops that meet Table

4.13.4: Standard dimensions for entrance
stoops.
■ Greater than 25 percent of the linear
frontage between the building and
the sidewalk is a privately owned (and
maintained) publicly accessible open
space greater than 225 square feet,
such as a plaza (see Fig. 4.5.2).

S.4.5.2 Corner Lot
a. At street corners, buildings shall be placed
at the street yard setback lines and for
a minimum 25 feet distance from the
intersecting front and street side setback
lines (see Fig. 4.5.1 and Fig. 4.5.2).
b. Ensure clear visibility around corners by
following the Line of Sight and Visibility
Requirements per City of Piedmont, Public
Works Department–Standard Details.

S.4.5.3 Additions
Detached additions shall be located such that
they either face a public street or open space,
or an interior courtyard of at least 10 feet by
10 feet.
a. When an interior courtyard is provided for
access to additions, it shall be accessible
from the street by a pedestrian pathway.

S.4.5.4 Buildings abutting Zone A
Building facade planes facing and abutting
properties in Zone A may not exceed 35 feet
in width without a break a minimum six feet
depth.

Fig. 4.5.1: Frontage and corner lot requirements.

Fig. 4.5.2: Greater than 25% of site frontage as privately Fig. 4.5.3: Frontage and corner lot requirements. owned (and maintained) public open space.

Min 25’
A
B
Street
setback
W
(A+B > 75% of W)
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 110
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-11
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 4.6 Services and Utilities

PURPOSE
Adequate service and utility facilities are critical to the functionality of buildings. However, these facilities interfere with the continuity of active frontages, facade transparency, and other community characteristics that
support a positive public realm.

Sensitive placement of service areas, utilities, and
service entrances supports pleasant and safe public
spaces, and makes walking, bicycling and riding public
transit enjoyable.

Locate services, utilities, and their access away from active frontages, pedestrian, bicycle, and transit areas.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.6.1 Location
a. Locate all utility and service areas and
access at least 50 feet away from street
intersections and primary building
entrances, measured from the edge of
the driveway to the closest edge of the
building entrance or open space.
a. For small sites or mid-block parcels that
can only be accessed from the front, on a
site less than 50 feet wide, place all utilities
and services at a location farthest from any
street intersections and primary building
entrance.

S.4.6.2 Location of Ground Floor Utilities
a. For street-facing facades wider than 60
feet, ground floor utilities shall occupy no
more than 25 percent of the facades when
access is required for utilities and services
from the street (see Fig. 4.6.1).
b. Locate service yards, utilities, and access
for mixed-use developments at least five
feet away from abutting residential uses.

S.4.6.3 Location of Ground-mounted Equipment
a. Neither mechanical nor electrical
equipment is allowed in street-facing and
interior side setbacks abutting singlefamily uses on lots in Zone A, unless no other alternative is permitted by the local
utility provider. The applicant shall provide
documentation from the utility company or
the company completing the design and
installation of the utilities. Fig. 4.6.1: On-site facilities occupy a maximum of 25% of the street-facing ground floor building facade.
(X’+Y’) ≤25% of Z’ (if Z’>60’)
STREET
X’ Y’
Z’
b. Do not locate mechanical equipment within
setback areas unless it is enclosed within
an allowable site feature.

S.4.6.4 Location of refuse and recycling containers
a. Do not locate common refuse and
recycling containers within:
■ Any required street-facing setback,
except during staging for pickups.

Exception. Sites with cross slopes
greater than 10 percent.
■ Any required parking and landscaped
areas, except during staging for pickups.
■ Any other area required to remain
unencumbered, according to fire and
other applicable building and public
safety codes.
b. Provide a covered area for solid waste
collection when it is located outside the
building envelope (see Fig. 4.6.2).

S.4.6.5 Access
Access location for utilities and waste
collection from shall be based on the
following priority:

1. Alleys (if available).

2. Private driveways (if provided), when there
are no alleys.

3. Side streets, when a development has
multiple frontage and no alleys or private
driveways.

4. Main street (only when no other street
frontage is available).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 111
4-12
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 S.4.6.6 Clear Zone
Maintain at least a five-foot-wide and five-footdeep accessible area in front of all enclosure types clear of obstructions.

S.4.6.7 Trash Staging
If a development has multiple street frontages
and trash collection staging or pickup is
required to be along the street, locate it along
the side street.

S.4.6.8 Transformers
When transformers are located outside the
building, place them below grade in vaults,
unless prohibited by local utility companies.

The applicant shall provide documentation
from the utility company or company
completing the design and installation of the
utilities
S.4.6.9 Storage Containers
Containers used for the collection and
storage of refuse and recyclable materials
shall meet the standards of the waste
collection company and be:
a. Constructed of waterproof and rustproof
materials.
b. Enclosed and covered.
c. Secured from unauthorized entry or
removal of material.
d. Sized to accommodate the volume of
materials collected between collection
schedules. The applicant shall provide a
trash management plan to demonstrate
that they have met the requirements of the
local trash company.

S.4.6.10 Screening
a. Screen all transformers, backflow
preventers, utilities, equipment, and trash
collection containers located outside the
building envelope that are within 30 feet of
a public right-of-way (see Fig. 4.6.2) using
plant materials, fencing, or walls.
b. When located along shared property lines,
enclose all utilities and equipment or paint
them the same color as the adjacent walls
along neighboring properties.

S.4.6.11 Screening height
a. All screening devices (except planting)
shall be as high as the highest point of the
equipment being screened.
b. Planting shall be at least as tall as the
equipment being screened within 5 years.

S.4.6.12 Drain-Waste-Vent System
Supply, exhaust and venting plumbing,
conduits, and flues shall be concealed within
the walls of a building.

S.4.6.13 Drainage
Provide a hosebib and a drain in the floor of
trash enclosures such that it connects to the
sanitary sewer system.

Fig. 4.6.2: Covered area for solid waste collection when located outside the building.

Fig. 4.6.3: Services and utilities outside the building screened from public view using a fence.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 112
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-13
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 S.4.6.14 Cluster Mailboxes
If exterior cluster mailboxes are provided
in any development, they shall meet the
following standards:
a. The cluster mailbox unit(s) and any
associated shelters shall be designed
using exterior finish materials and/or colors
used on the surrounding residential units
(see Fig. 4.6.4).
b. Freestanding cluster mailboxes shall be
protected from the elements with a roof or
canopy.
c. Illuminate the cluster mailbox area. Motionactivated lights are allowed.

Fig. 4.6.4: Example of exterior cluster mailboxes. Fig. 4.6.5: Service access door painted the same color as the building facade.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.6.1 Location
a. Locate service and utility access points for
development sites with multiple frontages
based on the following priorities:
■ Alleys and on-site parking lots
■ Side streets
■ Publicly-accessible open spaces
■ Main streets
b. For purposes of screening, locate utilities
and services (e.g., transformers, backflow
preventers, electrical and mechanical
equipment rooms, service yards, and solid
waste collection) at the side or rear of
the development site, while still allowing
enough space for maintenance.

G.4.6.2 Screening
a. Conceal runs of all supply, exhaust
and venting of plumbing, conduits, and
flues within the walls of a building. If
concealment is infeasible, the run should
be minimized, discretely placed, and
painted to match the adjacent wall.
b. If permitted by utility companies and
Fire Department, screen or paint utility
connections to blend in with the exterior
materials to which they are mounted (see
Fig. 4.6.5).

G.4.6.3 Noise
Locate noise generating equipment, such as
water pumps, heat pumps, air conditioning
condensers, kitchen hood exhaust fans, and
pool equipment, so that noise levels in public
areas is within the maximum decibel limit
regulated by the Piedmont Building Code.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 113
4-14
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
X'–Height of building
along the perimeter of
a shared open space.

Over 3
stories
(Height X')

MINIMUM X'
MINIMUM 0.5x X'
Up to 3
stories
(Height X')
Shared open space
MINIMUM 15'
04 4.7 Open Spaces

PURPOSE
Well-placed open spaces can support quality
connections and active uses, provide transitions
between various uses, and be a destination for
recreation, gatherings, and community activities.

Open spaces can be divided into three categories (see
Fig. 4.7.2):
■ Private Open Spaces
■ Semi-Private Open Spaces
■ Shared Open Spaces
Open spaces define community character and create livable environments.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.7.1 Private Open Space Size
Provide a minimum of 35 square feet of
private open space for each residential unit in
a multifamily or mixed-use development.
a. If private open spaces are not provided for
residential units, provide 80 square feet
of shared open space per residential unit,
in addition to the minimum open space
required by the underlying Zoning.

S.4.7.2 Location
a. When provided, locate shared open
spaces either at-grade, elevated or at the
roof level.
b. When provided, locate semi-private open
spaces within two vertical feet of grade
from the adjacent sidewalk.

Fig. 4.7.1: Open space dimensions based on the height of building facing the open space. Fig. 4.7.2: Examples of private, semi-private, and shared open spaces.

PRIVATE OPEN SPACE

SEMI-PRIVATE OPEN SPACE

SHARED OPEN SPACE
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 114
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-15
Site organization, planning, and Design
SHARED OPEN SPACE–AT-GRADE
Min 15’
SHARED OPEN SPACE–AT PODIUM LEVEL
Min 15’
Min 15’
SHARED OPEN SPACE–AT ROOF LEVEL
Min area
300 sf
Seating within
10’ of play area
Min 15’
04 S.4.7.3 Shared Open Spaces
a. Minimum 400 square feet per lot or 20
square feet per unit whichever is greater.
b. When all the building walls facing a shared
open space are up to three stories tall, each
shared open space dimension shall be at
least 15 feet (see Fig. 4.7.1).
c. When one or more building walls facing
a shared open space are taller than
three stories, at least one of the shared
open space dimensions shall be equal to
or greater than the height of the tallest
building wall facing the shared open space.

The other dimension shall be 50 percent
or more of the height of the tallest building
wall facing the shared open space
(see Fig. 4.7.1).
d. Where required shared open space abuts
private open space, an access drive or
public right-of-way, a minimum three-foot
wide planting buffer shall be provided to
screen the private open space.

S.4.7.4 Seating in Publicly Accessible Ground-floor
Plaza
a. When provided adjacent to on-site
residential uses, a minimum of six linear feet
of seating shall be provided per 100 square
feet of each public ground-floor plaza area.
b. When provided adjacent to on-site ground
floor commercial uses, a minimum of five
percent of the total public ground-floor
plaza area shall be designated for outdoor
seating.
c. If there are food service businesses
abutting, 10 percent of the total public
ground-floor plaza area shall be
designated for seating. This seating could
be a combination of built-in or movable
furniture.

S.4.7.5 Children’s Play Area
Provide a minimum of one children’s play area
if at least one of the following is true:
a. A development with family dwelling units
has more than one shared open space.
b. A development has at least 20 family
dwelling units and the majority are twobedroom units.
c. A development has at least 20 family
dwelling units and more than 50 percent
are larger than 700 square feet.

Fig. 4.7.4: Children’s play area in group usable open space with adjacent seating. Fig. 4.7.3: Examples of shared open spaces roof level, elevated and at-grade.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 115
4-16
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 S.4.7.6 Children’s Play Area
When provided, design each children’s play to
have the following (see Fig. 4.7.4):
a. A minimum area of 300 square feet and
a minimum dimension of 15 feet in any
direction.
b. A minimum of six linear feet of seating
within 10 feet of the play area.

S.4.7.7 Roof Decks
Roof decks are limited to a maximum of
30 percent of each building footprint in a
development.

Fig. 4.7.5: Example of semi-private open space to create a transition between the public realm and ground
floor residential units.

Fig. 4.7.6: Examples of amenities- roof deck BBQ facility, picnic area, and outdoor fitness area.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.7.1 Semi-private open spaces
Create semi-private open spaces to transition
between the public realm and ground-floor
building uses, such as residences, retail
storefronts, and administrative industrial
operations (see Fig. 4.7.5).

G.4.7.2 Connections
When provided, create visual connections
between shared and semi-private open
spaces and the public realm using portals or
other transparent materials.

G.4.7.3 Recreational facilities
a. Include outdoor recreational facilities,
furniture, seating, and amenities, such as
sport courts and par courts, as parts of
project landscape design and to define onsite circulation. b. Provide a variety of spaces and amenities
for different activities and occupant groups,
such as seating areas, pet areas, and
playgrounds (see Fig. 4.7.6).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 116
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-17
Site organization, planning, and Design
Planting in
minimum 30%
of the area
Front
setback > 3’
Soil depth
minimum 3’
deep
Planting well depth < 30”
(does not count towards
required landscape area)
Maximum 42”
Property
Line STREET
04 4.8 Landscaping

PURPOSE
Landscaping softens open spaces and buildings to
create welcoming, attractive places and maintain
privacy between neighbors. Rather than being used
as an afterthought to mask inappropriately positioned
or designed structures, landscape should instead be
part of a comprehensive site design and should be
compatible with the design of structures found on the
property.

Green stormwater infrastructure and Low Impact
Development (LID) techniques when used for
landscaping can create unique features, manage
stormwater, and enhance environmental quality and
character of developments.

Utilize Firewise Landscaping techniques to design and
maintain landscapes with fire safety in mind and create defensible space and using fire-resistant plants and
materials.

Create welcoming places and enhance the quality of the environment with sustainable landscaping areas.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.8.1 Landscaping Coverage
a. Provide landscape plantings for a minimum
of 15 percent of a lot in Zone C and 10
percent of a lot in Zone D.
b. The following does not count toward the
required landscape area:
■ Artificial turf; and
■ Any area with a minimum dimension in
any direction less than 30 inches
(see Fig. 4.8.1).

S.4.8.2 Buffer from Residential Uses
Provide a minimum five-foot-wide landscape
buffer at the side and rear shared property
lines where commercial and mixed-use
developments abut residential developments.
a. If the side yard is utilized for accessing any
structures in the back of the property, the
pathway shall be at least three feet wide.
b. For additions and alterations, if the existing
side yard is utilized for accessing any
structures in the back of the property,
maintain the existing pathway width and
provide a landscape buffer that is five feet
wide or as wide as the remaining width,
whichever is lesser.
c. For additions and alterations, if the existing
side yard is narrower than five feet and if
there are no pathways, provide a threefoot wide landscape buffer at the shared property lines.

S.4.8.3 Frontage Landscaping
a. When a front setback of more than three
feet is required, a minimum of 30 percent of
the area between the street-facing building
facade and property line that is not a part
of a stoop, forecourt, dooryard, pedestrian
pathway shall be planted using trees,
ground cover, foundation plantings, or wall
plantings (see Fig. 4.8.1).
a. In the Grand Avenue Subarea, 100 percent
of the required street setback area shall be
planted except for outdoor seating areas,
on-site plazas, and areas of ingress and
egress. Landscaping may include container
plantings, ground-cover, climbing vines,
shrubs, low hedges, and trees.
b. In the Civic Center subarea, provide planter
beds, window boxes, and/or container
plantings at all facade insets over one-foot
deep, niches, and entrances.

S.4.8.4 Planting at Street Frontage
When planting is provided along the street
frontage between the building and the
property line:
a. It shall be at least three feet wide.
b. It shall have a minimum soil depth of three
feet to allow for planting at street grade (see
Fig. 4.8.1). Some trees may require deeper
soil depth based on species and size.
c. When raised planting beds are provided
along the street facing building facade, they
shall not be taller than 42 inches above
Fig. 4.8.1: Landscaping grade (see Fig. 4.8.1 and Fig. 4.8.2). in the front setback.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 117
4-18
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
Minimum 20' from tree center to
building edge for large trees
Minimum 12' from tree center to
building edge for medium trees
Common open space
Surface parking area on site
Total tree canopy cover at maturity
Site area shaded by canopy cover
42”
MAX
04 S.4.8.5 Interior Side and Rear Setback Landscaping
a. Landscaping within side and rear setback
areas used to delineate property lines or
for screening from the adjacent residences
shall be a minimum of six feet tall at
maturity.
b. All interior side and rear setbacks abutting
Zone A shall be planted with a mix of
trees and shrubs. At least one tree of at
least 15-gallon size shall be planted per
20 linear feet or as appropriate to create
a tree canopy over the required setback.

In addition, at least three shrubs shall be
planted per 20 linear feet.

S.4.8.6 Plants other than Trees
a. Plant size at maturity shall not exceed:
■ 30 inches within 10 feet of a sidewalk or
driveway.
■ The height of any building aperture
within 10 feet of the aperture.
b. Plant species shall meet Water Efficient
Landscape Ordinance requirements.
c. Planting shall cover at least 50 percent of
the undeveloped site area.
d. Plant ground cover at a maximum of 1 foot
on center.

S.4.8.7 Trees
a. Select trees which at maturity create a tree
canopy cover that shades a minimum of
50 percent of each on-site surface parking
area and shared open space at ground
level (see Fig. 4.8.3).
b. Tree wells shall be at least four feet larger
than the tree trunk diameter at maturity.
c. Designate 700 cubic feet of noncompacted soil for small trees, 1400 cubic feet of non-compacted soil for
medium trees, and 2100 cubic feet of
non-compacted soil for large trees to allow
trees to reach their maturity. Structural
soil systems, soil cells, or continuous soil
trenches are example of ways to reach to
the above soil volumes.
d. When planting trees on green roofs or
above underground parking, provide a
minimum soil depth of 36 inches and soil
volume for each tree as identified in (c).

Fig. 4.8.2: Example of 42” tall planter along the street frontage.

Fig. 4.8.3: Tree canopy cover that shades a minimum of 50 percent of all on-site parking areas and common open spaces.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 118
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-19
Site organization, planning, and Design
Service areas,
driveways, and
loading areas
Surface
parking lot
Min 14’
Min 12’
04 S.4.8.8 Tree Distance from Buildings
Provide the following minimum distances from
the center of trees to the edges of buildings
for all trees to reach maturity and to prevent
unnecessary tree removal:
a. Five feet for small trees,
b. 12 feet for medium trees, and
c. 20 feet for large trees.

S.4.8.9 Tree Spacing
a. Provide a maximum distance of 20 feet on
center for small trees, 25 feet for medium
trees, and 35 feet for large trees, or 75
percent of the mature canopy size distance
for each tree type measured from the
center (see Fig. 4.8.4).
b. Maximum spacing distances may be
achieved with a combination of new and
existing trees to remain.

S.4.8.10 Vertical Clearance
Provide minimum vertical clearance between
the grade to bottom of the structure above
to allow for tree canopies to reach their
maximum height at maturity as follows (see
Fig. 4.8.5):
a. 14 feet in and around service and loading
areas and driveways,
b. 12 feet for parking lots,
c. Coordinate with Fire Access requirements
for buildings over 40 feet in height.

Fig. 4.8.4: Location of new trees in relation to the existing ones on site.

Fig. 4.8.5: Vertical clearance for tree canopies based on location.

S.4.8.11 Street Trees
Introduce new street trees to match the
spacing of existing street trees in front of
contiguous neighboring properties. If there
are no street trees in front of contiguous
neighboring properties, provide new street
trees with a minimum spacing of 25 feet.
a. Exception: If a tree lawn or sidewalk does
not exist or is narrower than five feet, no
additional street trees need to be provided.

S.4.8.12 Stormwater Management
Utilize at least 50 percent of the total
landscaped area on a development site for
LID site design measures, source controls,
and green stormwater infrastructure,
including but not limited to bioretention, rain
gardens, LID planters, and permeable pavers
(see Fig. 4.8.6).

S.4.8.13 On-site Stormwater Control
Drainage shall be provided on-site using
natural drainage channels, bioretention areas,
or other landscape areas that filter surface
water run-off before it enters the storm drain
system.

S.4.8.14 Hardscape Materials
a. Use permeable or pervious on-site
hardscape materials. Examples include
pervious pavers or concrete, compacted
decomposed granite or sand set pavers to
allow for water to flow through.
b. Do not place decorative paving in the path
of travel of waste collection vehicles.

Proposed trees
Existing trees
Max 25'
Max 20'
Max 35'
Max 75%
of (S+L)'
L'
M' S'
Large
tree
Medium
tree Small
tree
Max 75%
of (M+S)'
Max 75%
of (M+L)'
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 119
4-20
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 Fig. 4.8.6: Bioretention planters help manage site stormwater runoff as well as run-off from building roofs using
downspouts.

S.4.8.15 Paving within Setback Area
Paving within required setback areas shall be
distinct from the adjacent public sidewalk in
color, design, and/or texture.

S.4.8.16 Hillside developments
For developments on sites with an up-or
down-slope of greater than 20 percent, at
least one of the following shall be provided:
a. Skirt walls at the sides of driveway bridges
with guardrail designs.
b. Planting that will screen the skirt walls at
maturity.
c. Terraced planters with cascading vines.
d. Attached exterior stairs.
e. Pergolas/trellises.
f. Variations in the wall forms and surface
treatments.

S.4.8.17 Prohibited Species and Materials
Plant species that are listed by California
Invasive Plant Council (Cal-IPC) as invasive
are prohibited as is flammable mulch.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.8.1 On-site circulation
Use landscaping to define on-site circulation
and highlight focal points, building entrances,
and open spaces, such as public and semiprivate open spaces. For example, tree-lined walkways and special paving materials can
shape entrances, plazas, and activity areas.

G.4.8.2 Existing Trees
Preserve existing mature trees and include
them in the overall landscape design.

G.4.8.3 Shading
a. Place planting according to sunlight needs.
b. Locate shade trees strategically to reduce
building energy consumption.

G.4.8.4 Planting
a. Protect plants in high traffic areas, such as
residential community spaces, with raised
curbs, seat walls, tree guards, and/or other
devices.
b. Use a mix of trees, shrubs, and ground
cover in the transition area between
buildings and sidewalks to maintain visual
connections.
c. Restrict the use of turf and artificial grass,
which can be contributors of microplastics
into the environment.

G.4.8.5 Hardscape Materials
Use hardscape materials with a high solar
reflective index (SRI).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 120
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-21
Site organization, planning, and Design
Use lighting to create safe and inviting places. 04

4.9 Site Lighting

PURPOSE
Site lighting should ensure safety, security, and
accessibility for residents and visitors while preserving neighborhood character and minimizing light pollution.

Lighting should enhance the pedestrian experience,
support wayfinding, and provide adequate illumination
for shared paths, entries, and parking areas without
negatively impacting adjacent properties or the
nighttime environment.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.9.1 Location
a. At least one pedestrian and bicycle
circulation route shall have an unbroken
line of lighting from site entrance to
building entrance.
b. Illuminate all service yards and access
to services and utilities. Motion-activated
lights are allowed.
c. Illuminate all parking lots and open spaces.

S.4.9.2 Orientation
Orient all site lighting directly downwards to
prevent light pollution and excess glare in the
public realm.

S.4.9.3 Illumination Zone
Illuminate a zone of a maximum of five feet
in front of the ground floor facade for all
active frontages such as retail, offices, and
community rooms.

S.4.9.4 Lighting Fixture Height
Install lighting fixtures with heights based on
the location as follows:
a. Up to three feet for walking paths through
open space.
b. Up to 12 feet, when the distance of the
fixture from the adjacent residential
property line is less than twice the height
of the fixture.
c. Up to 25 feet, when the distance of the
fixture from the adjacent shared property
line is more than twice the height of the
fixture.
d. 12 to 16 feet tall when adjacent to retail.

S.4.9.5 Outdoor Lighting Fixtures
a. All site lighting fixtures shall be fully
shielded (full cut-off) to prevent light from
aiming skyward and light spillage and glare
that can be seen from above.
b. Keep the maximum color temperature
for outdoor lighting below 2700 Kelvin,
except for outdoor decorative lighting from
November 15 to January 15.
c. Flood lights are prohibited.

Fig. 4.9.1: Provide site lighting at multiple levels that is sensitive to adjacent uses.

Distance from property line
Residential
Retail
Office/
Residential
H < 1/2 x distance from property line (25' max.)
12' to 16'
Max 12’
Max 3’
Property line
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 121
4-22
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Site organization, planning, and Design
04 Fig. 4.9.2: Examples of site lighting.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.9.1 Location
a. Design lighting for all open spaces, parking
lots, pedestrian paths, and landscaping
to be consistent with each other and
the overall lighting scheme for the
development site.
b. Ensure adequate light levels in utility and
service areas and entrances.

G.4.9.2 Lighting Fixtures
a. Install lighting that consistently and evenly
illuminates sidewalks in and around ground
floor active frontages.
b. Install energy-efficient lighting fixtures
that provide an adequate level of lighting
for the safety of building occupants and
visitors, without spilling onto adjacent
properties. Developments are encouraged
to go above Title 24 minimums.
c. Use daylight sensors for site lighting to limit
excess lighting and conserve energy.
d. Avoid flood-lighting, LED flashing, or strobe
lights.
e. Choose fixtures with Backlight, Up light,
and Glare (BUG) rating of B0, U0, G0.

G.4.9.3 Lighting Schedule
Dim or turn off outdoor lighting from 11pm to
6am.

Source:2018 Mike Butler
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 122
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-23

BUILDING DESIGN
Mixed-use and multifamily building design, form and massing should support a cohesive urban fabric. 04

4.10 Massing, Form, and Proportions

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.10.1 Stepbacks
For buildings taller than three floors, step
back the top one-third of the floors by a
minimum of eight feet along the street
frontage (see Fig. 4.10.1).
a. Intrusion into the required stepback shall
be allowed for up to 25 percent of the
building facade along the shared property
line (see Fig. 4.10.2).

S.4.10.2 Multiple Uses in Mixed-use Developments
Differentiate ground floor commercial uses
from upper level residential uses by utilizing
one or more of the following: stepbacks,
cornices, awnings, sunshades, window
sizes and patterns, or changes in planes or
materials.

S.4.10.3 Buildings at Street Intersections
For buildings at street intersections with
traffic signals, terminus points, and open
spaces, include at least two of the following
architectural features for a minimum of 20
percent and not less than 15 feet of each
building facade measured from the corner of
the property lines in both directions:
a. Articulated corner with vertical or horizontal
projections.
b. Building entrances with a minimum recess
of three feet (see Fig. 4.10.3).
c. Window grouping or spacing that is
different from the rest of the building
facade (see Fig. 4.10.3).
d. Windows that are at least 30 percent larger
than 75 percent of the windows on that
building facade.

Fig. 4.10.1: Stepback at street frontage.

Fig. 4.10.3: Example of an articulated building facade with stepback at the top floor. Fig. 4.10.2: Intrusion into the required stepback at the top floor.

PURPOSE
The size and proportions of Piedmont’s multi-family
lots generally limit their capacity. A few of the lots
with existing apartment buildings are larger. Thus, the focus of the multifamily guidelines is to accommodate
diverse housing types while recognizing the
constraints of small parcels and respecting Piedmont’s
architectural heritage.
e. Different material or color at the building
corner that extends the entire height of the
building corner for buildings up to four stories
tall and a minimum of two-thirds height of the
building corner for taller buildings (see Fig.

4.10.3). The ground floor facade may use a
different material.

S.4.10.4 Streetwalls
For streetwalls more than 100 feet in length,
provide any one of the following (see Fig. 4.10.5):
a. At least one recess or projection that is a
minimum of 15 feet wide and 10 feet deep.
b. An exterior court at the street level that is
a minimum of 10 feet by 10 feet, is open to
the sky, and is visually open to the street on
at least one side. This court could be a part
of the setback required by the underlying



 
 
Stepback
Min 8’
Street Setback
A
Required top
floor stepback
Sidewalk
B
B = up to 25% of A

EXISTING

BUILDING
NEW

CONSTRUCTION
Top 1/3rd floor
Property Line
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 123
4-24
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design










































 

 

 

 

 

 























































































 

 

 
 

 

 

 
  








































































 

 

 

 
  

 
Min 10’ wide court visually
open to the street
Min 15’ wide recess
Min 10 deep
Min 12’ wide portal
Min 12’ tall
Min 10’ deep
04 Fig. 4.10.4: An exaggerated roof form or step-down massing at building corner.

Fig. 4.10.5: Treatments for streetwalls longer than 100’ in length.

Zoning district. Fences are allowed if they
comply with Zoning.
c. A portal that is at least 12 feet wide and has
a vertical clearance of 12 feet. Fences and
gates are allowed at such portals if they
comply with Zoning (see Fig. 4.10.7).

S.4.10.5 Developments abutting Zone A
Do not exceed the length of building facade
planes facing and abutting properties in
Zone A greater than 35 feet in width without
a minimum of six feet deep and 10 feet wide
massing break (see Fig. 4.10.8).

S.4.10.6 Developments along Sloping Frontages
Step the street-facing building facades with
grade at a minimum (see Fig. 4.10.9):
a. Every 120 feet along streets with grades
over 10 percent and up to 20 percent.

Source:2017 © Corey Gaffer
Fig. 4.10.6: Example of streetwall massing breaks.

Source:Designed by Leddy Maytum Stacy Architects
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 124
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-25
Building Design






































 

 

 

 

 

 


Max 120’ when Z is 10-20%
Max 80’ when Z is >20%
Upper floor
eliminated
to create a
building step Max 35’
Min 10’ wide
Min 6’ deep
Setback line
ZONE A Slope Z = 10-20% Grade
04 Fig. 4.10.7: Example of streetwall massing break using a portal.

Fig. 4.10.8: Massing breaks for developments abutting Zone A. Fig. 4.10.9: Building massing along sloping frontages. b. Every 80 feet along streets with grades
greater than 20 percent.

S.4.10.7 Stepping for Sloping Sites
Create stepping in the street-facing building
facade for sloping sites using at least one of
the following:
a. Changing the elevations of finished floors
and/or roofs for no less than four feet
between steps (see Fig. 4.10.9)
b. Adding floors at higher grade elevations as
allowed by the underlying Zoning district
(see Fig. 4.10.9).
c. Eliminating or stepping back upper floors at
the lowest point of the slope by a minimum
of five feet.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.10.1 Relationship to surroundings
Take cues for form, proportions, roof forms,
and building elements from nearby buildings
of similar size to establish building massing
elements.

G.4.10.2 Building Bulk
Locate the major bulk of building massing
towards main streets and transit stops.

G.4.10.3 Historic Adjacency
Scale the height and mass of new
developments to be compatible with and
avoid dominating nearby historic and civic
structures.

G.4.10.4 Multiple Uses
Differentiate the ground floor commercial
use from upper floor residential use with
front setbacks, cornices, awnings, or other
architectural elements.

G.4.10.5 Townhouses/Rowhouses
When more than one unit is housed in the
same building, the building composition
should be read as a whole, rather than one
that creates different architectural styles for
the separate units.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 125
4-26
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Fig. 4.11.2: Pitched roofs no longer than 150’ with overhang extending 12”-36”.

Max 100’
Max 100’
Design roofs to be compatible with surroundings and add character to buildings.

4.11 Roof Form and Design

PURPOSE
Roof forms and materials greatly impact the
appearance and character of buildings and
neighborhoods. Articulated roof forms create
additional interest to all developments. They can
emphasize certain elements of the building massing
using a combination of roof forms such as flat, gables, pitched roofs, and other design strategies such as
variations in roof and parapet heights.

Some roof shapes, such as flat roofs, allow for
a contemporary design and provide space for
multipurpose facilities including community spaces,
low maintenance green roofs, green stormwater
infrastructure, renewable energy generation, and
mechanical equipment required for the building.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.11.1 Continuity
Break the continuity of pitched roofs and roofs
with horizontal eaves more than 100 feet in
length using gables, building projections,
massing breaks, facade plane changes, or
sunshades (see Fig. 4.11.2).

S.4.11.2 Roof Treatment
Design buildings with at least one of the
following roofline edge treatments:
a. A decorative cornice treatment (other than
colored stripes or bands) (see Fig. 4.11.2)
b. A sloped roof with overhangs that extend
a minimum 12 inches and maximum 36
inches, including the eave and gutter profile
(see Fig. 4.11.2).
c. A parapet not exceeding the maximum
height as permitted by the underlying
Zoning district.

Fig. 4.11.1: Examples of common roof forms.

S.4.11.3 Dormers
When provided, do not design dormers to
exceed eight feet in width (see Fig. 4.11.5).

S.4.11.4 Roof Decks
When provided, set back roof decks a
minimum of 10 feet from the building edges on
all sides. They could be enclosed on the sides
and rear, either partially or completely.

S.4.11.5 Pitch
The pitch of the roof shall be 3:12 to 5:12 ratio
(see Fig. 4.11.3). Flat roofs with parapets are
also permitted.

Flat
Gable
Flat (with parapet)
Gable
A-Frame
Hipped
Shed
Hip and Valley
Cross Hipped
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 126
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-27
Building Design

 

 

 

 

 
   

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 
  




















  
 

SLOPE SLOPE

RISE RISE
RUN
RUN

PITCH ANGLE
PITCH
ANGLE
PITCH = RISE
RUN
Min 12”
Max 8’
Max 8’
Min 6”
Min 3”
Min 6”

PARAPET CAP

CORNICE
04 S.4.11.6 Eaves
Where eaves exceed 18 inches in depth,
exterior brackets or beams are required. The
width of each bracket member shall be at
least three inches and the thickness of each
bracket member shall be at least two inches.

S.4.11.7 Cornices
When provided, cornices shall:
a. Be a minimum of 12 inches tall
(see Fig. 4.11.6).
b. Project from the face of the building for at
least six inches (see Fig. 4.11.6).

S.4.11.8 Parapet and Parapet Caps
a. Parapet segments may not exceed 25 feet
in length without interruption in height, form,
or plane change (seeFig. 4.11.7).
b. For buildings with parapets, provide parapet
caps which are a minimum of six inches tall
and project from the building facade for at
least three inches (see Fig. 4.11.6).

S.4.11.9 Roofs at Bays
The eave or roof form of a recessed facade
bay shall not be taller than those of the bays
not recessed (seeFig. 4.11.7).

S.4.11.10 Solar Equipment
a. Solar roofs and other Building Integrated
Photovoltaic (BIPV) roof designs are exempt
from roof form standards above if needed
to achieve a net zero energy consumption
result on site.

Fig. 4.11.4: Examples of cornices.

Fig. 4.11.3:  Example of how to calculate the roof pitch.

Fig. 4.11.5: Limit the width of dormers to 8’, when provided.

Source:Bruce Damonte
Fig. 4.11.6: Requirements for cornices and parapet caps.

Fig. 4.11.7:  Roof forms at recessed bays not taller than others.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 127
4-28
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
Rooftop equipment
consolidated and screened
from occupied roof deck
Rooftop equipment
consolidated and screened
from occupied roof deck
Occupied roof decks
04 Fig. 4.11.8: Rooftop equipment shall be screened from roof terraces or group usable open spaces at the roof level using architectural or landscape elements as allowed by Zoning. b. Rooftop solar panels shall have a lowprofile, flush-mounted design, with a maximum of six-inch gap between the
solar panel and the roof material unless
the roof is flat. If solar panels are mounted
on a flat roof and are tilted or angled
to maximize solar energy production,
building parapets or other architectural
elements shall provide screening from
view from the public right-of-way and from
adjacent single-family uses within 300
feet. Screening shall be architecturally
continuous with the building in color,
material, and trim cap detail.

S.4.11.11 Height of Roof-mounted Equipment
Screen roof mounted equipment greater than
12 inches above the roof line, except for roof
exhaust vents, plumbing vents, and solar
panels on pitched roofs, from the public rightof-way and from adjacent single-family uses within 300 feet.

S.4.11.12 Gutters
All gutters shall contain features to direct
rainwater away from exterior walls including
one or more of the following:
a. Projecting eaves (minimum 12-inch
projection)
b. Scuppers (minimum 12-inch projection if no
downspouts are used)
c. Gutters with downspouts

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.11.1 Roof Articulation
Design articulated roof forms for new
developments and building extensions with
elements such as parapets, parapet caps, and
cornices to create strong edges and reinforce
massing and building facade articulation.

G.4.11.2 Roof Decks
When roof decks are added as a shared open
space or recreational facility, all mechanical
equipment and service rooms should be
screened from the shared space (see Fig. 4.11.8).

G.4.11.3 Sustainability
To reduce the heat island effect and energy
loads, use LID strategies such as “cool roofs”
with non-reflective and low-intensity (light and
dull color) materials and finishes.

G.4.11.4 Mechanical Equipment
Group plumbing, mechanical, and other roof
penetrations so that they do not create visual
clutter.

Source:Kevin Scott, Design by Mithun
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 128
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-29
Building Design
TOP
TOP
MIDDLE
MIDDLE
BASE
BASE
Design buildings with attractive, timeless, and sophisticated architecture that is contemporary and corresponds 04 to the existing neighborhood.

4.12 Facade Articulation

PURPOSE
The design and articulation of building facades
adds to the visual richness of developments and
creates patterns and scale within neighborhoods.

Elements such as bay windows, balconies, changes
in plane and height, and differentiation of materials
and colors facilitate facade articulation and mitigate
the monolithic appearance of large walls and
uninterrupted rooflines. New buildings should be
designed such that all of its facades are coordinated
and create a cohesive architectural idea.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.12.1 Applicability
Where a building is designed to appear as
separate buildings, each portion that appears
as a separate building shall be separately
subject to the following standards.

S.4.12.2 Articulation
a. Articulate new building facades for at least
70 percent of the building facade fronting
a main street or public open space and 50
percent of the building facade fronting a
side street.
b. Buildings over three stories tall shall be
articulated with a base, middle and top to
comply with standards S.4.12.3 to S.4.12.5.

Fig. 4.12.1:  Distinct examples of facades articulated as base, middle, and top.

S.4.12.3 Base
The base of new buildings and street-facing
additions shall be articulated using at least
two of the following (see Fig. 4.12.1):
a. Columns that are a maximum of 30 feet on
center and project from the street-facing
building facade by at least six inches.
b. Bays that are at least five feet wide and
project from the street-facing building
facade by at least two feet and not more
than five feet (see Fig. 4.12.2).
c. Windows that meet the standards
mentioned in 4.18 Windows.
d. Stoops that meet standards in Table 4.13.4:

Standard dimensions for entrance stoops
located at a maximum distance of 40 feet
from each other.
e. Porches that are a minimum of six feet wide
and six feet deep, located at a maximum
distance of 40 feet apart.
f. A different facade cladding material for
a minimum of 20 percent of the building
facade area with no area of difference less
than three feet by 10 feet.
g. Plane changes of at least two feet (see
Fig. 4.12.2). Exception. To allow for facade
elements such as trims, cornices, screens,
up to 10 percent of the length of the plane
changes can be less than two feet but shall
not be less than six inches.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 129
4-30
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 h. Repeating pattern of awnings, sunshades or
screens that meet the standards mentioned
in 4.17 Awnings, Sunshades, and Screens.

S.4.12.4 Middle Articulation
The middle of new buildings and street-facing
additions shall be articulated using at least two
of the following (see Fig. 4.12.1):
a. Columns that are a maximum of 30 feet on
center and project from the street-facing
building facade by at least six inches.
b. Bays that are at least five feet wide and
project from the street-facing building facade
by at least two feet and not more than five
feet (see Fig. 4.12.2).
c. Material changes that are a minimum of 20
percent of the building facade area with no
change less than three feet by 10 feet.
d. Plane changes that of at least two feet.

Exception. To allow for facade elements such
as trims, cornices, screens, up to 10 percent
of the length of the plane changes can be
less than two feet but shall not be less than
six inches (see Fig. 4.12.2).
e. Repeating pattern of awnings, sunshades or
screens that meet the standards mentioned
in 4.17 Awnings, Sunshades, and Screens.
f. Repeating pattern of windows that meet the
standards mentioned in 4.18 Windows.
g. Repeating pattern of balconies that meet
standards mentioned in 4.16 Balconies and
Decks. Fig. 4.12.2: Examples of building facade articulation.

At least
2’ deep
At least
5’ wide
Window
patterns
Articulations for at
least 70% of each
street-facing facade
At least 1-story tall
material changes
2’ plane
change
Rhythmic pattern
of plane changes
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 130
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-31
Building Design
Vertical breaks
every 30’
Change in
roof line by
variation
in parapet
heights
Stoops
Minimum 2’ deep
window bays
04 S.4.12.5 Top Articulation
Articulate the top of new buildings and streetfacing additions using at least one of the following (see Fig. 4.12.1):
a. Material changes that are a minimum of 20
percent of the building facade area with no
change less than three feet by 10 feet.
b. Plane changes of at least two feet.

Exception. To allow for facade elements
such as trims, cornices, screens, up to 10
percent of the length of the plane changes
can be less than two feet but shall not be
less than six inches.
c. Changes in roof forms and parapet heights
that meets the standards mentioned in 4.11
Roof Form and Design.

S.4.12.6 Vertical Articulation
Incorporate at least one of the following for
building facades up to 50 feet in length along
a public right-of-way (see Fig. 4.12.3):
a. Window bays a minimum of two feet in
depth from building facade at a maximum
of 30 horizontal feet.
b. Recesses a minimum of two feet in depth
from building facade at a maximum of 30
horizontal feet.
c. Stoops, porches or decks over a minimum
of 25 percent of the building facade.

S.4.12.7 Vertical Articulation
When a building facade exceeds 50 feet in
length along a public right-of-way, it shall
be separated into facade bays no greater
than 30 feet in width defined by a recess of
minimum of five feet in width and maximum
of five feet in depth and at least one of the
following strategies (see Fig. 4.12.3):
a. Change in roof parapet height or shape of
at least six feet.
b. Change in roof form and type (e.g., flat
pitch roof to gable).
c. Change in building height with a minimum
eight-foot difference.
d. Columns that are a maximum of 30 feet
on center and project from the street-face
building facade by at least 6 inches.
e. Bays that are at least five feet wide and
project from the street-fronting building
facade by at least two feet and not more
than five feet.
f. Rhythmic pattern of balconies that meet
standards mentioned in 4.16 Balconies and
Decks.
g. Rhythmic pattern of awnings, sunshades,
or screens 4.17 Awnings, Sunshades, and
Screens.
h. Rhythmic grouping or spacing of windows
that meet the standards mentioned in 4.18
Windows.
i. Change in material that is a minimum of
four feet wide and one story tall. Fig. 4.12.3: Example of vertical facade articulation.

S.4.12.8 Ornamental Features
Buildings must exhibit at least two of the
following ornamental features, over 15
percent or more of each facade:
a. Patterned accent material applied
consistently across all street-facing
building facades.
b. A pattern of carved insets with grilles on all
street-facing building facades.
c. A pattern of stucco or tile motifs or vents
on all street-facing building facades.
d. Terra-cotta tile chimney top (enclosing
equipment or not).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 131
4-32
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Fig. 4.12.4: Skirt wall height for street facing building facades on hillsides.

S.4.12.9 Structural Elements
Locate visible structural elements along the
building exterior (e.g. rafters, purlins, posts,
beams, balconies, brackets, trusses, columns,
arches, etc.), even when ornamental, to frame
building apertures and bays.

S.4.12.10Townhouse/Rowhouses
Not more than six units per building/row shall
be provided for townhouses. They shall be
configured in one of the following ways:
a. In a row facing the front parcel line or
street or shared driveway
b. In a row or series of rows perpendicular
to the front parcel line or street or shared
driveway along a landscaped central open
space that is at least 30 feet wide between
buildings. This central open space shall
connect each individual unit to the street/
public right-of way. Building projections can
encroach within the open space if a clear
eight-foot-wide and 10-foot-tall pathway is
maintained for pedestrian movement.

S.4.12.11 Townhouse/Rowhouse Facade Articulation
In townhouse and rowhouse development
types, the street-facing building facade
(front for dwelling units oriented parallel
to the street and side for those oriented
perpendicular to the street) shall be
articulated using at least one of the following
strategies to avoid monotony in design:
a. Facades of adjacent attached units
staggered or offset a minimum of 12 inches.
b. A minimum of two feet of change in
building facade plane at a maximum of 40
horizontal feet.
c. Change in building material, color, or finish
at a maximum of 40 horizontal feet.

S.4.12.12Skirt Wall Height on Hillside
Limit skirt wall height for street-facing building
facades on hillsides as follows:
a. On slopes parallel to the street with 20
to 60 percent, skirt wall heights shall not
exceed two feet per 10 percent of slope,
with a maximum skirt wall height of four
feet for a 20 percent slope and 12 feet for a
60 percent slope (see Fig. 4.12.4).
b. Exception. This standard shall not be
required for buildings on lots with slope
greater than 60 percent.

S.4.12.13Skirt Wall Design
De-emphasize skirt wall bulk along streetfacing building facades by using at least one of the following design methods
(see Fig. 4.12.5):
a. Incorporating horizontal molding or a cap
at the top of the skirt wall.
b. A different material at the skirt wall than
used in the primary building volume.
c. Integrating terraces at the skirt wall that
horizontally expand beyond the building
perimeter.
d. Recessing the skirt wall from the face of the
upper floors and planting that will screen
the skirt walls at maturity.

Slope of street = 20% to 60%
Height of skirt wall
Max 4’ for 20% slope
Max 12’ for 60% slope
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 132
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-33
Building Design
04 GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.12.1 360 Degree Design
New buildings should be designed such that
all sides of a building are coordinated and
create a cohesive architectural idea.

G.4.12.2 Ornamentation
The ornamentation and design details within
new construction should be consistent with
and help define the architectural style of the
building.

G.4.12.3 Ornamentation for Remodels and Additions
The ornamentation and the design details of
additions and remodels should be consistent
with those of the existing structure.

G.4.12.4 Foundations for Additions
The appearance of the foundation of an
addition along street-facing building facade
and facades within five feet of adjacent
parcels should match the appearance of the
foundation of an existing structure, so that it
appears that the two are continuous.

Fig. 4.12.5: Examples of design strategies that can be utilized to de-emphasize skirt wall bulk.

Recessed skirt wall
Horizontal cap or molding Change in materials
Integrating terraces
Screening with planting
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 133
4-34
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Well-designed and easily accessible building entrances perform a key role in the overall design and character of neighborhoods.

4.13 Building Access and Entrance Design

PURPOSE
Frequent entrances to small groups of units and
generous lobbies to multifamily and commercial
buildings, visible from the street, help to animate
neighborhoods and make them safe and walkable.

Building entrances include doorways and elements
such as stoops stairways, landings, and porches. They
add visual character to the building and streetscape.

They are critical for creating welcoming connections
between private and public spaces. When a
development has entrances for residential units at the
ground level, they are generally accessed from:
■ Shared landscaped forecourt
■ Terrace
■ Dooryard
■ Stoops

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.13.1 Primary Building Entrance
For new developments that have frontage
along one public right-of-way, the primary
building entrance shall meet at least one of
the following requirements:
a. Face the street.
b. Be accessed through a porch that faces
the street and is connected to the street
with an unobstructed pedestrian pathway
that has vertical clearance of at least one
floor.
c. Be accessed through a street-facing
forecourt. All or part of a forecourt can be
located within a setback required by the
underlying Zoning district (see Fig. 4.13.2).
d. If a development has multiple street-facing
ground floor units, each of those units
shall have a unit entrance door that faces
the street. Exception: A unit entrance door
may be oriented towards the side if it is
accessed through a stoop or porch that
faces the public right-of-way. The porch
may be recessed or projected but it shall
have a minimum of five feet wide and five
feet long space in front of the entrance
door.

S.4.13.2 Commercial Ground Floor Entrances in
Mixed-use Developments
Entrances are limited to a minimum two per
facade facing and abutting the public rightof-way or one for every 20 housing units per facade facing the public right-of-way,
whichever is greater, in Zone D.

S.4.13.3 Forecourt
When shared landscaped forecourts are
provided, design them to:
a. Provide a minimum five-foot-wide view and
non-combustible access path of travel from
abutting public rights-of-way.
b. Be enclosed on at least three sides by
buildings or landscape walls.
c. Remain open to the sky (arbors and
trellises are allowed).
d. Have dimensions as indicated in Table

4.13.1: Standard dimensions for forecourts.

S.4.13.4 Terrace
Shared or individual terrace (forecourt
above or below sidewalk level) frontage
with dimensions as indicated in Table 4.13.2:

Dimension standards for terraces.

Fig. 4.13.1: Example of primary building entrance and ground floor residential unit entrances.

Fig. 4.13.2: Example of a forecourt partially located in the setback required by the underlying Zoning District.

Setback
Forecourt
Building
Entrance
Sidewalk
Street-facing
property line
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 134
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-35
Building Design
04 Table 4.13.2: Dimension standards for terraces
Table 4.13.3: Dimension standards for entrance dooryards

TERRACE DIMENSIONS

REQUIREMENT
Terrace Depth Minimum 8’
Terrace Width Minimum 8’; Maximum 120’
Distance of terrace between
stairs
Maximum 50’
Terrace level above sidewalk Minimum 18”; Maximum 5’ (Maximum 42” when at street-or-public open space-facing
ground floor residential lobbies or individual
dwelling units)

DOORYARD STANDARDS

REQUIREMENT
Dooryard Depth Minimum 5’; Maximum 8’
Dooryard Width Minimum 6’
Overhead projection depth Maximum 6’
Clear height Minimum 8’
Wall/planter/fence height Maximum 3’
*Allowed for residential uses in mixed-use developments in Zone D Fig. 4.13.3: Forecourt dimensions
Fig. 4.13.4: Terrace dimensions
Fig. 4.13.5: Dooryard dimensions















Street
Street
Street
Street
Street
Street
Depth:

Min 15’
Width: Max 120’
Width:

Min 15’
Depth:

Min 15’
Depth: Min 15’
Depth: Min 8’
Max 3’
Max 5’
Overhead
Projection
Depth:

Max 6’
Width:

Min 6’
Depth:

Min 5’; Max 8’ Depth:

Min 5’; Max 8’
Wall/Planter/Fence
Height: Max 3’

SECTION

SECTION

SECTION
PLAN
PLAN
PLAN
Clear
Height:

Min 8’

FORECOURT DIMENSIONS

REQUIREMENT
Forecourt Depth Minimum 15’
Forecourt Width Minimum 15’
Ratio of forecourt width-tolowest building heightMaximum 2:1 Building entrance above the
level of forecourt
Maximum 3’
Table 4.13.1: Standard dimensions for forecourts
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 135
4-36
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 




S.4.13.5 Dooryards at Ground Floor Units
Entrances for individual ground floor units with
covered dooryard frontages with dimensions
as indicated in Table 4.13.3: Dimension
standards for entrance dooryards.

S.4.13.6 Ground floor unit entrances
Provide entrances from the street for a
minimum of 75 percent of the ground floor
residential units. Design residential entrances
to meet the following standards:
a. Location. Locate any shared or individual
entrances to residential units at least eight
horizontal feet from any entrances to nonresidential uses in the same development.

The maximum distance between individual
ground floor residential unit entrances shall
be an average of 25-to-35 feet and no more
than 50 feet.
b. Unit Identification. For a street-fronting unit
with entrance only from the street, locate
unit identification either on the door or the
adjacent wall.
c. Grouping of entrances. A maximum of two
units may share an entrance.
d. Roof projections. Provide a roofed
projection or recess with a minimum depth
of four feet from the building facade and a
minimum horizontal area of 40 square feet
for shared unit entrances (see Fig. 4.13.6).

Table 4.13.4: Standard dimensions for entrance stoops

STOOP DIMENSIONS

REQUIREMENT
Clear height Minimum 8’ (measured from the top
of landing in front of the door to the
underside of the ceiling or projecting
element defining the entryway)
Height above sidewalk Minimum 18”; Maximum 5’ (up to 25% of stoops along any frontage can
deviate from these requirements to
account for sloping site conditions
Width Minimum 5’; Maximum 8’
Depth Minimum 5’; Maximum 8’
Entry recession from
building facade
Minimum 6’; Maximum 8’
Clear projection height Minimum 8’
Distance from sidewalk Maximum 5’ (does not apply to
additions and remodels)
*Allowed for residential uses in mixed-use developments in Zone D Fig. 4.13.6: Building facade with recessed residential unit entrances along the street.

Fig. 4.13.7: Stoop dimensions





Street
Street
Clear
Height:

Min 8’
Width:

Min 5’; Max 8’
Depth:

Min 5’; Max 8’
Entry recession:

Min 6”; Max 8’
Min 18”

SECTION PLAN
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 136
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-37
Building Design
04 Fig. 4.13.9: Examples of stoops running perpendicular to the building facade.

Source:Bruce Damonte
S.4.13.7 Stoops
Individual and shared residential stoops shall
meet the following requirements:
a. Standards indicated in Table 4.13.4:

Standard dimensions for entrance stoops.
b. Maintain a minimum of 60 percent
transparency for street-facing railings or
low walls along stoops oriented parallel to
the street (partially or entirely)
(see Fig. 4.13.8).

S.4.13.8 Upper Floor Entrances
Exterior stairs to entrances to upper floor units
above the second floor are not permitted.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.13.1 Multiple entrances
Mixed-use buildings with multiple ground
floor commercial tenants should be designed
to emphasize an overall sense of project
and place, rather than the prominence of the
individual tenants.

G.4.13.2 Doors
Doors for new structures and additions,
as well as new or replacement doors for
existing structures, should be consistent with
the architectural style of the building, while
maintaining security.

Fig. 4.13.8: Example of stoops running parallel to the building facade with a door facing the street.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 137
4-38
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
At least 3-foot-wide frontage zone
Required setback Sidewalk
Finished ground floor elevation
within 5’ of sidewalk elevation
Building Signage
Primary building entrance with
awning/sunshade
Active uses such as common
spaces facing the street
04 Design ground floor residential frontages to directly connect with the public realm, create eyes-on-the-street, and add visual interest to public spaces while still maintaining tenant privacy.

4.14 Ground Floor Treatment–Residential

PURPOSE
Visually connected ground floor uses in residential
developments allows internal uses to engage with
the public realm and create a safe environment for
pedestrians.

Placing shared spaces and amenities such as fitness
centers, common spaces, and management offices
along main street frontages helps create connections
between the building and the streets. Sidewalkaccessible entry stoops for ground floor residential units support safe, active, and comfortable pedestrian
environments.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.14.1 Ground floor height
The minimum ground floor to ceiling height
for buildings containing street-fronting ground
floor residential uses shall be no less than 12
feet.

S.4.14.2 Finished Ground Floor Elevation
a. The ground level finish floor elevation
shall be within five vertical feet above the
sidewalk elevation.
b. For sites sloping down away from the
street, the ground level finish floor
elevation may be up to 30 inches below
the sidewalk elevation (see Fig. 4.14.2).
c. For sites sloping along the street, up to
50 percent of the ground floor level is
allowed to be above five vertical feet but
not more than 12 vertical feet above the
closest sidewalk along that property line.

Exception: A dwelling unit can be elevated
higher if required due to a 100-year
designated flood zone or other safety or
engineering requirements.
d. If accessible residential units on the ground
floor are not at the same level as the
sidewalk elevation, provide at least one of
the following:
■ A ramp from the ground level to the
finished ground floor elevation,
■ A secondary unit entrance from an
interior corridor or courtyard that is at the
same level as the finished ground floor
elevation.

Fig. 4.14.1: Residential entrances and active uses such as gyms and community spaces located along street frontages. Fig. 4.14.2: Residential entrance less than 30” below sidewalk.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 138
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-39
Building Design
Area of glazing
Total area of building facade, including area of glazing 04 S.4.14.6 Head Height of Ground Floor Glazing
Align the head height for all ground floor
glazing along the same building facade. This
standard does not apply to the following:
a. Active uses along ground floor facade are
allowed to have floor-to-ceiling glazing
which does not match the rest of the
ground floor glazing.
b. Sizes and head or sill heights of glazing in
the stair towers do not need to align with
the rest of the glazing along the facade.

Fig. 4.14.3: Active frontage and transparency along ground floor residential facades.

Fig. 4.14.4: Example of ground floor active residential frontage with community spaces along the street.

Min 6’
A B
C
A+B shall be at least
■ 60% of C along main street
■ 40% of C along side street
S.4.14.3 Active Uses
Provide active residential uses such as
lobbies, management offices, fitness rooms
and common spaces such that they occupy:
a. A minimum of 25 feet along the ground
floor street frontage for sites up to 100 feet
wide.
b. A minimum of 25 percent of the ground
floor street frontage for sites over 100 feet
wide.
c. Exception: This standard does not apply
if any of these uses are provided as a
standalone building.

S.4.14.4 Residential Active Frontage and
Transparency
For all residential active frontages, provide at
least six-foot-tall transparent windows or clear
glazing that cover a minimum of 60 percent of
the active frontage length along main streets
and 40 percent along side streets. When
provided, glazing area in glass doors shall be
counted towards the total glazing area. This
standard does not apply to building facades
with street-facing ground floor residential
units (see Fig. 4.14.3).

S.4.14.5 Frontage Zone
Include a minimum three-foot-wide frontage
zone at building entrances for residential
and mixed-use developments. This transition
space is useful for any doors opening out
to the sidewalk and for providing stoops for
raised residential units (see Fig. 4.14.1). Stoops
are allowed to encroach in the frontage zone.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.14.1 Pedestrian Safety
Support pedestrian safety by locating
residential stoops and community spaces
such as gyms, management offices, and
indoor recreation areas, along street and
public open spaces to enliven street life and
create eyes-on-the-street (see Fig. 4.14.4).

G.4.14.2 Security Gates
Residential security gates, when installed,
should be compatible with the building
style, be as visually open as possible and be
pedestrian friendly.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 139
4-40
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Support interesting and safe public spaces with active commercial frontages.

4.15 Ground Floor Treatment–Commercial

PURPOSE
Well-designed ground floor commercial spaces enliven
the street and pedestrian experience. Transparency,
appropriate sizing and outdoor uses contribute to the
success of these spaces. To maintain active frontage
throughout the lifespan of buildings, the pedestrian
level should provide a high level of flexibility to
accommodate not only present but future needs for
high quality commercial or other active use.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.15.1 Shopfronts
a. All ground floor commercial tenant spaces
shall be at least 45 feet deep for a minimum
of 50 percent of main street building
facades or a minimum of 30 feet, whichever
is greater, and at least 25 feet deep for
a minimum of 50 percent of side street
facades. This standard does not apply to
curved lots with less than 75 feet depth.
b. Shopfront finish floor level shall be a
maximum 30 inches above sidewalk (see
Fig. 4.15.1).
c. Shopfront bay shall be a minimum six feet
and maximum of 20 feet wide (see Fig. 4.15.1).
d. Covered shopfront projections when
provided shall have dimensions in Table

4.15.1: Standard dimensions for covered
projections shopfronts.

S.4.15.2 Shopfront Design
On buildings on lots with street frontages that
exceed 50 feet, shopfront frontages must
incorporate:
a. Building recesses that are a minimum 12
inches and maximum four feet deep (see
Fig. 4.15.1).
b. Bulkheads, awnings, materials and/or color
change to articulate the shopfront into bays
a maximum of 20 continuous feet wide
(see Fig. 4.15.1).

S.4.15.3 Ceiling Height
The ground floor ceiling height must be a
a minimum 12 inches taller than upper floor
levels’ floor-to-ceiling height.

Table 4.15.1: Standard dimensions for covered projections shopfronts

SHOPFRONT COVERED PROJECTION

DIMENSIONS

REQUIREMENT
Depth Minimum 4’
Height Minimum 8’; Maximum 10’
Distance from curb Minimum 2’

Fig. 4.15.1: Dimensions for shopfront design. Fig. 4.15.1: Examples of ground floor commercial frontage with transparent facades and outdoor seating for
dining.

H1
H1 = H2 + Min 12”
H2
Min 8’
Max 10’
Min 6’
Max 20’
Max 30”
Min 4’
Min 4’
Min 12”
Max 4’
Min 2’
Min 2’

SECTION PLAN
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 140
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-41
Building Design
Min 10’
Max 3’

SHOPFRONT

TRANSPARENCY
 
 
04 S.4.15.4 Transparency
a. Create transparent facades with windows
or clear glazing for at least 70 percent
of the active frontage length along main
streets or public open space and 50
percent of the active frontage length along
side streets (see Fig. 4.15.2).
b. Glazing at the ground floor facade shall be
clear between three and 10 feet in height
(see Fig. 4.15.3).
c. Provide a transparent facade at building
corners extending at least 20 feet from
the corner in both directions. If a corner
facade is fronting a main street or public
open space on one side and a side street
on the other, refer to S.4.15.4a for the total
transparent facade length requirements for
each building facade.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.15.1 Location
In mixed-use buildings with ground floor
residential and commercial uses, locate the
commercial spaces towards the street, at
street intersections, or where a public open
space or paseo intersects with the sidewalk.

G.4.15.2 Setback
Provide a setback for commercial uses on the
ground floor along main streets to allow for
transitions, frontage zone for outdoor seating,
and future sidewalk widening.

Fig. 4.15.2: Building facades for ground floor commercial uses with clear glazing.

Fig. 4.15.3: Example of transparent ground floor commercial uses.

A + B shall be at least:
■ 70% of C, for main streets
■ 50% C for side streets (when
building is located at a
street intersection
A B
C
10’ from
sidewalk
3’
Source: David Baker Architects, Photo: Bruce Damonte
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 141
4-42
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design



PROJECTING

BALCONIES

RECESSED

BALCONIES
JULIET

BALCONIES
Min 3’ or 5’ deep
(depending on
number of stories)
Balcony oriented
towards the front

PLAN VIEW
Min 5'
wide
Min 5'
wide Min 3' wide
Min 6" deep
recess/
projection
Min 12”
deep recess
Min 5’
Max 10’
Min 12”
04 Balconies and decks enhance enjoyment of the outdoors, and can add detail and visual interest to buildings.

4.16 Balconies and Decks

PURPOSE
Deck – Decks are ground-level or slightly raised
platforms that are typically attached to a home’s
entrance or door. Typically designed as open
spaces that may or may not have railings, decks are
accessible from the yard or public street and provide
an intermediary living space between the residence
and streets or public open spaces.

Balcony – Balconies are exterior floor systems
projecting from a structure and supported by that
structure, with no additional independent support.

They have private entrances from a bedroom or living
space and are generally smaller than decks in size,
enclosed with a railing, and may feature a roof or be
stacked.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.16.1 Placement
Primary living spaces located along a side
setback shall orient balconies and decks
towards the front and rear of the building.

S.4.16.2 Recesses at Projecting Occupied Balconies
Recess projecting occupied balconies into the
building facade by a minimum of 12 inches to
avoid a tacked-on look (see Fig. 4.16.1).

S.4.16.3 Balconies at Building Corners
When balconies are provided at building
corners at least one side of the balcony shall
be a minimum of five feet wide.

Fig. 4.16.1: Examples of private balconies designed to look integrated into the building facade.

Fig. 4.16.2: Minimum 5’ wide occupied balconies with a
maximum projection of 10’ when facing the street.

Fig. 4.16.3: Balcony orientation for primary living spaces along a side setback.

Living Room
Street
Side Setback
Neighboring
development
Bedroom
Kitchen
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 142
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-43
Building Design
04 Table 4.16.1: Standard dimensions for balconies

BALCONY DIMENSIONS

REQUIREMENT
Occupied (recessed and projected)
Balcony Width
Minimum 5’
Occupied (recessed and projected)
Balcony Depth
Minimum 3’ for buildings up
to 3 stories; Minimum 5’ for
buildings over 3 stories
Juliet or Unoccupied Balcony Width Minimum 3’
Juliet or Unoccupied Balcony Depth Minimum 6”
S.4.16.4 Dimensions
Occupied and unoccupied balconies shall
comply with the dimensions in Table 4.16.1:

Standard dimensions for balconies.

S.4.16.5 Exterior Projecting Balconies
When balconies project out of a building
facade along the public right-of-way, they
shall not extend more than 10 feet from
building facades (see Fig. 4.16.2). Projecting
balconies shall not exceed the allowed
encroachment in the public right-of-way as
mentioned in the California Building Code.

S.4.16.6 Balcony projections
When decks and balconies project into public
rights-of-way, they shall meet the both the
following standards:
a. Maintain a minimum vertical clearance of
15 feet between the finished floor of the
public space and the finished bottom of the
balcony based on ground floor use.
b. Do not extend in the public rights-of-way
for more than four feet depth.

S.4.16.7 Transparency
When private balconies are provided along
street-facing building facades, they shall have
a transparency of no less than 25 percent.

S.4.16.8 Developments abutting Zone A
Balconies, decks, and other habitable outdoor
spaces are not allowed on any upper-story
facades on facing and abutting lots in Zone A.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.16.1 Building articulation
Integrate balconies, decks and porches into
the building form so they do not appear
tacked on.

G.4.16.2 Mitigation of visual impact
Avoid decks and porches along downslopes
with overpowering visual impact by using at
least one of the following strategies:
a. Divide single deck into two or more
terraced levels
b. Use the roof of lower levels as the surface
for a deck or porch serving the upper
floors.
c. Higher attention to the level of detailing
and materials of the deck or porch
d. Painting the support structure in a color
that blends in with the building
e. Enclose the area under the deck to visually
integrate it with the building
f. Planting
G.4.16.3 Balcony projections as entry cover
When located above building entrances,
design balconies to provide coverage or act
as a projection for the building entrance.

Fig. 4.16.4: Balconies providing coverage for building
entrance.

Fig. 4.16.5: Examples of projecting and recessed balconies.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 143
4-44
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design

WINDOW ELEVATION WINDOW SECTION
Area of window = X' x Z'
X'
Y'
Y'
Z'
Area of shade on window greater than
or equal to 30% area of window
Total area of shade
45o
45o
Min. 8’
04 Reduce heat gain and provide visual interest to buildings with awnings, sunshades, and screens.

4.17 Awnings, Sunshades, and Screens

PURPOSE
Awnings, sunshades, and screens are important
for facade articulation and weather protection.

Combinations of materials and screens create
interesting shadow patterns and can provide a sense
of verticality or horizontality. Awnings at ground floor level add human scale to the pedestrian level and
visually separate the base from the middle of the
building.

Awnings and sunshades reduce solar heat gain and
glare in buildings and can reduce the amount of
energy required to keep interior spaces cool and
comfortable.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.17.1 Shading Devices
When sunshades, awnings, recessed
windows, screens, or any other shading
devices are provided on South and West
building facades, they shall provide shade on
at least 30 percent of each exposed exterior
window surface on those building facades
(see Fig. 4.17.1):
a. Calculate the amount of shading on each
window using a 45-degree angle with the
base equal to the depth of the sunshade
for both horizontal and vertical shading.
b. Use horizontal or vertical shading
devices or a combination of both for this
calculation.

S.4.17.2 Ground Floor Awnings and Sunshades
a. Awnings and sunshades provided at the
ground level shall maintain a vertical
clearance of at least eight feet from the
sidewalk (see Fig. 4.17.2).
b. When transom windows are provided,
awnings, canopies, and similar weather
protection elements shall be installed
between the transom windows and display
windows to allow for light to enter the
storefront through the transom windows
(see Fig. 4.17.2).
c. Awnings shall not extend across more
than one set of windows, or over columns
or structural piers/pilasters. Individual
segments shall be installed over each
storefront entry or set of storefront windows
to reflect the major vertical divisions of the
building facade (see Fig. 4.17.2).

S.4.17.3 Awning Illuminations
Awnings and canopies shall not be internally
illuminated.

S.4.17.4 Prohibited Materials
Canvas and vinyl awnings are prohibited for
residential entrances.

Fig. 4.17.1: Calculation of the amount of shade on a window. Fig. 4.17.2: Awnings at ground floor that do not extend across more than 1 set of windows or over columns and
have a minimum vertical clearance of 8’.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 144
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-45
Building Design
Contextual, climate-responsive windows create an interesting and sustainable cityscape. 04

4.18 Windows

PURPOSE
Buildings with no or few windows do not engage with
the street and are often over-reliant on mechanical
systems and are unsustainable. Sealed off spaces can
be less healthy due to poor air quality. Windows that
respond to context, climate and orientation will create a cityscape that is interesting and sustainable.

Individual in-window and through-wall air conditioning
units are undesirable as they become dirty with lack of external maintenance. Replacement with mismatched
units creates a haphazard appearance.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.18.1 Privacy
Windows to primary living spaces with sill
height eight feet above grade and within 10
feet of or facing a shared property line or
abutting a facing window within 15 feet on-site
shall:
a. Be angled away from the adjacent side
setback line a minimum of 30 degrees,
measured from a line perpendicular to the
side setback line (see Fig. 4.18.2), or
b. Have a minimum sill height of 42 inches
from the finished floor and a maximum of 44
inches above the finished floor for a coderequired egress window (see Fig. 4.18.2), or c. Use permanently translucent or frosted
glazing (see Fig. 4.18.3).
d. Exception: If existing building side facing
new construction does not have a window,
this standard does not apply.

S.4.18.2 Openable windows
When openable windows are provided at a
ground floor facade with zero front setback,
they shall either open inwards or be recessed
at least three feet so that they do not interfere
with the pedestrian movement on the
sidewalk.

S.4.18.3 Window alignment at Shared Property Lines
Do not directly align windows on a building
facade parallel to and within 20 feet of shared
property line with windows on the adjacent
property.

Fig. 4.18.1: Examples of windows by operation. Fig. 4.18.2: Window alignment at shared property lines.

Awning
Fixed
Double Hung
Casement
Double Hung with
divided lites
Casement with
divided lites
Sliding
Area within 10’ of
shared property line
Area within 10’ of
shared property line
Min 30-degree
angle
Min 42” sill height
from finished floor for
windows with sill height
above 8’ from grade
and within 10’ of shared
property line
Shared Property Line Shared Property Line
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 145
4-46
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
Window inset
minimum 2” from
building facade
No inset. Minimum
3” wide and 1” thick
window trim
04 S.4.18.4 Window Recess and Trim
a. For windows on street-facing building
walls, provide a recess of at least two
inches in depth from the building facade
(see Fig. 4.18.4).
b. When no inset is provided for a window,
provide a minimum of three inches wide
and one-inch-thick exterior window trim
(see Fig. 4.18.4).
c. Use the same color for all window frames
and trims along a building facade.
a. Foam is not permitted as a window trim
material.

S.4.18.5 Divided Lites
Simulated divided-lite grilles are acceptable
only if they are located on both the outside
and inside faces of the window, have spacer
bars between the double panes of glass, and
a thickness of at least 1/2 inch on each side of
the window.

S.4.18.6 Divided lites for Additions and Remodels
When simulated divided-lite grilles are
provided on new windows, they shall have
grilles located on both the outside and
inside faces of the window, have spacer
bars between the double panes of glass and
are three dimensional, with profiles that are
similar to the design of the original windows.

S.4.18.7 Window Proportions for Additions and
Remodels
A minimum of 50 percent of the streetfronting windows for additions and remodels shall have the same proportions (ratio of
height to width) as more than 50 percent of
the street-fronting windows on the reference
building(s).

S.4.18.8 Individual air conditioning units
Do not place Individual through-window or
through-wall air conditioning units on streetfacing building facades over three stories tall.

S.4.18.9 Glazing
Reflective or opaque tinting of glazing is not
permitted.

Fig. 4.18.3: Example of a window with frosted glazing. Fig. 4.18.5: Different sizes for primary and secondary windows.

Fig. 4.18.4: Example of window recess and trims that help create a shadow detail that adds to the richness
of the building facade.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 146
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-47
Building Design
04 GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.18.1 “360-Degree” Design
All primary windows on each floor of each
facade should be the same design, proportions,
trim, material, and color.

G.4.18.2 Window Hierarchy
Maintain window hierarchy of primary and
secondary windows by providing greater level
of detail for the former such as divided lites,
increased size, and arches. In all cases, there
should be consistency in window proportions,
operation, trim, and appearance (see Fig. 4.18.6).

G.4.18.3 Window Sizes
Limit the number of different window sizes
and types, to maintain an overall rhythm of the
building design and preventing the placement
of windows from appearing arbitrary.

G.4.18.4 Window replacements
Where non-original windows are replaced on
a building with a mix of existing window styles,
the replacement window should more closely
replicate or simulate the original windows.

Fig. 4.18.6: Residential windows on upper floors with
proportions different from ground floor retail
windows.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 147
4-48
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Quality, durable building materials help define a building’s character.

4.19 Building Materials, Colors, and Finish

PURPOSE
Quality materials on building facades convey longevity
and sustainability. Unique materials inspired by the
context create a sense of place and activity. The
composition of materials and colors grounds a building
in its surroundings.

S.4.19.3 Secondary Building Materials
A secondary building material shall mean a
material that covers 40 percent or less of a
facade surface area excluding transparent
surfaces. The following secondary cladding
materials are allowed:
a. Metal (wrought iron, copper, bronze) with a
non-reflective finish
b. Split-face Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU)
c. Terra-cotta tile
d. Brick or brick veneer
e. Glazed tile
f. Wood siding
g. Stone Veneer
S.4.19.4 Variation in Materials
Do not continue unbroken multi-story sections
of the same material, texture, or color for
more than 150 feet in length of any building
facade.

S.4.19.5 Building Colors
A maximum of four colors shall be applied to
be the building facade:
a. Primary color comprising 60 percent or
more of the facade.
b. Secondary color comprising no more than
30 percent of the facade.
c. Tertiary color comprising no more than 10
percent of the facade.
d. Accent color for use on trim and
architectural details.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.19.1 Protection for exterior materials
a. All exterior materials shall meet
the Wildland-Urban Interface (WUI)
requirements per the California Fire Code.
b. Exterior wood cladding shall be protected
from decay by stain and sealant.
c. Exterior ferrous metals shall be protected
from corrosion either using galvanized,
stainless, or weathering steel.

S.4.19.2 Primary Building Materials
A primary building material shall mean a
material that covers 60 percent or more of a
facade surface area excluding transparent
surfaces. When there is a change in exterior
building material, the material change shall
occur at the inside corner of a building form,
or a minimum of eight feet beyond an outside
corner. The following primary cladding
materials are allowed:
a. Stucco (minimum 2-coat)
b. Stone (shall extend vertically to the
foundation)
c. Stone-colored brick (shall extend vertically
to the foundation)
d. Fiber cement siding or fire-retardant
treated wood siding
e. Non-reflective metal panels
Fig. 4.19.1: Example of material combinations for buildings taller than three stories with stucco as the primary,
wood panels as the secondary, and metal as the
tertiary material.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 148
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-49
Building Design
Material transition
Inside Corner
Outside Corner
Trim or cornice
Material change
Vertical plane changes
04 e. Wood, brick, stone, materials with prefinished color such as stucco, and colorized metal shall constitute a color for this
requirement.

S.4.19.6 Stucco
For buildings taller than three stories, the use
of stucco shall be limited to a maximum of
60 percent of non-glazed areas for a public
space facing building facade (see Fig. 4.19.2).
d. Concrete roof tiles.
e. Cool roof membrane roofing, nonreflective and medium gray color.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.19.1 Exterior wall materials
Muted tones are generally preferred with
stronger accent colors limited to trim. In most
cases, a range of complementary colors is
preferred over painting all wall surfaces with
the same paint color and shade.

G.4.19.2 Exterior Wall Material for additions and
renovations
The material used on the exterior walls of an
addition or remodeled portion of a structure
should be consistent with the original
material.

Fig. 4.19.2: Building facade with stucco, siding, and metal railings and sunshades.

Fig. 4.19.3: Create material transitions for continuous facades on inside corners of plane changes.

S.4.19.7 Color or material changes
a. When there is a change in exterior building
color or material, the material change shall
occur at the inside corner of a building form,
rather than the outside corner
(see Fig. 4.19.3).
b. If there is a material change in the same
plane or building facade, provide a minimum
of six inches depth change between
materials.

S.4.19.8 Railings at porches, balconies, decks, and
exterior stairs
Railings at porches, balconies, decks, and
exterior stairs shall be metal, stucco, or wood.

Metal cable railings are prohibited
(see Fig. 4.19.2).

S.4.19.9 Prohibited Materials
a. Concrete blocks and reflective metal siding
or panels are not allowed for building
facades.
b. Glass is not allowed as a building material
for over 40 percent of any building facade.

S.4.19.10 Roof Materials
All materials listed below are allowed for roofs:
a. Fire-rated composition shingle (Timberline
Lifetime Architectural), brown or brown-red
in color.
b. Spanish barrel tile, regularly or irregularly
laid, and brown or brown-red in color.
c. Standing seam metal in a non-reflective
dark brown or dark bronze color.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 149
4-50
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Mitigate long blank walls along main streets and public open spaces by using design strategies to create interesting facades.

4.20 Mitigation of Blank Walls

PURPOSE
Blank walls make places feel uninviting and sometimes
unsafe. Minimizing long stretches of unbroken facades
and non-active frontages, such as parking garages
and service and utility areas, creates an active and
safe public realm.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.20.1 Blank Wall Dimensions
a. Blank walls shall not exceed 30 horizontal
feet on any floor along any street-or-public
open space-facing building facade (see
Fig. 4.20.1).
b. Do not create a blank wall longer than 15
feet in the 50 feet closest to a building
corner along a street intersection or public
open space (see Fig. 4.20.1).

S.4.20.2Enhancement of Blank Walls
Mitigate blank walls at the ground floor that
continue for more than 15 feet along streets
or public open spaces by providing at least
one of the following design treatments on the
blank wall facade:
a. Architectural treatments such as reveals,
projections, setbacks, indentations,
lighting, awnings, trim or material changes
(see Fig. 4.20.2 and Fig. 4.20.3).
b. Interactive public art or a pattern of motifs
or insets in tile or stucco that is at least 100
square feet in area and occupies at least 10
linear feet of the wall.
c. Murals that are at least eight feet in any
dimension and cover at least 75 percent of
the blank wall area (see Fig. 4.20.2).
d. Landscaping that at maturity, obscures a
minimum 50 percent of the wall area, and
that is guaranteed for a period of 10 years
minimum.
e. Landscaped trellises or lattices over a
minimum 50 percent of the wall area that
is guaranteed for a period of 10 years
minimum (see Fig. 4.20.3).

Fig. 4.20.1: Blank wall dimensions



 

 

 

 
 


 





















 

Blank wall
A and B = Total width of blank wall
≥ 50’
15’ ≤ B ≤ 30’
STREET
STREET
A ≤ 15’
Active frontage
Fig. 4.20.2: Mural to mitigate a ground floor blank wall.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 150
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-51
Building Design
04 GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.20.1 Facade Treatment
a. Use different materials, textures, colors,
patterns, lighting, canopies, landscape
treatments, and public art to create visual
interest on blank and unbroken walls (see
Fig. 4.20.3).
b. Coordinate facade treatments of blank
walls at the pedestrian level with the
overall character, architecture, and building
materials (see Fig. 4.20.3).
c. Use facade treatment on portions of
buildings that house secure business
operations as an opportunity for public art,
architectural features, or articulated facade
elements.

Fig. 4.20.3: Examples of facade treatments for blank wall mitigation.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 151
4-52
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Balance efficient vehicle circulation with pedestrian safety and comfort, creating a well-organized, accessible, and walkable environment that supports seamless movement for all.

4.21 Parking Garage Design

PURPOSE
Lining parking structures with active frontages
and occupied spaces brings activity and life to
streets. Placing parking garages towards the rear of
developments helps to avoid disruptions to the public
realm.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.21.1 Garage Parking Configuration
Locate vehicular parking in one of the
following configurations:
a. Shared garages (underground or podium)
in Zone C and D,
b. Individual garages, or
c. Tuck-under or individually secured garages
on the ground level of a structure in Zone
C oriented to not face the street.

S.4.21.2 Parking Garage Location
Locate parking garages based on the
following priority:

1. Completely subgrade or partially subgrade
parking garage that meet the requirements
mentioned in S.4.21.10 Subgrade Parking
Garages.

2. Above ground lined with a minimum
25-foot-deep habitable residential spaces
or other active uses such as common
spaces, fitness centers, and commercial
uses for at least 50 percent of the streetfacing building with less than 100 feet of site frontage and 65 percent for sites
longer than 100 feet.

S.4.21.3 Parking Garages on Hillsides
When provided, locate garages and
driveways at the lowest end of a sloping
street frontage (see Fig. 4.21.2).

S.4.21.4 Controlled Entrance Location
Locate controlled entrances to shared
parking facilities (gates, doors, etc.) a
minimum 10 feet from the back of sidewalk.

S.4.21.5 Corner Parking Garage Entrance Location
Locate parking garage entrances on corner
lots shall be located at the maximum practical
distance from the corner and shall be based
on the following priority:

1. Alley (if available)

2. Side street (second option)

3. Main street (if no other option is available)
S.4.21.6 Garage Entrance Design
Design flare-out openings at garage
entrances with a minimum width of 26 feet
for two-way traffic and 20 feet for one-way
traffic to provide line-of-sight between
vehicles and pedestrians.

S.4.21.7 Garage Doors
a. All garage doors must be motorized.
b. Controlled entrances to shared parking
facilities (gates, doors etc) shall not exceed
20 feet in width.

Fig. 4.21.1: Examples of recessed parking garage entrances. Fig. 4.21.2: Garage entrance located at the lowest end of the sloping street frontage.

Sloping street frontage
Lowest
end of
the street
frontage
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 152
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-53
Building Design



  



































  
 
Max 4’
Min 5’ wide
planting buffer
04 S.4.21.8 Garage Door Setbacks
a. Recess garage doors for individual
dwelling units from the building facade by
at least six inches.
b. Set the garage doors for shared parking
garages that are located along a street
facing building facade back by a
minimum of two feet and not more than
five feet from the building facade (see
Fig. 4.21.1).
c. Exception. If a street facing building
facade with a shared garage door is set
back a minimum of two feet from the
adjacent building facade, the garage door
is only needed to recess for a minimum of
six inches.

S.4.21.9 Individual Garages
When provided, access individual garages
using one of the following:
a. A single driveway from the street or
a. From alleys or private streets.

S.4.21.10 Subgrade Parking Garages
Partially sub-grade podium garages along
streets and pedestrian walkways shall:
a. Not extend more than four feet above
grade (see Fig. 4.21.3).
b. Not have blank walls.
c. Screen mechanical equipment and air
exhaust windows from view.
d. Have openings and articulations that are
consistent with the rest of the building
facade.

S.4.21.11 Parking Visibility
When visible from the public right-of-way,
screen a minimum of 50 percent of the
visible structured parking using:
a. Regular punched openings designed to
resemble windows of habitable spaces, or
b. Trellis/living wall surfaces.

S.4.21.12 Parking Separation
a. Dedicate at least 80 percent of the
total parking spaces within a mixed-use
development for residential use.
b. Physically separate it from parking for
other uses via a controlled fence, gate, or
other barrier.
c. The remaining 20 percent may be
allocated for shared use or non-residential
purposes.

S.4.21.13 Garage Ventilation
Locate openings and exhaust vents on the
top of buildings or on second levels to direct
air away from the public realm and adjacent
structures.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.21.1 Parking Garage Design
a. Design parking structures using building
massing, articulation, window patterns,
and other facade treatments that are
consistent with neighboring buildings.
b. Conceal all ramped floors from the
public realm and surrounding buildings.

G.4.21.2 Stand-alone parking garages
For stand-alone parking garages, if
rooftops are not utilized for parking, provide
renewable energy, green stormwater
infrastructure, patios, landscaping, or other
green roof strategies.

G.4.21.3 Design for future
Design parking structures for possible future
conversion to a different use by incorporating
the following features:
a. Flat floors.
b. Clear heights of minimum nine feet from
floor to finished ceiling.
c. Structurally separate vehicle ramps that
are partially or fully removable.
d. Structural strength that is sufficient for
conversion to other uses.
e. Structural depth that is shallow enough
to allow necessary daylight access if
converted to another use, or a plan
to reduce the structural depth to the
necessary amount.

Fig. 4.21.3: Subgrade parking garage not extending more than 4’ above the ground.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 153
4-54
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Fig. 4.22.1: Fully-shielded lighting fixtures at the ground floor building facade with the same material as building accent. Fig. 4.22.2: Fully-shielded light fixtures prevent light pollution, glare, and waste.

Highlight buildings’ distinctive elements while ensuring visibility, safety, and creating a welcoming atmosphere for all.

4.22 Architectural Lighting

PURPOSE
Lighting can serve multiple essential functions in the
built environment including wayfinding, highlighting
entrances or key architectural elements, creating
a sense of identity, and enhancing the comfort
and safety of outdoor spaces. It is important to
balance these benefits while minimizing light spill
and avoiding disruption of nearby residents and
protecting the integrity of the night sky.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.22.1 Entrance Lighting
Provide light fixture(s) at all building
entrances.

S.4.22.2Facade Lighting
Use fully-shielded light fixtures that are
directed onto the building facade or onto
paving of entrance areas (see Fig. 4.22.2).

S.4.22.3Pedestrian-Scale Lighting
Provide pedestrian-scale lighting to illuminate
the ground floor building facades and an
adjacent four-foot-wide zone with lighting
fixtures that are placed:
a. Every 40 feet or less for all street-facing
building facades (see Fig. 4.22.1).
b. Every 30 feet or less for all building
facades facing public open spaces and
mid-block connections.
c. Every 20 feet or less for all ground floor
blank walls.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL
G.4.22.1 Low-level Lighting
Provide lighting with low-level illumination
to ensure entry paths, entry stairs and
driveways, garage and building entries are
illuminated while avoiding light pollution.

Up to 40’
Unshielded PartiallyshieldedFully-shielded
(directed
downwards)
Fully-shielded
(directed onto
building)
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 154
4 / Multifamily, Commercial (approved Ministerially), And Mixed-use Developments 4-55
Building Design














 

 

 

 

 

 

 
    






 











 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 
  




 



































  
 
Building design and materials should not cause negative impacts of development on birds. 04

4.23 Bird Safety

PURPOSE
It is vital to ensure that building design, facade
materials, and artificial night lighting do not confound birds and lead to their injury or death.

New developments and building renovations should
avoid adverse consequences that impact birds
by using bird-safe design techniques. Bird safety
treatments are important for all buildings, especially
for those near bird habitats, such as open spaces and
water.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.23.1 Bird Safety treatments
Apply bird safety treatments on:
a. Areas of glazing that are taller than one
story within 10 feet of a building corner.
b. Areas of any building facade with more
than 10 percent glazing that is within 15
vertical feet and 20 horizontal feet of a
green roof or a vegetated courtyard, within
or outside of the development.
c. Parallel panes of glass 30 feet or less apart,
such as skyways, walkways, and other
glass building connectors.
d. Transparent atria, free-standing glass
features, and glass architectural elements
that protrude from the primary building
mass.
e. Facades with more than 20 percent
glazing within 60 feet of grade and located
within 300 feet from a body of water,
including creeks and vegetated flood
control channels or within 100 feet of a
landscaped area, open space, or park
larger than one acre in size. Apply a bird
safety treatment to at least 90 percent of
the glazed areas within 60 feet of grade.

S.4.23.2Prohibited glazing
Do not use mirrored glass or glazing with a
reflective index above 20 percent.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.23.1 Glazing
Use bird safety treatment on windows
or other glazed areas in which trees,
landscaping, water features, or the sky will be
reflected or seen through the glass.

G.4.23.2 Exterior Lighting Timing
Turn off decorative exterior lighting between
11:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. except during June,
July, December, and January due to bird
migration.

G.4.23.3 Vegetation
Do not plant trees in a line perpendicular to
glass facades.

Fig. 4.23.1: Use a bird safety treatment on glazed facades that are visible from and within 15 vertical
feet and 20 horizontal feet of a green roof or
vegetated courtyard.

Fig. 4.23.2: Use a bird safety treatment for parallel glazed facades that are less than 30 feet apart.

Up to 15
vertical feet
Up to 20'
Up to 15
vertical feet
Glazed
facade area
Green roof
or vegetated
courtyard
Less than 30'
apart
Glazed facade area
Vegetated area
PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 155
4-56
Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines
Building Design
04 Design building signage to clearly communicate with occupants and visitors and complement site surroundings

4.24 Signage

PURPOSE
Signage helps animate and harmonize projects with
their environments.

Well-designed and placed signage conveys
information, imparts a human scale to buildings,
creates a unique and artistic character for
developments, and enhances the public realm.

OBJECTIVE STANDARDS
S.4.24.1 Orientation
Direct all building addresses and primary
building signage towards the street
frontage and visible from the street without
obstructions.

S.4.24.2 Signage Illumination
a. Illuminate signage through external
“spotlight” or integrated “halo” illumination.
b. Backlit signs are prohibited.
c. Lighted address signs are prohibited
unless their lighting levels can be adjusted.

S.4.24.3 Shape
When provided, exterior building signage
shall consist of individually formed lettering or
a projecting sign. Box signs are prohibited.

GUIDELINES (OPTIONAL)
G.4.24.1 Design
a. Develop signage plans early in the design
process so they are part of the overall
building architecture and are consistent
with the size and scale of building(s).
b. Design building signage to reflect the
character of business or interior use to
create a unique and individual identity.

This can be done by utilizing color and
material schemes similar to the proposed
development aesthetic.
c. Signage should be integrated into
landscaping or building architecture.
d. Attractive signage directories are
encouraged to help provide way
finding within residential and mixed-use
developments.

G.4.24.2 Lettering
Provide awning signs, wall signs, and
signs with individual lettering to identify
building addresses and names of residential,
commercial, and industrial buildings.

G.4.24.3 Retail Signage
Provide pedestrian level signage such as
blade or fin signs and wall signs for ground
floor retail in mixed-use developments to
match the character of the neighborhood.

Fig. 4.24.1: Examples of signage at residential and ground floor commercial frontages.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 156
5 / Definitions
5-1
DEFINITIONS 05

DEFINITIONS

5.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 05 PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 157
5-2
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
definitions
05 Accessible Pedestrian Connection. A path or walkway
that connects one place to another and is for use by all pedestrians, irrespective of their physical abilities, and meets Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) standards.

Active Uses. Uses and occupancy types that
encourage actual or visual engagement between
building tenants and the public. Examples include
but are not limited to retail storefronts, bars and
restaurants, entertainment venues and businesses,
personal services businesses, art galleries, gyms and
fitness studios, offices, salons.

Active Frontages. Building frontages with occupied
spaces that encourage engagement between the
building tenants and the public realm. They allow
visual or physical access to the active uses within the building from streets, sidewalks, and paseos.

Alley. A narrow passage behind or between buildings
generally used to access building services and
parking.

Arched Window. Window that is rounded at the top.

Articulation. The way portions of a building form
are expressed (materials, color, texture, pattern,
modulation, etc.) and come together to define the
structure.

Awning. A sheet of canvas or other material stretched
on a frame and used to keep the sun or rain off a
storefront, window, doorway, or deck. It is a type of
sunshade.

Awning Sign. A sign integrally attached or imprinted
on the face of an awning or built as a part of an
awning.

5.1 Definitions
Backlit Sign. See Sign, Backlit.

Base (of building). The bottom section of buildings,
including the ground floor level and up to the third
story or 45 feet high, whichever is higher that forms
the primary street facade and pedestrian interface.

Bird-safe Pattern. A pattern on the glass intended to
reduce bird collisions. The pattern must be visible to
birds from the exterior of the building and have lines, circular, or square markers at least 0.25 inches in width or diameter, spaced at most four inches apart vertically and two inches apart horizontally.

Bird Safety Treatment. Building treatments or
methods to reduce the likelihood of bird collisions.

These treatments must include at least one or a
combination of the following: exterior screens, louvers, grilles, shutters, or bird-safe patterns as recommended by the American Bird Conservancy.

Blade or Fin Sign. A two-sided projecting sign
mounted on a building facade, storefront pole, or a
surface perpendicular to the normal flow of traffic,
intended to be viewed from either side. These signs
are one of the most effective ways of attracting foot
traffic into an establishment.

Blank Wall. A portion of a facade on any floor of a
building that does not include a transparent window
or door between the level of the finished floor and the level of the ceiling.

Building Aperture. Any intentional opening in the
building envelope (the walls, roof, or sometimes floors) that allows for the passage of light, air, people, or
objects.

Carport. A type of covered parking structure designed
to shelter vehicles, typically automobiles, from weather elements like sun and rain. Unlike a fully enclosed
garage, a carport is open on at least one or more
sides, offering partial protection while being lighter, cheaper, and easier to construct.

Clerestory Window. A high, horizontally placed
window that is typically located near the top of a wall, above eye level. It is most often used to bring natural light into a space while maintaining privacy and wall
space below.

Conceal. Hide or keep from sight or public view by
using architectural elements.

Context. The characteristics of the buildings,
streetscape, and landscape that supports or surrounds
a given building, site, or area such as predominance
of period architecture or materials, wide sidewalks,
continuous and overhead weather protection, or
consistent street trees.

Continuous Soil Trench. A continuous trench that
stretches from tree to tree, sometimes under paving
strengthened by reinforcement, that greatly increases
the soil volume available to each tree. Continuous soil trenches and other technologies, including soil cells,
allow for the expansion of root systems, reduce soil
compaction, and can increase the longevity of street
trees.

Cornice. A molded and projecting horizontal feature
that crowns a facade.

Detached Sign. Any sign that is not attached to a
building but is connected to the ground.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 158
5 / Definitions
5-3
definitions
05 Direct Access. A connection or access between two
locations uninterrupted by vehicular traffic.

Dentilled Cornice. A dentil, or small block, used as a
repeating ornament under a cornice.

Divided Lites. A window with individual panes of
glass separated by muntins, typically arranged in a
grid. Simulated divided lite windows are made from a
single, large pane of glass with a surface grid attached to one or more sides.

Dooryard. A small outdoor space located directly
adjacent to the entrance of a residential unit. It serves as a transitional area between the public realm (such
as a sidewalk or street) and the private interior space.

Dooryards can include elements like gardens, porches,
seating areas, or decorative landscaping, and are
designed to provide a welcoming entry, enhance
curb appeal, and offer a semi-private outdoor area for
residents.

Facade. Any exterior face or wall of a building.

Facade Bay. A section of a building between vertical
lines or planes, as defined by columns, pilasters, bay
windows, or other horizontal projections or recesses.

Family Dwelling unit. A residential unit designed
for occupancy by a single household. It includes
essential living spaces such as a private kitchen,
bathroom, sleeping areas, and living room, and is
intended to provide complete living accommodations
for individuals or families within a multi-unit residential structure.

Finished Floor. Finished floor level refers to the
uppermost surface of a floor once construction has
been completed and all floor finishes have been
applied.

Flag Lot. A parcel that has less than the minimum
required frontage on a public road and has access to
the public right-of-way by a narrow strip of land, with the largest portion of the lot being situated behind
adjoining lots which front a public right-of-way.

Flare-out Opening. An opening that widens more than
the width of the path leading to it.

Floodlight. A broad-beamed, high-intensity artificial
light designed to illuminate a wide area.

Forecourt. A type of frontage with a portion of the
facade set back from the primary facade creating a
small courtyard space. The courtyard may be used
as an entry court or as shared garden space for
apartment buildings, or as an additional shopping or
restaurant seating area within retail and service areas.

Front Door Access. An entrance to a dwelling unit that
opens into a hallway, circulation, or living space and
not a bedroom.

Frontage (Building). The building facade facing a
street or public open space.

Frontage (Site). The length of a lot line contiguous
with a portion of a public or private street or public
open space, as defined in the Piedmont Zoning Code.

Frontage (Street). The property line or part of the site facing a street or public open space.

Frontage Zone. The area between the through way
(the main pedestrian walking space) and adjacent
property, which may accommodate pedestrianoriented activities and elements, such as street furniture, planting, café seating, and outdoor retail
displays. It can act as a buffer between doorways and
other entries bridging private and public spaces.

Grade, Natural. The elevation of the undisturbed
slope of the ground prior to any excavation or fill.

Green Roof. A roof that is partially or completely
covered with vegetation and a growing medium,
planted over a waterproofing membrane. It often
includes additional layers such as root barrier,
drainage, and irrigation systems.

Green Stormwater Infrastructure. Drainage practices
in urban environments that retain, treat, infiltrate,
evapotranspire, and harvest and use rainwater and
stormwater runoff as valuable resource instead of
directly piping and discharging it to the Bay as quickly as possible.

Green Wall. A vertical structure that is embedded with
living plants and has a growth medium and a built-in
irrigation system.

Landing (stairs). Platforms constructed where the
direction of stairs changes, between stair flights, or at the top of stair flights.

Landscape/Landscaping. Pervious areas containing
organic and inorganic elements. It includes but is
not limited to xeriscaping, soft landscape (organic
elements such as plants, soil, mulch, trees, shrubs),
and hard landscape (inorganic elements such as rocks,
pathways, and bricks).

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 159
5-4
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
definitions
05 Large tree. A tree which is 51 feet or more at height or canopy spread at maturity.

Low Impact Development (LID). A land planning and
engineering design approach which aims to reduce
stormwater runoff and mimic a site’s pre-development
hydrology by minimizing disturbed areas and
impervious cover, infiltrating, storing, evapotranspiring, retaining, and/or biotreating stormwater runoff close to its source, or on site.

Main Street. The street along a mid-block parcel’s
property line. For corner parcels, the wider street is
considered the main street.

Massing. The three-dimensional bulk of a structure:
height, width, and depth.

Maturity (Trees). Maturity is when a tree reaches 12.1
inches diameter at four and a half feet above grade.

Medium Tree. A tree which is 26 to 50 feet at height
or canopy spread at maturity.

Mid-Block Parcel. A parcel located in the interior and
not at the corner of a city block.

Middle (of building). The middle vertical section of
buildings that often contains the bulk of a buildings
primary use(s) and tenant(s).

Natural Grade. See Grade, Natural.

Non-active Uses. Uses and occupancy types that
do not attract public users or foster vibrant street
life. Examples include but are not limited to service
and utility areas, parking lots and garages, and
professional offices.

Non-active Frontage. Building frontage with
unoccupied spaces that are meant for building
operations, such as services, trash, and utilities.

Noncombustible Material. A building material which,
in the form in which it is used, meets the acceptance
criteria for noncombustibility as defined in the
California Building Code, Title 24, and is thereby
classified as noncombustible under the California
Fire Code. Such material shall not ignite, burn, or
release combustible vapors when exposed to the
test conditions specified (e.g., ASTM E-136). Examples
include (but are not limited to) concrete, concrete
block (CMU), brick, stone, tile, tempered glass, and
fiber-cement siding.

Occupied Deck or Balcony. A deck or a balcony that is
intended to be used for recreational purposed by the
building occupants and visitors.

Occupied Space. An enclosed space in a building
intended for human activities, including bathrooms and
circulation, but not including vehicle parking or space for other building functions such as storage, solid
waste storage, equipment, or computer servers.

Paseo. A landscaped pathway exclusively for
pedestrians and bicyclists. Paseos are mid-block
connections that improve pedestrian circulation along
extra-long blocks.

Pedestrian Level. The first 30 vertical feet of a building above grade. This part is the most critical for creating a good pedestrian environment.

Primary Building Entrance. A single entrance to a
building that provides access to the use with the
maximum area in the building program. A building
can have several uses and more than one separate
entrance for each of those uses, but a building
can have only one primary entrance; all others are
secondary building entrances.

Private Road/Private Street. An internal circulation
road or street which is meant to be used by the
occupants of the development and not meant to be
used as a thoroughfare.

Portal. A doorway, gate, or other entrance to a space,
especially a large one.

Privacy Fence. A fence, typically constructed from
wood, having the same board pattern on both sides, so
that neither side shows exposed posts or rails.

Private Open Space. A yard, patio, porch, or balcony
directly accessible from the dwelling unit for which
the open space provides an opportunity for private
outdoor recreation and relaxation of the resident(s) of the associated dwelling unit.

Public Open Space. Publicly-owned parks, plazas, and
other spaces meant for repose and recreation.

Public Realm. The area outside a building accessible
or visible to the public, including public right-of-way, sidewalk easement, and publicly accessible open
space.

Right-of-Way. A public highway, street, alley, sidewalk, or parkway that is subject to Public Utilities Code
section 7901.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 160
5 / Definitions
5-5
definitions
05 Rhythm. A regular and repeating pattern of objects
or architectural elements such as a bays, windows,
sunshades, awnings, doors, projections etc.

Rowhouse. A single-family dwelling that shares a
party wall with another of the same type placed sideby-side with individual entries along the front and dedicated private open space for each unit typically
located in the rear. Each unit has its own front access at the ground floor. Also known as a townhouse or
townhome.

Secondary Building Entrance. Any building entrance
other than the primary building entrance.

Semi-Public Open Space/Semi-Private Open
Space. Privately-owned or controlled outdoor space
accessible from the public realm but not intended for
public use (e.g., setback to ground floor residential
space). Similar to Shared Open Space, but it is
perceived as more “public-facing” because of visibility, location, or design.

Setback. The minimum distance by which buildings,
structures, and parking must be separated from any lot
line, as defined in the Piedmont Zoning Code.

Shared Garage. A structured parking area that is
shared by multiple residential units or commercial
spaces.

Shared Open Space. Privately-owned and
controlled outdoor spaces for communal use within
a development and accessible by all residents and
visitors, including courtyards, sport courts, play areas, gardens, or other open spaces.

Shopfront. A type of frontage, typically for commercial and retail use, where the facade is aligned close to the frontage line with the building entrance at the level of the sidewalk.

Side Street. For corner parcels, the narrower and/or
less traffic street is considered the side street.

Sight Distance Zone. A triangular area formed
by measuring 30 feet along the front and side lot
lines along the right-of way from their “extended”
intersection and connecting these two points, as
defined in the Piedmont Zoning Code.

Sign, Backlit. Also known as a halo-lit sign, is a type of sign illuminated from behind, creating a glowing halo
effect around the letters or logo by shining light onto the mounting surface.

Small Site. A development site that has a total area of less than 10,000 square feet.

Small Tree. A tree which is a maximum of 25 feet in
height or canopy spread at maturity.

Solid Waste. All putrescible and non-putrescible
solid and semisolid waste material including garbage,
rubbish, demolition and construction wastes, industrial wastes, vegetable and animal solid and semisolid
wastes, reusable or recyclable material, bulky goods,
and other discarded solid and semisolid wastes.

Stand-alone Parking Garage. A multi-story parking
structure that is not connected to any other buildings
and does not house any uses other than parking.

Stepback Plane. An imaginary inclined plane that
defines the building envelope to preserve a minimum
threshold of light and air access and to limit the impact of new developments on adjacent properties and
uses.

Stepback. The required or actual placement of a
building a specified distance away from a road,
property line, or other structure at a level above the
first floor.

Street-facing Building Facade. A facade of the
building that faces a street.

Streetscape. The visual character of a street as
determined by elements such as structures, access,
greenery, open space, view, etc. The scene as may be
observed along a public street composed of natural
and man-made components, including buildings,
paving planting, street hardware, and miscellaneous
structures.

Streetwall. The building facade(s) along a public
street, public open space, or a paseo from ground
level to 70 feet above. For a portion of the facade
to count as a streetwall, it must lie within ten feet of the property line or setback line, if there is one, from ground level to the top of the highest occupied floor of that portion of the building.

Toe of Wall. The base point at the front (or downslope
side) of a wall, typically where the wall meets the
ground surface.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 161
5-6
Piedmont Objective Design Standards
definitions
05 Top (of building). The highest section of buildings, including the roof, cornices, and at most the top
three stories that identifies building prominence via
architectural design and helps shape the skyline.

Top of Wall. The finished vertical height of a wall
measured from a designated base point (often finished
grade or floor level) up to the very highest point of that wall’s structure.

Townhouse. See Rowhouse.

Translucent Glass. Glass that allows light to pass
through but obscures or diffuses it, so that objects on the other side are not clearly visible. It provides natural illumination while preserving privacy.

Transparency. The of a glazing material, such as
glass or plastic, to transmit light without significant scattering, allowing objects behind it to be seen
clearly. For example, an opaque glazing that transmits
no light has 0% transparency, and a glazing that allows a clear view of the objects on the other side has a
100% transparency.

Transparent. A clear glazing/material that allows
unobstructed passage of light and provides a clear
view of objects or scenes on the other side.

Travel Path (or Path of Travel). A continuous,
unobstructed pedestrian passage by means of which
the altered area may be approached, entered, and
exited, and which connects the altered area with an
exterior approach (including sidewalks, streets, and
parking areas), an entrance to the facility, and other
parts of the facility.

Unoccupied Space. An enclosed space in a building
not intended for human activities but only for building services, such as storage, trash, equipment, building
utilities.

Urban Fabric. The physical aspect of urbanism,
emphasizing building types, thoroughfares, open
space, frontages, and streetscapes but excluding
environmental, functional, economic, and sociocultural
aspects.

Wall Signs. Signs with a face generally parallel with
and affixed to an exterior wall of any building. They
could be directly painted on the exterior wall or be
attached flat on the wall using different materials.

Wayfinding. The ability to orient oneself in a physical space and navigate from one place to another by
looking at visual cues.

PUBLIC REVIEW DRAFT | November 4, 2025
EXHIBIT A- ATTACHMENT A Agenda Report Page 162
Attachment B
ORDINANCE NO. 788 N.S.

AN ORDINANCE AMENDING SECTIONS OF DIVISIONS 17.20 ZONE A: SINGLE FAMILY RESIDENTIAL, 17.28 ZONE E: ESTATE RESIDENTIAL, 17.30 PARKING,

17.32 FENCES; TRASH ENCLOSURES; CORNER OBSTRUCTIONS, 17.34 LANDSCAPING, 17.38 ACCESSORY DWELLING UNITS, 17.46 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FACILITIES, 17.54 URBAN LOT SPLITS AND TWO-UNIT HOUSING DEVELOPMENTS (SB 9), AND 17.67 MINISTERIAL DESIGN REVIEW PERMIT; AND ADDING A SECTION TO DIVISION 17.30 PARKING OF CHAPTER 17 OF THE PIEDMONT CITY CODE TO INCORPORATE OBJECTIVE DESIGN

STANDARDS AND UPDATES CLARIFYING MAXIMUM RETAINING WALL HEIGHT FOR SB 9 PROJECTS AND LOCATIONS WHERE PARKING IS

PROHIBITED ON SINGLE FAMILY RESIDENTIAL PROPERTIES IN

ZONES A AND E
WHEREAS, the proposed amendments are consistent with the proposed Objective Design Standards, and other updates propose clarifying maximum retaining wall height for SB 9 projects and locations where parking is prohibited on single family residential properties in zones A and E; and

WHEREAS, On February 20, 2024, the City of Piedmont adopted a program-level Environmental Impact Report (EIR) for the Housing Element Implementation Project (SCH 2022020362) in accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA). The proposed amendments to Piedmont City Code Chapter 17 are consistent with and fall within the scope of this adopted Housing Element Implementation EIR. The EIR comprehensively analyzed the potential environmental impacts of implementing Housing Element programs, including Program

4.M (Facilitating Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards) and Program 1.J (SB 9 Facilitation Amendments), both of which are directly addressed by these code amendments. Furthermore, the consideration of Objective Design Standards and related amendments to the City Code and Design Guidelines are exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15061(b)(3), the common-sense exception that CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment and 15183, projects consistent with a community plan, general plan or zoning. Other amendments recommended by staff and unrelated to the ODS relating to clarifying the maximum retaining wall height for SB 9 projects and updating the locations where parking is prohibited on single family residential properties in Zone A and E are also exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15601(b)(3), the common-sense exception, due to the fact that the proposed amendments are aesthetic in nature, do not increase development capacity, and do not authorize any specific development, as future projects will still be subject to site-specific environmental review; and

WHEREAS, the Planning Commission has held a duly noticed public hearing and has taken public testimony on the proposed amendments to City Code Chapter 17 on January 12, 2026, consistent with existing City Code section 17.72.040 and recommended adoption of the proposed amendments to the Zoning Ordinance; and
Agenda Report Page 163
Attachment B
WHEREAS, the City Council has held a duly noticed public hearing and took public testimony on the proposed amendments to City Code Chapter 17 on [to be inserted], consistent with existing City Code section 17.72.050.

NOW, THEREFORE, the City Council of the City of Piedmont hereby ordain, based on the oral and written staff report, all oral and written comments received and all other evidence in the record, as follows:

SECTION 1 – BACKGROUND AND INTENT
Piedmont’s 6th Cycle Housing Element requires the City to implement key programs that establish and update objective design standards (ODS) to ensure that the City is able to retain some local control over developments that the City is required to approve ministerially, and comply with state law. The City has previously adopted ODS for accessory dwelling units and multi-family/mixeduse projects, and this ordinance adopts ODS for one-to-four-unit residential developments in single-family zones (A and E) to streamline SB 9 projects (Housing Element Program 1.J) and updating existing standards for accessory dwelling units (ADUs) multi-family/mixed-use projects to expedite approvals under state laws such as SB 35 and SB 330 (Housing Element Program

4.M).

SECTION 2. Findings. The City Council hereby makes the following findings:

A. The above recitations are true and correct and incorporated herein by reference.

B. On February 20, 2024, the City of Piedmont adopted a program-level Environmental Impact Report (EIR) for the Housing Element Implementation Project (SCH 2022020362) in accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA). The proposed amendments to Piedmont City Code Chapter 17 are consistent with and fall within the scope of this adopted Housing Element Implementation EIR. The EIR comprehensively analyzed the potential environmental impacts of implementing Housing Element programs, including Program 4.M (Facilitating Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards) and Program 1.J (SB 9 Facilitation Amendments), both of which are directly addressed by these code amendments. Furthermore, the consideration of Objective Design Standards and related amendments to the City Code and Design Guidelines are exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15061(b)(3), the common-sense exception that CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment and 15183, projects consistent with a community plan, general plan or zoning. Other amendments clarifying the maximum retaining wall height for SB 9 projects and updating the locations where parking is prohibited on single family residential properties in Zone A and E are also exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15601(b)(3), the common-sense exception that the proposed amendments are aesthetic in nature, do not increase development capacity, and do not authorize any specific development. Future projects will still be subject to site-specific environmental review.

C. The proposed revisions implement amendments related to objective design standards in Agenda Report Page 164
Attachment B
compliance with state law, and include revisions that clarify the maximum height of retaining walls allowed for SB 9 projects and locations where parking in prohibited on single-family residential parcels in Zones A and E. Pursuant to City Code Section

17.72.040(C), the amendments are consistent with Housing Element Programs 1.J and 4.M, the Piedmont General Plan, as recommended to be amended, the purposes of Chapter 17, and the provisions in City Charter Section 9.02.

D. The proposed amendments further public health, safety, and welfare of the community.

SECTION 3 – AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.20.040.A
Subsection 17.20.040.A of Section 17.20.040 [Regulations] of the City Code is amended in its entirety to read as follows:
“A. The following development standards apply to the development of all uses in Zone A, except those listed in Section 17.20.040.B:

Zone A requirements
Lot area Minimum 8,000 square feet, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38 or for a lot split under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54.

Frontage, on public or
private street
Minimum 60 feet, subject to an exception for a lot split under SB 9 as set forth in division 17.54.

Lot coverage;
Landscaping
Maximum 40% lot coverage for primary and accessory
structures, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38. (A site feature is not calculated in the lot coverage if (1) the feature is not more than 7 feet height and (2) the total of all site features is 400 square feet or less.)
Minimum 30% landscaping, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38.

Structure height Maximum 35 feet, except accessory dwelling units shall be subject to restrictions set forth in division 17.38.

Street yard setback Minimum 20 feet for primary or accessory structure, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38.

However, structure to support pedestrian and vehicular access, such as retaining walls and driveway bridges, not taller than 8 feet, shall be allowed in the street yard setback.

Agenda Report Page 165
Attachment B
No minimum setback for a site feature, but a site feature may require a design review permit under division 17.66.

Side yard and
rear yard setback
Minimum 5 feet for a primary or accessory structure, unless the yard is street facing, in which case the minimum is 20 feet, except that a setback of only 4 feet is required for a new structure to be used as an accessory dwelling unit, and no setback is required for conversions of an existing structure to an accessory dwelling unit or portion thereof in the same location and same dimensions.**
However, an accessory structure may be located anywhere within the side and rear setback areas except that it: (a) must be located within 35 feet of the rear lot line; (b) must be located at least 5 feet from a habitable structure on an abutting property, and, for a corner lot, at least 5 feet from a side lot line of an abutting property to the rear; (c) may not exceed 15 feet in height; and (d) may not be habitable.

A dwelling unit developed under SB 9 is subject to a 4 foot side and rear setback.

A site feature proposed within these distances may require a design review permit under division 17.66.

Floor area ratio* Subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38 or for a dwelling unit developed under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54:

Maximum 55% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,000 square feet or less.

Maximum 50% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,001 square feet to 10,000 square feet.

Maximum 45% of the lot area if the parcel is more than 10,000 square feet.
* In order to encourage development within the existing building envelope instead of building outwards or upwards, the floor area ratio standard is not applied to finishing an area into habitable space if: (1) there is no expansion of the exterior building envelope; and (2) the owner has not obtained a final inspection within the prior three years on a building permit issued for an expansion of the building envelope. (Ordinance 772 N.S., 03/2024) ** Pursuant to Government Code section 65852.2(a)(1)(D)(vii). (Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020, Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)
Please refer to division 17.54 for standards for a lot split and two-unit housing developments performed under SB 9.”
SECTION 4 – AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.28.040.A
Subsection 17.28.040.A of Section 17.28.040 [Regulations] of the City Code is amended in its entirety to read in its entirety as follows:

Agenda Report Page 166
Attachment B
“A. The following development standards apply to the development of all uses in Zone E, except those listed in Section 17.28.040.B.:

Zone E requirements
Lot area Minimum 20,000 square feet, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38 or for a lot split under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54 Frontage, on public or
private street
Minimum 120 feet, subject to an exception for a lot split under SB 9 as set forth in division 17.54
Lot coverage;
landscaping
Subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38:

Maximum 40% lot coverage for primary and accessory
structures. (A site feature is not calculated in the lot coverage if (1) the feature is not more than 7 feet height and (2) the total of all site features is 400 square feet or less.)
Minimum 40% landscaping.

Structure height Maximum 35 feet, except accessory dwelling units shall be subject to restrictions set forth in division 17.38.

Street yard setback Minimum 20 feet for primary and accessory structure, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38.

However, structure to support pedestrian and vehicular access, such as retaining walls and driveway bridges, no taller than 8 feet, shall be allowed in the street yard setback.

No minimum setback for a site feature, but a site feature may require a design review permit, under division 17.66.

Side yard and
rear yard setback
Minimum 20 feet for primary or accessory structure, unless the yard is street facing, in which case the minimum is 20 feet, except that a setback of only 4 feet is required for a new structure to be used as an accessory dwelling unit, and no setback is required for conversions of an existing structure to an accessory dwelling unit or portion thereof in the same location and same dimensions.**
However, an accessory structure not to be used as an accessory dwelling unit may be located anywhere within the side and rear setback areas except that it: (a) must be located within 35 feet of the rear lot line; (b) must be located at least 5 feet from a habitable structure on an abutting property, and, for a corner lot, at least 5 feet from a side lot line of an abutting property to the rear; (c) may not exceed 15 feet in height; and (d) may not be habitable. These distance requirements for an accessory structure also apply to a garage or carport attached to a primary structure.

No minimum setback for a site feature, but a site feature may require a design review permit under division 17.66.

Agenda Report Page 167
Attachment B
A dwelling unit developed under SB 9 is subject to a 4 foot side and rear setback.

Floor area ratio* Subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38, or for a dwelling unit developed under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54:

Maximum 55% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,000 square feet or less.

Maximum 50% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,001 square feet to 10,000 square feet.

Maximum 45% of the lot area if the parcel is more than 10,000 square feet.
* In order to encourage development within the existing building envelope instead of building outwards or upwards, the floor area ratio standard is not applied to finishing an area into habitable space if: (1) there is no expansion of the exterior building envelope; and (2) the owner has not obtained a final inspection within the prior three years on a building permit issued for an expansion of the building envelope. ** Pursuant to Government Code section 65852.2(a)(1)(D)(vii). (Ord. 743 N.S., 05/2018, Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020, Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024) Please refer to division 17.54 for standards for a lot split and two-unit housing developments performed under SB 9.”
SECTION 5 – AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.30.010.B.1
Subsection 17.30.010.B.1 of Section 17.30.010 [Single family residential and similar use] of the City Code is amended to in its entirety to read as follows:
“1.General.

Dwelling Unit Minimum number of off-street, covered, nontandem parking spaces Accessory dwelling unit (division

17.38)
0*
New primary unit** 800 square feet
or less
1 New primary unit** greater than 800
square feet
2 Primary unit that exceeds FAR, lot
coverage or structure height of the
underlying zone
1 additional parking space; for a maximum total
of 3 parking spaces.

SB-9 development (division 17.54) 1 per primary unit. If the parcel is located within one-half mile walking distance of either a highquality transit corridor as defined in subdivision (b) of Section 21155 of the Public Resources
Code, or a major transit stop as defined in
Section 21064.3 of the Public Resources Code,
Agenda Report Page 168
Attachment B
then parking is not required for the new primary
unit.

Additional parking spaces for a unit can be
stacked or tandem.
* Under Government Code section 65852.2, the city may not require parking for an accessory dwelling unit located within 1/2 mile of public transit, and all Piedmont properties are within 1/2 mile.
** primary unit refers to single family residence, small and large family day care homes, manufactured and mobile homes, low barrier navigation centers, supportive and transitional housing, residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for up to 6 residents, residential care facilities or group homes that do not provide licensable services, and employee housing for up to 6 employees.”
SECTION 6 – ADDITION OF SUBSECTION 17.30.030.C
Subsection 17.30.030.C is added to Section 17.30.030 [Commercial use and mixed-use residential/commercial (Zone D)] of the City Code to read as follows:
“C. Shared Parking: At least 80% of the total residential parking spaces within a mixed-use development parking arrangement (parking garage or surface parking) shall be dedicated to residential uses. The remaining residential parking spaces can be shared between commercial and residential uses.”
SECTION 7 – AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.30.0.40
Section 17.30.040 [Location of Parking Spaces] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“17.30.040 Location of parking spaces.

A. Parking for a permitted use in any zone must be located: (1) on the same lot as the permitted use; and (2) not within the street setback in Zones A, B and E. Parking for a conditional use in any zone will be provided as required by the conditional use permit authorizing the use.

B. In Zones A and E, the parking of vehicles between the street-facing façade of a building and a lot line is prohibited, except for the parking of vehicles on driveways, parking pads and within parking structures.”
SECTION 8– AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.32.010
Section 17.32.010 [Fence, wall, retaining wall, terracing] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“17.32.010 Fence, wall, retaining wall, terracing.

A fence, wall, retaining wall, or terracing is subject to these height limit and design review permit requirements:

Agenda Report Page 169
Attachment B
Height, measured from exiting or proposed grade; Design review permit requirement
Retaining wall, with or without
guardrail
Maximum 30 inches. (No design review permit required.)
If more than 30 inches, requires a design review permit under division 17.66.

Fence, wall, or a combination
of either with a retaining wall
within 24 inches
Within street setback Requires a design review permit under division 17.66 for any height.

Other areas If 6 feet or less: exempt from design review permit.

If more than 6 feet high, requires a design review permit, under division 17.66.

If more than 8 feet high, requires a design review permit, under division 17.66, with notification requirements of division 17.62.

Up to 8 feet tall allowed in Zones C and D when property line is shared with single-family uses or lots in in all zones.

Retaining wall under SB 9 for
Zones A and E
Within street setback Up to 8 feet tall to support pedestrian and vehicular egress and ingress needs such as driveways and entry pathways.

Other Areas Maximum of 5 feet.

Trash enclosure (See general requirements in subsection B.1, below.) Within street setback No building permit or design review permit required if the enclosure complies with section 17.32.020, subsections A and B below. Otherwise requires design review permit under division

17.66. Other areas No building permit or design review permit required if the enclosure complies with section 17.32.020 B below.

Terracing Design review is not required if a series of one or more retaining walls and fences, at least 24 inches apart, on a single slope is designed so that no single wall or fence exceeds the height limits in this subsection.

SECTION 9– AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.34.040
Section 17.34.040 [Requirements] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“17.34.040 Requirements.

The minimum dimensions and areas for landscaping are set forth in the regulations for each zoning district.

A residential property owner must landscape all required street setback areas, except for areas paved for ingress and egress. This requirement does not apply to a mixed use or multifamily development.”
Agenda Report Page 170
Attachment B
SECTION 10– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.38.060.B.5
Subsection 17.38.060.B.5 of Section 17.38.060 [Zoning regulations; Accessory dwelling unit development standards; Junior accessory dwelling unit development standards; Projects subject to state mandated approval] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“5. Design Criteria. The design of the structure(s) housing the proposed accessory dwelling unit must meet applicable objective design criteria in the Piedmont Objective Design Standards and any additional design standards applicable to accessory dwelling units approved by the City Council.”
SECTION 11– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.38.060.C.2.j
Subsection 17.38.060.C.2.j of Section 17.38.060 [Zoning regulations; Accessory dwelling unit development standards; Junior accessory dwelling unit development standards; Projects subject to state mandated approval] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“j. An expansion to an accessory structure of up to one hundred fifty (150) square feet to accommodate ingress and egress for a proposed junior accessory dwelling unit must meet applicable design criteria in the Piedmont Objective Design Standards. This 150-square-foot of expansion can include removal of an uncovered parking space.” SECTION 12– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.38.075.A
Subsection 17.38.075.A of Section 17.38.075 [Pre-Approved Plans Incentive] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“A. The Director may authorize an applicant’s use of floor plans and elevations, owned by the City of Piedmont, and approved by the City Council, Chapter 3.4 of the Piedmont Objective Standards, to obtain Planning Division approval of an Accessory Dwelling Unit Permit if all of the following findings are made:

1. The design unit meets the requirements of section 17.38.060.

2. The roofing material and exterior siding material of the proposed unit are the same as that of the primary residence.

3. The plans are the same as those in Chapter 3.4 of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards with only a 3 percent variation or less in any one dimension.

If the approval is granted, the applicant must agree to the imposition of a rent restrictions on the unit requiring that any rent for the unit be affordable to households of very low income, and the accessory dwelling unit shall be subject to all the requirements set forth below.” SECTION 13– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.38.075.B
Subsection 17.38.075.B of Section 17.38.075 [Pre-Approved Plans Incentive] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:

Agenda Report Page 171
Attachment B
“B. Additional requirements. If an accessory dwelling unit permit using City-owned plans in Chapter 3.4 of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards is approved, it is subject to the following additional requirements.

1. Rent restriction.
a. Declaration of rent restrictions. The accessory dwelling unit permit constructed using City-owned plans shall be subject to declaration of rent restrictions (in a form provided by the city), which shall be recorded in the county recorder's office, as a declaration of rent restrictions, and will remain in effect for ten years. The ten-year period of rent restriction begins either: (a) on the date of recordation or date of final building inspection, whichever is later; or (b) according to the terms of the recorded declaration.

If, after ten years, the termination of the recorded declaration is not automatic (by its terms), the city will record a document terminating the declaration of rent restrictions, upon the written request of the property owner. b. Affordable rent certification. An owner who has executed a declaration must submit to the city an accessory dwelling unit affordable rent certification: (i) on an annual basis, by each December 31 and as part of the annual city business license application and renewal; and (ii) upon any change in occupancy of the accessory dwelling unit. The accessory dwelling unit affordable rent certification must be on a form provided by the city and must specify whether or not the accessory dwelling unit is being occupied; the rent charged; the utilities that are included in the cost of rent; the household size of the accessory dwelling unit; the names and ages of the accessory dwelling unit occupants; the gross household income of the accessory dwelling unit household; and other information as determined appropriate by the city.”
SECTION 14– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.46.050.B.1.d
Subsection 17.46.050.B.1.d of Section 17.46.050 [Permit; Application] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“d. all applicable documents outlined in the submittal checklist in section

8.03.04 of the Piedmont Design Guidelines titled Submittal Checklist.” SECTION 15– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.46.050.B.2
Subsection 17.46.050.B.2 of Section 17.46.050 [Permit; Application] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“2. Application for location on city property. An applicant for a wireless communication facility proposed to be located on city property or in a public right-ofAgenda Report Page 172 Attachment B
way must submit a Letter of Authorization signed by the City of Piedmont City Council and all documents listed in Chapter 8 of the Piedmont Design Guidelines.” SECTION 16– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.46.070.C
Subsection 17.46.070.C of Section 17.46.070 Standards, of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:

“C. Term of permit. A wireless communication facility permit is valid for an initial period of ten years as specified in the Piedmont Design Guidelines unless: (i) a longer period is required by state or federal law; or (ii) a shorter time is required as a condition of approval for particular circumstances set forth in the decision, particularly with respect to public safety or substantial land use reasons under California Government Code section 65964(b). The Director may administratively extend a permit upon verification of continued compliance with this division

17.46 and any conditions of approval.”
SECTION 17– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.46.080.A.1
Subsection 17.46.080.A.1 of Section 17.46.080 [Review Body; Findings] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“1. Permit and Reviewing Body.

Location Type of WCF
Design Standards
Criteria Type of Permit Required
WCF in the Rightof-Way
6409 Collocation
Meets the design
criteria outlined in
Design Guidelines
Section 8.02.03
Building Permit
Encroachment Permit
Small Cell or DAS
Application
Meets the Design
Guidelines Section

8.02.03 Building Permit
Encroachment Permit
Does not meet the
Design Guidelines
WCF Planning Permit, Review by
Planning Commission
Building Permit
Encroachment Permit
Collocation (not under
6409) with existing
structure
WCF Planning Permit, Review by
Director
Building Permit
Encroachment Permit
Agenda Report Page 173
Attachment B
WCF On Public or
Private Property
New structure
WCF Planning Permit, Review by
Planning Commission
Building Permit
Collocation (not under
6409) with existing
structure
WCF Planning Permit, Review by
Director
Building Permit
6409 Collocation
Meets Design
Guidelines in Section

8.02.04 Building Permit
SECTION 18– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.46.080.B.1.c
Subsection 17.46.080.B.1.c of Section 17.46.080 [Review Body; Findings] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“c. The proposed design is consistent with the Piedmont Design Guidelines.” SECTION 19– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.46.080.B.2.b
Subsection 17.46.080.B.2.b of Section 17.46.080 [Review Body; Findings] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“b. Modification. The Director may consider and grant, modify and grant or deny a modification to an existing wireless communications facility if the modification meets the requirements of section 6409. In determining whether to approve the requested modification the Director shall approve if the project meets the criteria outlined in section 8.03.03 of the Piedmont Design Guidelines titled 6409 (a) Eligible Facilities Request Checklist.”
SECTION 20– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.54.040.B
Subsection 17.54.040.B of Section 17.54.040 [Permit Application and Review Procedures] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“B. Ministerial Review. The Director shall review each application ministerially to determine if the development standards in section 17.54.050 are met for an urban lot split or the development standards in section 17.54.060 are met for a two-unit housing development. The Director will review the application without notice or public hearing, and shall approve the application of the application meets the applicable requirements of the division and Piedmont Objective Design Standards Chapter 2: One to Four Residential Unit Developments.” Agenda Report Page 174
Attachment B
SECTION 21– AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.54.050
Section 17.54.050 [Urban Lot Split Standards] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“17.54.050 Urban Lot Split Standards
The Director may not approve an application for an urban lot split permit unless the project conforms to all of the standards listed below and in Chapter 2 of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards. A waiver may be granted for an exception to the standards as provided in section

17.54.080.

A. Size Requirements

1. The parcel subdivides an existing parcel to create no more than two new parcels of approximately equal lot area provided that one parcel shall not be smaller than 40 percent of the lot area of the original parcel proposed for subdivision.

2. The newly created parcels are no smaller than 1,200 square feet.

B. Location Requirements

1. The parcel is not located in an area identified in subparagraphs (B) to (K) of paragraph (6) of subdivision (a) of Section 65913.4 of the Government Code. a. The parcel is not located within a very high fire hazard severity zone, as determined by the Department of Forestry and Fire Protection pursuant to Section 51178, or within a high or very high fire hazard severity zone as indicated on maps adopted by the Department of Forestry and Fire Protection pursuant to Section 4202 of the Public Resources Code. This subparagraph does not apply to sites excluded from the specified hazard zones by a local agency, pursuant to subdivision (b) of Section 51179, or sites that have adopted fire hazard mitigation measures pursuant to existing building standards or state fire mitigation measures applicable to the development. b. The parcel is not located on a hazardous waste site, as defined by Government Code Section 65913.4(a)(6)(H).
c. The parcel is not located within a special flood hazard area subject to inundation by the one percent annual chance flood (one hundred (100)- year flood) as defined by Government Code Section 65913.4(a)(6)(G).
d. The property is not located within a regulatory floodway, as defined by Government Code Section 65913.4(a)(6)(H).

2. The proposed urban lot split would not require demolition or alteration of the housing types listed in Government Code section 66411.7(a)(3)(D)(i)-(iv) nor the following types of housing:
a. Housing that is subject to a recorded covenant, ordinance, or law that restricts rents to levels affordable to persons and families of moderate, low, or very low income.

Agenda Report Page 175
Attachment B
b. Housing that is subject to any form of rent or price control through a public entity’s valid exercise of its police power.
c. A parcel or parcels on which an owner of residential real property has exercised the owner’s rights under Chapter 12.75 of the California Government Code (commencing with Section 7060) of Division 7 of Title 1 to withdraw accommodations from rent or lease within 15 years before the date that the development proponent submits an application.
d. Housing that has been occupied by a tenant in the last three years.

3. The parcel is not located within a historic district or property included on the State Historic Resources Inventory, as defined in Section 5020.1 of the Public Resources Code, or within a site that is designated or listed as a city or county landmark or historic property or district pursuant to a city or county ordinance.

4. The parcel has not been established through prior exercise of an urban lot split as provided for in this division.

5. Neither the owner of the parcel being subdivided nor any person acting in concert with the owner has previously subdivided an adjacent parcel using an urban lot split as provided for in this division.

C. Lot Configuration

1. Access to Public Right-of-Way. The new parcel shall have vehicular access to the public right-of-way, either through direct lot frontage or an easement through the existing parcel.

2. Existing Dwelling Unit. If an urban lot split is proposed for a property with an existing dwelling unit, the split must result in the existing dwelling unit being completely located on one parcel. There shall be no existing or proposed structure in the setback along the new lot line for the lot on which the existing house remains. The lot on which the existing primary residence remains shall comply with the underlying zoning regulations such that no nonconformity is introduced, and no existing nonconformity is increased by the subdivision.

3. Lot Frontage. The lot shall have a minimum frontage of 60 feet, unless the frontage requirement precludes the development of two lots containing an 800 square foot primary structure. A new lot may be accessed via an easement across a pre-existing lot that contains street frontage.

4. Flag Lots. Flag lots are not permitted under an urban lot split permit. If a new parcel is created without direct access to the public right-of-way, an easement shall be provided through the original lot. The easement shall meet the following requirements:
a. The easement shall have a minimum width of 12 feet.
b. The easement shall provide access for utilities to be connected to the public right-of-way.

Agenda Report Page 176
Attachment B

5. The side line of all lots shall be at right angles to the street which the lot faces, or approximately radial to the center of the curvature, if the street is curved. Side lines of lots shall be approximately radial to the center of the curvature of a cul-de-sac on which the lot faces.

6. For a newly created lot that is located in both Piedmont and Oakland, the applicant shall obtain all the required permits in both jurisdictions.

7. Lots of an unusual shape, as defined in section 17.54.030, are not permitted.

8. Access to the new lot shall meet the driveway width, slope standards, and other standards for vehicular access outlined in Chapter 2.5 of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards.

D. Utilities

1. The new parcel shall have separate utilities, including but not limited to electric, gas, water, and sewer. The new parcel shall adhere to the standards outlined in the Piedmont Public Works Standards.

2. Utility easements shall be recorded prior to final map recordation.” SECTION 22– AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.54.060
Section 17.54.060 [Two-Unit Housing Development Standards] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“17.54.060 Two-Unit Housing Development Standards
The Director may not approve an application for a two-unit housing development permit unless the project conforms to all of the standards listed below and Chapter 2 of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards. A waiver may be granted for an exception to the standards as provided in section 17.54.080.

A. Size.
a. The SB 9 unit is no more than 800 square feet in size. b. For an SB 9 unit that exceeds the 800 square foot size limit, the SB 9 unit shall meet the floor area ratio criteria for the underlying zoning district, unless the development falls under section E below.

B. Height. The maximum height of a new SB 9 unit shall meet the requirements of the underlying zoning district.

C. Setbacks.
a. The side and rear setback is four feet for an SB 9 unit in any zone. b. The street-side setback, including for corner lots, is 20 feet. c. For the development of a new SB 9 unit within an existing structure that does not meet the four-foot setback requirement, the new unit is allowed to keep the nonconforming Agenda Report Page 177
Attachment B
condition so long as the nonconformity is not increased within the setback area. The converted structure must be in the same footprint and dimensions as the existing nonconforming structure.

D. Parking. New SB 9 units are required to have at least one parking space that meets the parking regulations in Section 17.30.040 and Section 17.30.050 of the Piedmont City Code. If the parcel is located within one-half mile walking distance of either a high-quality transit corridor as defined in subdivision (b) of Section 21155 of the Public Resources Code, or a major transit stop as defined in Section 21064.3 of the Public Resources Code, then parking is not required for the new SB 9 unit. Additional parking spaces for a unit can be stacked or tandem.

E. Lot Coverage.
a. When a two-unit housing development is proposed on a new lot created pursuant to the urban lot split provisions specified in this division, the new SB 9 unit(s) shall conform to the structure coverage, landscape coverage, and floor area ratio of the underlying zoning district.
b. When a new SB 9 unit is constructed on a lot with an existing dwelling unit, the floor area ratio may exceed the code required maximums so long as structure and landscape coverage conform to the requirements of the underlying zoning district.

F. Path of Travel. The path of travel to the new SB 9 unit shall be clearly marked by providing an address marker visible from the street and at the main entry door to the new unit. If needed, path lights shall also be installed. The path of travel shall have a minimum width of 3 feet.”
SECTION 23– AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.54.080
Section 17.54.080 [Waivers from Standards] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“17.54.080 Waivers from Standards
A. An applicant may request a waiver from the development standards provided in this division and Chapter 2 of the Piedmont Objective Standards if the following criteria are met:

1. Application. The applicant requests an exception as a part of the application materials.

2. Approval Authority. The exception request shall be submitted to the Director for review.

The Director shall determine if the exception meets the standards for approval.

3. Standards for Approval. An exception from a development standard shall be granted if the standard would have the effect of physically precluding: (1) an urban lot split of a vacant parcel where the resulting lot size is 1,200 square feet or more for both parcels; (2) an urban lot split of a parcel with existing development, where the resulting lot size is 1,200 square feet or more for both parcels, and the urban lot split does not increase any nonconformity with underlying zoning regulations for the parcel with existing development; or (3) the Agenda Report Page 178
Attachment B
construction of up to two units that are 800 square feet in floor area or less, each.

Waivers from objective zoning standards shall not be granted if the floor area and/or structure coverage of each new housing development would exceed 800 square feet. The city shall determine the extent of relief necessary to allow two 800 square foot units. Waivers from zoning standards for accessory structures, such as decks and garages, shall be only for the minimum size structure required to serve each housing unit according to state law and Chapter 8 Building Code standards. A waiver cannot be approved for an application that proposes new construction within the four-foot side and rear setbacks.”
SECTION 24– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.67.020.A
Subsection 17.67.020.A of Section 17.67.020 [Implementation] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“A. Piedmont Objective Design Standards. The City Council has adopted the Piedmont Objective Design Standards that are available online and at City Hall. The Piedmont Objective Design Standards are for the review of projects that meet the requirements for ministerial review. The Piedmont Objective Design Standards are one of the criteria for the applicant and Director in determining whether a specific project conforms to section

17.67.060 Standards; Findings.”
SECTION 25– AMENDMENT OF SUBSECTION 17.67.030.A
Subsection 17.67.030.A of Section 17.67.030 [Permit Required] of the City Code is amended to read in its entirety as follows:
“A. Permit required. A ministerial design review permit is required for any development which meets the eligibility criteria for ministerial review under State law, subject to review under Chapter 17 division 17.38, (2) Two-unit housing developments and/or urban lot splits, which are subject to review under Chapter 17 division 17.54, and (3) other ministerial projects including certain multifamily and mixed-use developments as required by law;” SECTION 26– AMENDMENT OF SECTION 17.67.060
Section 17.67.060 Standards; Findings, of the City Code is amended in its entirety to read as follows:
“17.67.060 Standards; Findings.

The Director may not approve a ministerial design review permit unless the Director first finds that the design of the project conforms to all of the following standards:

A. The proposed development meets the criteria for ministerial approval under State law.

B. The proposed development meets applicable design standards as provided in the Piedmont Objective Design Standards, as they may be amended from time to time by the City Council.

Agenda Report Page 179
Attachment B
C. The proposed development complies with zoning ordinance regulations for the zone in which the project site is located.”
SECTION 27 – CONFLICTS
If a previous City Council ordinance or resolution is in conflict with this ordinance, that ordinance or resolution is superseded, and the provisions of this ordinance prevail.

SECTION 28 – SEVERABILITY
The provisions of this Ordinance are severable and if any provision, clause, sentence, word or part thereof is held illegal, invalid, unconstitutional, or inapplicable to any person or circumstances, such illegality, invalidity, unconstitutionality, or inapplicability shall not affect or impair any of the remaining provisions, clauses, sentences, sections, words or parts thereof of the Ordinance or their applicability to other persons or circumstances.

SECTION 29 – CODIFICATION
The City Clerk is directed to codify this ordinance in a manner which reflects the legislative intent of the City Council
SECTION 30 – POSTING, EFFECTIVE DATE, AND SUBMISSION
This Ordinance shall be posted at City Hall after its second reading by the City Council for at least 30 days and shall become effective 30 days after the second reading. The City Clerk is directed to submit a copy of this ordinance to the Department of Housing and Community Development in the manner required by law.
[END OF ORDINANCE]
Agenda Report Page 180

ATTACHMENT C
RESOLUTION No. _____

A RESOLUTION OF

THE CITY COUNCIL THE CITY OF PIEDMONT ADOPTING AMENDMENTS TO

THE CITY OF PIEDMONT DESIGN STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES
WHEREAS, the purpose of the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines is to implement design and appearance policies outlined in the General Plan and Chapter 17 of the Piedmont City Code; and
WHEREAS, in February 2020, the City adopted design standards and guidelines for ADUs and JADUs. Then, in September 2023, the city adopted objective design standards for multifamily, mixed-use, and commercial developments, as well as pre-approved ADU plans. These were added to Chapters 5, 6, 7, and Appendix A of the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines document; and
WHEREAS, other chapters provide information, guidelines and standards for projects exempt from design review, list of streets in Piedmont, landscaping and hardscaping, accessory structures, placement of windows, design of additions, location and design of site features, exterior mechanical equipment, fencing, retaining walls, wireless communication facilities, commercial uses, and permit submittal requirements; and
WHEREAS, as proposed, the existing standards for ADUs, multifamily development and mixed-use development will be removed from Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines and updated standards would be placed in the Draft Piedmont Objective Design Standards (Draft ODS) along with new standards for 1–4-unit housing and the current Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines will be renamed to Piedmont Design Guidelines; and WHEREAS, in addition, the proposed amendments update the list of projects exempt from design review and implementing other minor revisions throughout the remaining chapters of the Guidelines. These revisions are designed to reflect current and best practices, incorporate necessary procedural changes, and update application submittal checklists; and WHEREAS, the draft amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines were presented and discussed at the November 10, 2025, Planning Commission study session and an opportunity for public comment was provided at that study session; and WHEREAS, the Planning Commission convened a public hearing on the draft amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines on January 12, 2026, and provided an opportunity for public and Commissioner comments at that time; and WHEREAS, the amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines as outlined in the staff report is consistent with Piedmont City Code, the draft Piedmont Objective Design Standards and best practices; and
Agenda Report Page 181

ATTACHMENT C
WHEREAS, City Council approval of the amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines is required before they become effective; and WHEREAS, after the amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines becomes effective, the new document would be titled Piedmont Design Guidelines and would continue to have regulations for discretionary projects; and WHEREAS, the existing objective standards in the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines and the new objective standards for ministerial projects will be placed in a new and separate document titled Piedmont Objective Design Standards; and NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED that, after reviewing the revised document, staff report, and all documents and public testimony received, the City Council of the City of Piedmont does hereby resolve, declare, determine and order as follows:

SECTION 1. The City Council finds that:

1. The facts set forth in the recitals in this Resolution are true and correct and herby incorporated by this reference;

2. The recitals constitute findings in this matter and, together with the staff report, and other written reports, public testimony and other information contained in the records, are an adequate and appropriate evidentiary basis for the actions taken in this Resolution;

3. The provisions in this Resolution, as adopted, are consistent with General Plan Policies Policy 1.3 Harmonious Development, Policy 1.7 Incentives for Affordable Accessory Dwelling Units, Policy 1.9 Implement Housing Element, Policy 2.2 Mixed Use Development, Policy 2.4 Parking, Policy 6.4 Community Input, Policy 11.4 Shared Parking, Policy 13.1 Respecting Natural Terrain, Policy 14.5 Landscaping, Policy 19.3 New Development Siting, Policy 19.12 Fire Safe Regulations, 19.20 Emergency Access, Policy 29.7 Signs, Policy 28.1 Scale, Height and Bulk Compatibility, Policy 28.7 Hillside Home Design, Policy 28.10 Multifamily Design, Policy 29.5 Fence and Wall Design, Policy 29.6 Retaining Walls, Policy 29.7 Driveway and Parking Location, Policy 29.8 Exterior Lighting, Policy 1.J SB 9 Facilitation Amendments and Policy 4.M Facilitate Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards; the proposed Objective Design Standards and staff recommended updates to implement best and current practices; and

4. This Resolution will not be detrimental to the public interest, health, safety, convenience or welfare.

SECTION 2. On February 20, 2024, the City of Piedmont adopted a program-level Environmental Impact Report (EIR) for the Housing Element Implementation Project (SCH 2022020362) in accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA). The proposed amendments to Piedmont City Code Chapter 17 are consistent with and fall within the scope of this adopted Housing Element Implementation EIR. The EIR comprehensively analyzed the potential environmental impacts of implementing Housing Element programs, including Program Agenda Report Page 182

ATTACHMENT C

4.M (Facilitating Multi-Family and Residential Mixed-Use Projects by Right Subject to Objective Standards) and Program 1.J (SB 9 Facilitation Amendments), both of which are directly addressed by these code amendments. Furthermore, the consideration of Objective Design Standards and related amendments to the City Code and Design Guidelines are exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15061(b)(3), the common-sense exception that CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment and 15183, projects consistent with a community plan, general plan or zoning. Other amendments including modifying the list of projects that are exempt from needing a design review, amending the submittal checklist for all planning project types, and adding information related to water efficient landscape ordinance are also exempt from the requirements of CEQA pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Sections 15601(b)(3), the common-sense exception that the proposed amendments are aesthetic in nature, do not increase development capacity, and do not authorize any specific development. Future projects will still be subject to site-specific environmental review.

SECTION 3. The amendments to the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines, attached as Exhibit A, and a revision to the document title to Piedmont Design Guidelines, are hereby adopted.

SECTION 4. All portions of this resolution are severable. If an individual component of this Resolution is adjudged by a court to be invalid and unenforceable, then the remaining portions will continue in effect.
[END OF DOCUMENT]
Agenda Report Page 183
Public Comments received on Draft Piedmont Objective Design Standards 12/3/2025
Hello Kevin:

I've reviewed the "Objective Design Standards Draft" (11.04.25 Public Review Draft) and have a few landscape related comments for your review:

1. S.2.10.3 Plants (page 39): Including a requirement that the plants are 'native', creates too much restriction. If the key consideration is water-use, perhaps a term such as 'climate appropriate' or 'Mediterranean climate appropriate' would be more accurate. For example, we have many useful low-water plants with Australian or South African origins.

2. In 5.1 Definitions Landscape/Landscaping (page 141): It includes "hard landscape" such as gravel. Is this a change that allows gravel to be defined as "landscape" in calculating landscape coverage of the lot? This seems in conflict with Piedmont's previous definition requiring landscape area to be "growing green material".

3. 1.5.2 (page 14): requires that the Topographic Survey must have been prepared within the previous 12 months. With larger renovation project timelines and the potential for new homeowners to "inherit" a topographic survey from previous owners, these are often prepared 2- 3 years prior. I understand the need for the survey to be current, but is a 24-36 month window an option?
Thank you. I appreciate the opportunity to provide feedback.

Alexis
Alexis Davis Millar Landscape Architecture
Principal / Landscape Architect CLA 6542
(510) 282-0039
December 5, 2025, from Gary Z.

Comments on proposed “Objective Design Standards” for new homes in Piedmont:

I attended the August 21st open house, where portions of the objective design standards were displayed only in partial, draft form. I shared informal verbal feedback with your staff and the City’s consultant, but the materials were clearly still in development, and nothing indicated this was a formal public-comment process. The standards now dated November 4th are substantially more developed, and my earlier input does not appear to be reflected. For transparency, the City should release the next iteration of the standards, explain how community feedback has been incorporated, and provide an actual opportunity for formal public comment. The August open house was informational only and should not be characterized as a public-feedback round.

When you adopt objective design standards for SB 9 and ADU projects, the legal baseline is state law, not existing local practice. Under Gov. Code §§ 65852.21 and 66411.7, qualifying SB 9 and ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 184
ADU applications are entitled to ministerial approval so long as they meet objective standards that do not physically preclude the project or otherwise make it infeasible. Any objective standard that is too restrictive, impossible to satisfy in practice, or not tied to a legitimate health, safety, or historic resource concern effectively converts a ministerial process back into a discretionary one—contrary to state law and subject to HCD enforcement. That is why it is critical that Piedmont’s objective standards remain narrowly tailored and non-preclusive. Several of the proposed appear to go beyond what SB 9 and state ADU law allow and risk invalidating the City’s entire ministerial framework if challenged, for example:

SB 9 Waiver Interpretation Makes Custom Lot-Split Homes Impossible — Contrary to State Law
I would like to bring attention to a serious inconsistency in the City’s SB 9 application materials that is creating confusion for applicants and appears to conflict with both state law and the City’s own SB 9 ordinance. The application form states that “if any standard is waived, the project is limited to unit size not exceeding 800 square feet.” This language effectively traps applicants into believing that requesting a required waiver—such as for lot frontage--forces an SB 9 home that by state law mandates be at least 800 square feet to be exactly 800 square feet, no larger and no smaller. This is not supported anywhere in Government Code §§65852.21 or 66411.7, nor in Chapter 17.54 of the Piedmont Municipal Code, which expressly allows SB 9 units to exceed 800 square feet so long as they meet applicable FAR or coverage. State law requires waivers to ensure feasibility, not to down-zone projects or impose new size caps. As currently written, the form misleads the public, frustrates the ministerial intent of SB 9, and introduces a requirement that is neither objective nor lawful. I respectfully request that the City study this scenario and correct this language to align with state law and the adopted ordinance so applicants have a clear, accurate understanding of their rights and obligations under SB 9.

If the City’s intent is in fact to require any SB 9 lot-split home requesting a waiver to measure exactly 800 square feet—and not one foot larger or smaller—that would be even more problematic. Such a requirement is functionally impossible to implement, has no basis in SB 9, and amounts to an unlawful substantive restriction masquerading as a procedural condition. State law does not permit cities to force precision sizing that no architectural, structural, or codecompliant residential design can realistically achieve. Imposing an “exact 800-square-foot” mandate would not only misapply the statute; it would effectively prohibit otherwise feasible SB 9 housing, in direct conflict with the Legislature’s intent to remove—not add—local barriers to development.
60-Foot Frontage Objective Standard With Regard to SB9 Lot Splits is an Unlawful Barrier
The proposed 60-foot minimum frontage requirement in S.2.2.5 directly conflicts with state law and should be removed. Under Government Code §66411.7, cities may not impose lot-dimension standards that would preclude an SB 9 urban lot split, and minimum frontage requirements are specifically identified by HCD as an unlawful barrier.

S 3.2.6 Blanket Prohibition on Curb Cuts is an Unlawful Barrier The proposed curb-cut restriction in S.3.2.6 risks conflicting with state ADU and SB 9 law, both of which guarantee applicants the ability to create the access necessary for safe, functional ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 185
parking and site circulation. Many SB 9 and ADU projects—particularly those located behind an existing residence or on constrained lots—cannot be built without a new or modified curb cut, and a categorical prohibition would effectively block otherwise qualifying ministerial housing.

Government Code §§65852.2, 65852.21, and 66411.7 require that objective standards not physically preclude the development, and access is a fundamental, safety-related site requirement. For this reason, curb-cut decisions must remain flexible and project-specific rather than barred outright. A blanket prohibition would overreach, create noncompliance with state law, and undermine feasible small-scale infill.

S2.10.2 Mandatory Fencing or Landscape Screening Around ADUs Is an Unlawful Barrier and is Inconsistent with Accessory Housing Intent
The mandatory landscape-screening requirement in Section 2.10.2 exceeds local authority and is inconsistent with both the intent and the legal framework of California’s ADU statutes and SB 9.

State law (Gov. Code §§ 65852.2, 65852.21) expressly limits local regulation of ADUs and SB 9 units to objective standards that do not “physically preclude” or unreasonably burden the creation of these units. A blanket requirement that homeowners install six-foot fencing or dense landscape screens around an ADU imposes a new development condition that is neither required nor permitted under state law. These mandatory barriers can physically and functionally interfere with accessible circulation between the main home and the ADU—particularly for multigenerational households, caregivers, seniors, and residents with mobility limitations—and therefore conflict with statutory protections guaranteeing feasibility and flexibility in ADU use.

Additionally, privacy treatments are discretionary lifestyle choices, not objective health-andsafety standards, and the ADU statute explicitly prohibits local agencies from imposing subjective design preferences or conditions unrelated to health, safety, or objective development performance. Because family-oriented SB 9 units and ADUs are often intentionally designed for close interaction and visual connection, the City may not mandate screening that forces separation, restricts accessibility, or imposes artificial barriers between the two units. The landscape-screening requirement therefore conflicts with state preemption and should be removed or made optional.

S2.5 Overly Restrictive Driveway Standards That Risk Functioning as a Barrier to SB 9 Housing
The proposed driveway standards are excessively rigid and risk undermining the very feasibility of SB 9 and other ministerial housing projects. Requirements such as fixed width ranges, tightly constrained backup distances, highly prescriptive slope limits, and mandatory turnaround geometries impose a level of precision and site engineering that many small residential lots— especially on Piedmont’s hilly terrain—simply cannot meet without extraordinary cost or physical reshaping of the land. These standards go far beyond what is necessary for safe access and, in practice, function as discretionary design requirements disguised as “objective.” Under SB 9 and state housing law, cities may not create access or circulation standards that effectively preclude development on otherwise eligible parcels. Driveway rules must be reasonably flexible, context-sensitive, and grounded in what typical small-lot residential construction can achieve— not so rigid that they become a de facto barrier to housing production.

S2.18.2 Impossible to Legally Obtain Neighboring Window Property Dimensions in Most Situations
ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 186
The proposed window-placement privacy standard is unworkable in practice and functions as a barrier to SB 9 and ADU production. Requiring applicants to measure horizontal and vertical offsets between new windows and windows on neighboring homes assumes access to precise architectural data that homeowners simply do not have and cannot lawfully obtain. In most cases, applicants cannot enter a neighbor’s property or there are obstacles block the view to measure window locations, sill heights, or framing dimensions, and cities cannot condition ministerial approval on information that applicants have no legal means to collect. SB 9 explicitly prohibits local standards that effectively preclude development, and this requirement—by demanding impossible measurements—creates exactly that outcome.

S 2.19.3 Siding Thickness Standard Does Not Comport with --is Inconsistent with-- Standards to Match Character of Main House or Neighborhood The proposed siding requirement in S.2.19.3 does not reflect the architectural reality of Piedmont’s older homes and would frustrate efforts to create compatible infill. Many historic and pre-war houses in the city use traditional narrow siding profiles—often 3–5 inches exposed— which are a defining feature of their character. Requiring new construction to use a minimum 6- inch exposure forces homeowners into a wider, less traditional look that directly conflicts with the very structures applicants are trying to match. This undermines design compatibility rather than promoting it. Homeowners should be allowed to use narrower siding where it aligns with the existing architectural vocabulary of the neighborhood, rather than being restricted by an inflexible dimension that does not reflect the city’s historic housing stock.

CEQA Should not be Legally Imposed for Ministerial Projects The City must ensure that none of the proposed SB 9 or ADU objective standards function as back-door CEQA requirements, because state law is unambiguous that these projects are ministerial and therefore categorically exempt from CEQA review. Government Code §§65852.21 and 66411.7 require cities to approve qualifying SB 9 projects ministerially, and Public Resources Code §21080(b)(1) makes clear that ministerial actions are not subject to CEQA. Any standard that requires environmental studies, discretionary findings, mitigation analysis, or other CEQA-like procedures would violate state law and undermine the ministerial pathway the Legislature created to deliver small-scale infill housing. For this reason, the City must avoid adopting objective standards that effectively reintroduce CEQA barriers, as even unintentional overreach could place Piedmont in conflict with HCD and the Attorney General’s SB 9 enforcement mandate.

Tribal Consultation Should Not Be Legally Imposed for Ministerial Projects The City should not adopt any standard that requires or implies tribal consultation for SB 9 or ADU applications, as such a process is legally impermissible. Tribal outreach under AB 52 is a CEQA procedure, and CEQA applies only to discretionary actions. SB 9 projects, by statute, must be approved ministerially under Government Code §§65852.21 and 66411.7, which makes them categorically exempt from CEQA and therefore not subject to AB 52. Requiring applicants to contact tribes, obtain responses, or wait for consultation would unlawfully introduce discretion, delay, and third-party review into a ministerial process, directly conflicting with state housing law and HCD guidance. While cities may offer optional courtesy information, they may not mandate tribal outreach as a condition of SB 9 approval.

ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 187
No Biological Report for Ministerial Projects
The City should avoid any requirement—explicit or implied—for a biological resource report or similar environmental analysis as part of an SB 9 or ADU application. Biological assessments are CEQA documents, and CEQA applies only to discretionary approvals. SB 9 projects must be approved ministerially under Government Code §§65852.21 and 66411.7, making them categorically exempt from CEQA under Public Resources Code §21080(b)(1). Requiring a biological survey would unlawfully introduce discretion, delay, professional judgment, and environmental review into a process the Legislature mandated be purely objective and ministerial. For this reason, biological reports cannot be a condition of SB 9 approval and should not appear, directly or indirectly, in the City’s objective standards.

I’m submitting this feedback because it’s in everyone’s interest—including the City’s—to ensure that our objective standards are both legally compliant and genuinely workable. Piedmont can maintain strong design expectations without imposing requirements that conflict with state law or unintentionally limit homeowners’ property rights. My comments are offered to help clarify that balance so the final standards serve the community fairly and predictably.

Sincerely,
/Anonymous Resident/
December 7, 2025, from Gary Z.
(Additional) Comments on proposed “Objective Design Standards” for new homes in Piedmont:

The City has been unable to provide a clear timeline for when the new Objective Standards will be released, revised, or adopted, or even explain how public comments will be processed, incorporated, and re-circulated for review. Applicants need to know when revisions will appear, when these new standards will incorporate the current public comments, and when will final standards be deemed available for public comment. Without this clarity and ability to iterate, the process remains opaque and unworkable.

State law is explicit that SB 9 projects must be reviewed only against objective standards that are publicly available, knowable in advance, and in effect at the time of application. Without firm publication and adoption timelines, Piedmont is effectively creating a moving target that forces applicants to design in the dark—despite the fact that SB 9 projects require months of structural, civil, geotechnical, landscape, utility, and Title-24 preparation. This uncertainty suppresses housing production and directly conflicts with SB 9, the Housing Accountability Act, and SB 330’s prohibition on introducing new standards without clear transition rules. The City must provide applicants with a defined release schedule, an adoption timeline, and a guaranteed transition period, or it risks undermining both public trust and compliance with state housing law.

Piedmont’s must provide a clear timeline for releasing or adopting Objective Standards. State law requires that SB 9 projects be reviewed only against objective standards that are publicly available and knowable before an application is submitted. In reality, preparing an SB 9 project ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 188
is not instantaneous—it requires at least six months and can reach $100,000 of expenses for architectural design, structural engineering, civil plans, soils investigations, utility coordination, landscape documentation, and Title-24 compliance. When the City refuses to publish a firm release schedule, adoption date, or transition window for new standards, it forces applicants to design blindfolded. This uncertainty functions as a barrier to housing production and violates the intent of SB 9, the Housing Accountability Act, and SB 330’s ban on surprise rule changes. The City must provide a defined draft schedule, a clear Council adoption timeline, and a guaranteed transition period of sufficient length—otherwise applicants cannot reasonably plan or invest, and Piedmont risks noncompliance with state housing law.

Thank you
/Anonymous Resident/
December 7, 2025
11/04/2025 Draft Objective Design Standards
Hi Kevin,
I would like to share some of my thoughts with you regarding the most recent version of the City's Design Standards.

I applaud the effort of the City to further develop their Objective Design Standards. The City, its staff and its consultants have come a long way in putting together this 140 page plus document.

Due to the State forcing a housing issue, the City is not in a good place regarding the SB-9 situation. I believe it is unfortunate that the State of California has killed off the historic, discretionary City of Piedmont Design Review Process that has been in place for almost 50 years for a “Streamline Permit" process, or a "By-Right" building process, or a “Builder’s Remedy” or a “Ministerial Review” process. These various fast track processes do not allow neighbors and Piedmont residents, in a public forum, to voice opinions about residential projects that affect a Piedmont citizen’s quality of life. I still can't support the fact that the State has forced this terrible situation upon an older Charter City, like Piedmont, where our City’s hillside terrain may not necessarily support the construction of architecturally rich SB-9 housing projects.

A read of the 11/4/2025 Draft Objective Design Standards in conjunction with the City’s current Division 17.54 “Urban Splits and Two Unit Housing Developments (SB 9) indicates to me that a new SB-9 4 unit development similar to last year’s 210 Howard Avenue Flag Lot proposal would not be granted. Various provisions in the City’s Division 17.54 and the State’s PUC 21155 and PUC 21064.3 sections require that there be one parking space per unit on a SB-9 property. The proposed ODS states that 1 to 4 unit developments grading shall facilitate accessible site circulation (Section 2.3), which will require either a series of ramps or stairs in the 11’ wide flag pole section or driveway area of the property. Another ODS issue that will prevent development of the property is the need for a 12’ wide easement across the lot closest to the street (Section S.2.2.6). Section 2.3.1.a, regarding retaining walls centered on lots, makes the effective width of any driveway either 9 ½ to 10 feet wide. This section also impacts negatively the required 4’ side and rear yard of any SB-9 project. The Vehicular Access and Parking part of the ODS, ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 189
Section 2.5, states that any driveway that exceeds 75’ from Howard Avenue will be required to be either 12’ or 18’ in width, which means getting an easement from neighbors or purchasing 1 foot or 7 feet from neighboring properties. Unfortunately, in regards to the ODS desire to create welcoming places and to enhance the quality of the environment with sustainable landscaping areas (Section 2.10) likely won’t occur in the side and rear yard areas of any SB-9 housing proposed for 210 Howard Avenue. There will be unsightly, shear walls perhaps 35’ in height in any future SB project with no landscape or tree buffering. Section S2.10.5, when discussing Fire code requirements for the Wildland-Urban Interface, states that small trees must be a minimum of 5’ from a building, which would be impossible to achieve when the building is only four feet from the property line. Medium and large trees can’t even be considered in a massive SB-9 project. Neighbors may turn down a request to plant on their property for various, legitimate reasons.

I could go on. I believe the Draft Objective Design Standards is an attempt to come to grips with the mess that the State has gifted to Piedmont and other California Charter Cities. Doing away with an established, well-thought out Discretionary Design Review will only to lessen the wonderful and varied architectural heritage of Piedmont's residential neighborhoods. It is unfortunate that the City must bend to the will of the State on this major issue that affects what gets built in our neighborhoods.

Regards, Bernie Stein
ATTACHMENT D Agenda Report Page 190
Planning & Land Use
17- 1
Chapter 17

PLANNING AND LAND USE
ARTICLE 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

17.02 Title; Intent; City Charter

17.04 Applicability and interpretation

17.06 General requirements

17.08 Establishment of zones; Zoning map; Interpretation ARTICLE 2. ZONING DISTRICTS: USES AND REGULATIONS

17.20 Zone A: Single family residential

17.22 Zone B: Public facilities

17.24 Zone C: Multi-family residential

17.26 Zone D: Commercial and mixed-use

17.28 Zone E: Estate residential
ARTICLE 3. SPECIAL REGULATIONS

17.30 Parking

17.32 Fences; Walls; Retaining walls

17.34 Landscaping

17.36 Signs

17.38 Accessory dwelling units

17.40 Residential rentals

17.42 Additional bedrooms in existing dwelling units

17.44 Home occupations

17.46 Wireless communication facilities

17.48 Cannabis cultivation and facilities

17.50 Non-conforming uses and structures

17.52 Density Bonus

17.54 Urban Lot Splits and Two-Unit Housing Developments (SB 9)

17.56 Emergency Shelters
ARTICLE 4. ADMINISTRATION

17.60 General provisions

17.62 Notice requirements

17.64 Hearings; Review; Term of approval; Conditions

17.66 Design review

17.67 Ministerial Design Review Permits

17.68 Conditional use permits

17.70 Variances

17.72 Zoning amendments

17.74 Development agreements

17.76 Reasonable accommodation

17.78 Appeals; Calls for review

17.80 Enforcement
ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 191
Planning & Land Use
17- 2

ARTICLE 5. DEFINITIONS; MEASUREMENTS

17.90 Definitions & Measurements

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 192
Planning & Land Use
17- 3
ARTICLE 2. ZONING DISTRICTS: USES AND REGULATIONS
Divisions

17.20 Zone A: Single family residential

17.22 Zone B: Public facilities

17.24 Zone C: Multi-family residential

17.26 Zone D: Commercial and mixed-use

17.28 Zone E: Estate residential
DIVISION 17.20 ZONE A: SINGLE FAMILY RESIDENTIAL
Sections:

17.20.010 Intent

17.20.020 Permitted uses

17.20.030 Conditional uses

17.20.040 Regulations

17.20.010 Intent.

Zone A is established for single-family residential and other allowed uses. The intent is to:
• Preserve, maintain, and enhance Piedmont's residential character and the quiet community atmosphere of neighborhoods.
• Mitigate adverse environmental impacts and site constraints, such as excessive noise, light deprivation, incompatible land uses, unsafe overcrowding, obstructed pedestrian and vehicular access and circulation, and blockage of significant views. • Create, maintain, and enhance a living environment that builds community for people of all income levels.
• Maintain openness and areas of vegetation to enhance a healthy environment. • Achieve design compatibility and orderly arrangement of development by establishing regulations for the siting, massing, and building form on properties throughout the zone. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)

17.20.020 Permitted uses.

The following are permitted uses in Zone A:

A. Single-family residence.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 193
Planning & Land Use
17- 4
B. Rented room, subject to section 17.40.020, or short-term rental, subject to a short-term rental permit under section 17.40.030.

C. Accessory dwelling unit, subject to division 17.38.

D. Small family day care home in accordance with California Health and Safety Code sections 1597.43 - 1597.47. (Ord. 742 N.S., 05/2017, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024) E. Religious institution affiliated housing development projects, and religious institution affiliated emergency shelters.

F. Manufactured and mobile homes on a permanent foundation.

G. Low barrier navigation centers.

H. Residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for up to six residents.

I. Residential care facilities or group homes that do not provide licensable services.

J. Supportive housing and transitional housing developments.

K. Accessory structures with accessory uses located on the same lot as the primary structure.

L. Employee housing for 6 or fewer persons. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)

17.20.030 Conditional uses.

The following are allowed in Zone A with a conditional use permit:

A. Religious assembly.

B. Private school, or day care facility associated with a religious assembly use. A pre-existing school not having a use permit may continue as a non-conforming use as long as the use is not expanded.

C. Reservoir.

D. Wireless communication facility, subject to a wireless communication facility permit (rather than a use permit) under division 17.46.

E. Residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for seven or more residents.

F. Large family day care home in accordance with California Health and Safety Code sections 1597.43 - 1597.47. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)
ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 194
Planning & Land Use
17- 5

17.20.040 Regulations.

A. The following development standards apply to the development of all uses in Zone A, except those listed in Section 17.20.040.B:

Zone A requirements
Lot area Minimum 8,000 square feet, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38 or for a lot split under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54.

Frontage, on public or
private street
Minimum 60 feet, subject to an exception for a lot split under SB 9 as set forth in division 17.54.

Lot coverage;
Landscaping
Maximum 40% lot coverage for primary and accessory
structures, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38. (A site feature is not calculated in the lot coverage if (1) the feature is not more than 7 feet height and (2) the total of all site features is 400 square feet or less.)
Minimum 30% landscaping, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38.

Structure height Maximum 35 feet, except accessory dwelling units shall be subject to restrictions set forth in division 17.38.

Street yard setback Minimum 20 feet for primary or accessory structure, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38.

However, structure to support pedestrian and vehicular access, such as retaining walls and driveway bridges, not taller than 8 feet, shall be allowed in the street yard setback.

No minimum setback for a site feature, but a site feature may require a design review permit under division 17.66.

Side yard and
rear yard setback
Minimum 5 feet for a primary or accessory structure, unless the yard is street facing, in which case the minimum is 20 feet, except that a setback of only 4 feet is required for a new structure to be used as an accessory dwelling unit, and no setback is required for conversions of an existing structure to an accessory dwelling unit or portion thereof in the same location and same dimensions.**
However, an accessory structure may be located anywhere within the side and rear setback areas except that it: (a) must be ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 195
Planning & Land Use
17- 6
located within 35 feet of the rear lot line; (b) must be located at least 5 feet from a habitable structure on an abutting property, and, for a corner lot, at least 5 feet from a side lot line of an abutting property to the rear; (c) may not exceed 15 feet in height; and (d) may not be habitable.

A dwelling unit developed under SB 9 is subject to a 4 foot side and rear setback.

A site feature proposed within these distances may require a design review permit under division 17.66.

Floor area ratio* Subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38 or for a dwelling unit developed under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54:

Maximum 55% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,000 square feet or less.

Maximum 50% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,001 square feet to 10,000 square feet.

Maximum 45% of the lot area if the parcel is more than 10,000 square feet.
* In order to encourage development within the existing building envelope instead of building outwards or upwards, the floor area ratio standard is not applied to finishing an area into habitable space if: (1) there is no expansion of the exterior building envelope; and (2) the owner has not obtained a final inspection within the prior three years on a building permit issued for an expansion of the building envelope. (Ordinance 772 N.S., 03/2024) ** Pursuant to Government Code section 65852.2(a)(1)(D)(vii). (Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020, Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)
Please refer to division 17.54 for standards for a lot split and two-unit housing developments performed under SB 9.

B. The development standards for the following uses are as indicated below:
a. Wireless communications facility, as provided in division 17.46. b. Religious institution affiliated housing development projects, as provided in section

17.24.040.A. except that there is no minimum density and maximum allowable density is 21 dwelling units per acre.
c. Reservoir has no applicable development standards.

C. For lots that are larger than 5,000 square feet, an ADU shall be constructed:
a. when a new single-family residence is proposed on a vacant lot. b. when an existing single-family residence is demolished for a remodel or reconstruction, except when a single-family residence is being reconstructed to the same or similar square footage due to damage or destruction by accident, fire, flood, earthquake, or other act of nature. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)
ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 196
Planning & Land Use
17- 7
DIVISION 17.28 ZONE E: ESTATE RESIDENTIAL
Sections:

17.28.010 Intent

17.28.020 Permitted uses

17.28.030 Conditional uses

17.28.040 Regulations

17.28.010 Intent.

Zone E is established for estate residential homes, which tend to be larger lots. The purposes set forth for Zone A also apply to Zone E.

17.28.020 Permitted uses:

The following are permitted uses in Zone E:

A. Single-family residence.

B. Rented room, subject to section 17.40.020, or short-term rental, subject to a short-term rental permit under section 17.40.030.

C. Accessory dwelling unit, subject to division 17.38.

D. Small family day care home in accordance with California Health and Safety Code sections 1597.43 - 1597.47.

E. Manufactured and mobile homes on a permanent foundation.

F. Low barrier navigation centers.

G. Residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for up to six residents.

H. Residential care facilities or group homes that do not provide licensable services.

I. Supportive housing and transitional housing developments.

J. Accessory structures with accessory uses located on the same lot as the primary structures under this section.

K. Employee housing for 6 or fewer persons. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)

17.28.030 Conditional uses.

The following are allowed as conditional uses in Zone E:

A. Wireless communication facility, subject to a wireless communication facility permit (rather than a use permit) under division 17.46.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 197
Planning & Land Use
17- 8
B. Residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for seven or more residents.

C. Large family day care home in accordance with California Health and Safety Code sections 1597.43 - 1597.47. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)

17.28.040 Regulations.

A. The following development standards apply to the development of all uses in Zone E, except those listed in Section 17.28.040.B.:

Zone E requirements
Lot area Minimum 20,000 square feet, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38 or for a lot split under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54 Frontage, on public or
private street
Minimum 120 feet, subject to an exception for a lot split under SB 9 as set forth in division 17.54
Lot coverage;
landscaping
Subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38:

Maximum 40% lot coverage for primary and accessory
structures. (A site feature is not calculated in the lot coverage if (1) the feature is not more than 7 feet height and (2) the total of all site features is 400 square feet or less.)
Minimum 40% landscaping.

Structure height Maximum 35 feet, except accessory dwelling units shall be subject to restrictions set forth in division 17.38.

Street yard setback Minimum 20 feet for primary and accessory structure, subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38.

However, structure to support pedestrian and vehicular access, such as retaining walls and driveway bridges, no taller than 8 feet, shall be allowed in the street yard setback.

No minimum setback for a site feature, but a site feature may require a design review permit, under division 17.66.

Side yard and
rear yard setback
Minimum 20 feet for primary or accessory structure, unless the yard is street facing, in which case the minimum is 20 feet, except that a setback of only 4 feet is required for a new structure to be used as an accessory dwelling unit, and no setback is required for conversions of an existing structure to an accessory dwelling unit or portion thereof in the same location and same dimensions.**
However, an accessory structure not to be used as an accessory dwelling unit may be located anywhere within the side and rear setback areas except that it: (a) must be located within 35 feet of the rear lot line; (b) must be located at least 5 feet from a habitable structure on an abutting property, and, for a corner ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 198
Planning & Land Use
17- 9
lot, at least 5 feet from a side lot line of an abutting property to the rear; (c) may not exceed 15 feet in height; and (d) may not be habitable. These distance requirements for an accessory structure also apply to a garage or carport attached to a primary structure.

No minimum setback for a site feature, but a site feature may require a design review permit under division 17.66.

A dwelling unit developed under SB 9 is subject to a 4 foot side and rear setback.

Floor area ratio* Subject to exception for accessory dwelling unit construction set forth in division 17.38, or for a dwelling unit developed under SB 9 set forth in division 17.54:

Maximum 55% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,000 square feet or less.

Maximum 50% of the lot area if the parcel is 5,001 square feet to 10,000 square feet.

Maximum 45% of the lot area if the parcel is more than 10,000 square feet.
* In order to encourage development within the existing building envelope instead of building outwards or upwards, the floor area ratio standard is not applied to finishing an area into habitable space if: (1) there is no expansion of the exterior building envelope; and (2) the owner has not obtained a final inspection within the prior three years on a building permit issued for an expansion of the building envelope. ** Pursuant to Government Code section 65852.2(a)(1)(D)(vii). (Ord. 743 N.S., 05/2018, Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020, Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024) Please refer to division 17.54 for standards for a lot split and two-unit housing developments performed under SB 9.

B. In Zone E, for uses other than those listed above, the development standards are as follows:

1. Wireless communications facility as provided in division 17.46.

C. For lots that are larger than 5,000 square feet, an ADU shall be constructed:
a. when a new single-family residence is proposed on a vacant lot. b. when an existing single-family residence is demolished for a remodel or reconstruction, except when a single-family residence is being reconstructed to the same or similar square footage due to damage or destruction by accident, fire, flood, earthquake, or other act of nature. (Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 199
Planning & Land Use
17- 10
ARTICLE 3. SPECIAL REGULATIONS
Divisions:

17.30 Parking

17.32 Fences; Trash enclosures; Corner obstructions

17.34 Landscaping

17.36 Signs

17.38 Accessory dwelling units

17.40 Residential Rentals

17.42 (Not used)

17.44 Home occupations

17.46 Wireless communications

17.48 Cannabis cultivation and facilities

17.50 Non-conforming uses and structures
DIVISION 17.30 PARKING
Sections:

17.30.010 Single family residential and similar use (All zones)

17.30.020 Multi-family residential and similar group residential use (Zones A, B, C and D)

17.30.030 Commercial use and mixed-use residential/commercial (Zone D)

17.30.040 Location of parking spaces

17.30.050 Size and specifications

17.30.060 No reduction of existing parking

17.30.070 Compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

17.30.010 Single family residential and similar use. (All zones) A. Applicability. This section 17.30.010 applies to the following uses: single-family residential, small and large family day care homes, manufactured and mobile homes, low barrier navigation centers, supportive and transitional housing, residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for up to 6 residents, residential care facilities or group homes that do not provide licensable services, and employee housing for up to 6 employees, and development projects under division 17.54 in any zone:

1. new development; and

2. existing development (which may be nonconforming under division 17.50), when an applicant seeks a building permit or land use approval for an improvement or change that may affect the need for parking. Exceeding certain underlying zoning regulations as indicated in the table in section 17.30.010.B.1 or an increase in the intensity of use will ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 200
Planning & Land Use
17- 11
affect the need for parking. Existing street width and existing demand for on-street parking are factors in considering the intensity of use.

B. Regulations.

1. General.

Dwelling Unit Minimum number of off-street, covered, nontandem parking spaces Accessory dwelling unit (division

17.38)
0*
New primary unit** 800 square feet
or less
1 New primary unit** greater than 800
square feet
2 Primary unit that exceeds FAR, lot
coverage or structure height of the
underlying zone
1 additional parking space; for a maximum total
of 3 parking spaces.

SB-9 development (division 17.54) 1 per primary unit. If the parcel is located within one-half mile walking distance of either a highquality transit corridor as defined in subdivision (b) of Section 21155 of the Public Resources
Code, or a major transit stop as defined in
Section 21064.3 of the Public Resources Code,
then parking is not required for the new primary
unit.

Additional parking spaces for a unit can be
stacked or tandem.
* Under Government Code section 65852.2, the city may not require parking for an accessory dwelling unit located within 1/2 mile of public transit, and all Piedmont properties are within 1/2 mile.
** primary unit refers to single family residence, small and large family day care homes, manufactured and mobile homes, low barrier navigation centers, supportive and transitional housing, residential care facilities or group homes that provide licensable services for up to 6 residents, residential care facilities or group homes that do not provide licensable services, and employee housing for up to 6 employees.

2. Parking spaces may not be located within a 20-foot street setback.

3. When considering an application, the city may strictly apply the parking regulations under subsection B.1 above if the proposed construction will have an undue adverse impact on neighborhood vehicular congestion. A determination of undue adverse impact must be based on evidence considering one or more of the following factors: existing street width; existing on-street parking conditions; lack of sidewalks; and street slope and curvature. (Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)
ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 201
Planning & Land Use
17- 12

17.30.020 Multi-family residential and similar group residential use. (Zones A, B, C and D).

A. Applicability. This section applies to each multi-family and similar group residential use in Zones A, B, C and D, including but not limited to: large family day care home, residential care facilities or group homes the provide licensable services for more than 7 residents, single-room occupancy, co-housing, multi-family residential, senior housing, housing for persons with disabilities, and religious institution affiliated housing.

Minimum number of off-street covered parking spaces
Accessory dwelling unit
(division 17.38)
0*
Multi-family development,
Independent living senior
housing, independent
living disabled persons
housing
1 space per
studio or 1
bedroom
unit
Exception: Planning Commission shall
reduce to 50% of required spaces when:
a. Development is within ½ mile of
regularly scheduled public transit stop;
and
b. At least 50% of units are deedrestricted for a period of 55 years to low-income households.

1.5 space
per 2 or
morebedroom
unit
Licensed residential
facility or group home for
7 or more residents
1 space per bedroom
Single room occupancies
or co-housing
1 space per bedroom
Exception: Planning Commission shall reduce to 50% of
required spaces when:
a. Development is within ½ mile of regularly scheduled
public transit stop; and
b. At least 50% of units are deed-restricted for a period of 55 years to low-income individuals.

Religious institution
affiliated housing
as provided in Section 65913.6 of the Government Code
Senior housing, disabled
persons housing (Assisted
Living)

0.5 space
per studio or
1 bedroom
unit
Additionally, 1 parking space for each
employee on-site at peak staffing.

0.75 space
per 2 or
morebedroom
unit
* Under Government Code section 65852.2, the city may not require parking for an accessory dwelling unit located within 1/2 mile of public transit, and all Piedmont properties are within 1/2 mile.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 202
Planning & Land Use
17- 13
(Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020, Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)
B. Additional Parking. Guest or management parking shall be provided for all development types under this section with the exception of accessory dwelling units and religious institution affiliated housing development.

Guest or management
Parking
1 space plus an additional parking space for every 10
dwelling units. Exception: Planning Commission shall
reduce to 50% of required spaces when:
a. Development is within ½ mile of regularly scheduled
public transit stop; and
b. At least 50% of units are deed-restricted for a period of 55 years to low-income households.
(Ord. 772 N.S., 03/2024)

17.30.030 Commercial use and mixed-use residential/commercial. (Zone D).

A. Residential uses in mixed use commercial/residential: same as provided in section

17.30.020.

B. Commercial uses:

Use Type Minimum number of off-street, covered, nontandem parking spaces per floor area First 1,500 square
feet
In excess of 1,500 square
feet
Eating places and similar, highintensity on premise customer uses
Each 500 square feet:
1 1
Each 250 square feet: 11
Retail stores, offices, and other
low-intensity uses
Each 750 square feet:
1 1
Each 350 square feet: 11
1Or as required by conditional use permit. (Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020) C. Shared Parking: At least 80% of the total residential parking spaces within a mixed-use development parking arrangement (parking garage or surface parking) shall be dedicated to residential uses. The remaining residential parking spaces can be shared between commercial and residential uses.

17.30.040 Location of parking spaces.

A. Parking for a permitted use in any zone must be located: (1) on the same lot as the permitted use; and (2) not within the street setback in zZones A, B and E; and (3) not between the streetfacing facade of a building and the lot line in Zone D. Parking for a conditional use in any zone will be provided as required by the conditional use permit authorizing the use.

B. In Zones A and E, the parking of vehicles between the street-facing façade of a building and a lot line is prohibited, except for the parking of vehicles on driveways, parking pads and within parking structures.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 203
Planning & Land Use
17- 14

17.30.050 Size and specifications.

Except as otherwise provided, a parking space required by this section must have unrestricted access to a public street with a grade not more than 20%. In Zone A, one of every three required parking spaces may be for a compact car, and in Zones C and D, one of every four required parking spaces may be for a compact car.

The minimum parking space dimensions are:
8-1/2 feet x 18 feet, or
7-1/2 feet x 15 feet for compact car.

A minimum 1-foot clearance must be provided between the length side of a parking space and the nearest wall or similar obstruction. (Ord. 743 N.S., 05/2018)

17.30.060 No reduction of existing parking.

Except for (1) the demolition of a garage, carport, uncovered parking space, or covered parking structure in conjunction with the construction of an accessory dwelling unit, or (2) conversion of a garage, carport, uncovered parking space, or covered parking structure for use as an accessory dwelling unit, no person may alter, eliminate, or restrict access to an existing parking space unless the Planning Director first determines that the space is (1) unusable, (2) is to be restored or replaced with a parking space which meets the requirements of this division 17.30, or (3) is permitted with a variance approved by the Planning Commission or City Council. For purposes of making this determination, the term unusable means that the parking space is not large enough to contain a compact-sized automobile or that the driveway to the parking space is so steep, narrow or otherwise configured that it precludes safe passage of the vehicle, and that enlargement to permit safe passage would result in severe economic hardship.

No garage or other off-street parking may be altered for a use other than parking, unless otherwise allowed under this chapter. (Ord. 777 N.S., 01/2025)

17.30.070 Compliance with American with Disabilities Act (ADA).

The Chief Building Official may adjust the parking requirements in zones B, C or D without a conditional use permit or design review permit, to meet the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 204
Planning & Land Use
17- 15
DIVISION 17.32 FENCES; TRASH ENCLOSURES; CORNER

OBSTRUCTIONS
Sections:

17.32.010 Fence, wall, retaining wall, hedge, terracing

17.32.020 Trash enclosure

17.32.030 Corner obstructions

17.32.010 Fence, wall, retaining wall, terracing.

A fence, wall, retaining wall, or terracing is subject to these height limit and design review permit requirements:

Height, measured from exiting or proposed grade; Design review permit requirement
Retaining wall, with or without
guardrail
Maximum 30 inches. (No design review permit required.)
If more than 30 inches, requires a design review permit under division 17.66.

Fence, wall, or a combination
of either with a retaining wall
within 24 inches
Within street setback Requires a design review permit under division 17.66 for any height.

Other areas If 6 feet or less: exempt from design review permit.

If more than 6 feet high, requires a design review permit, under division 17.66.

If more than 8 feet high, requires a design review permit, under division 17.66, with notification requirements of division 17.62.

Up to 8 feet tall allowed in Zones C and D when property line is shared with single-family uses or lots in Zone A, C or Din all zones.

Retaining wall under SB 9 for
Zones A and E
Within street setback Up to 8 feet tall to support pedestrian and vehicular egress and ingress needs such as driveways and entry pathways.

Other Areas Maximum of 5 feet.

Trash enclosure (See general requirements in subsection B.1, below.) Within street setback No building permit or design review permit required if the enclosure complies with section 17.32.020, subsections A and B below. Otherwise requires design review permit under division

17.66. Other areas No building permit or design review permit required if the enclosure complies with section 17.32.020 B below.

Terracing Design review is not required if a series of one or more retaining walls and fences, at least 24 inches apart, on a single slope is designed so that no single wall or fence exceeds the height limits in this subsection.
(Ord. 743 N.S., 05/2018)

17.32.020 Trash enclosure.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 205
Planning & Land Use
17- 16
A. General requirement. A trash enclosure must be:

1. a solid fence, wall, or combination of fence and retaining wall at least four feet in height and up to six feet in height; or

2. an open fence up to six feet in height in combination with dense, evergreen landscaping at least four feet in height at maturity and up to any height; or

3. dense, evergreen landscaping at least four feet in height at maturity and up to any height.

B. Standards. A design review permit is not required, but a trash enclosure within a street setback will be reviewed at the planning counter for compliance with this chapter and the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines (Trash Enclosures). The enclosure must be:

1. located as far away from the street as possible;

2. as small as is necessary to enclose the carts;

3. as low in height as necessary to adequately screen the carts; and

4. designed in compliance with the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines. (Ord. 769 N.S., 10/2023)

17.32.030 Corner obstructions.

No fence, wall, retaining wall, hedge, or vegetation may be erected or grown in the front or street side yard of a corner lot to a height of more than three feet within the sight distance zone, a triangular area formed by measuring 30 feet along the front and side lot lines along the right-ofway from their “extended” intersection and connecting these two points, or as otherwise may be approved by the Planning Commission.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 206
Planning & Land Use
17- 17
DIVISION 17.34 LANDSCAPING.

Section:

17.34.010 Intent

17.34.020 Landscape plans

17.34.030 Decision

17.34.040 Requirements

17.34.050 Completion

17.34.060 Maintenance

17.34.010 Intent.

The regulations in this division are intended to maintain and enhance the city's residential character, preserve the architectural heritage, protect the city's natural beauty and visual character, improve property values, and prevent blighted areas.

17.34.020 Landscape plans.

A. When required.

1. An applicant must include landscape plans in an application for a conditional use permit, design review permit, or variance for a new residence or other building.

2. The Planning Director, Planning Commission or City Council may request that an applicant prepare landscape plans with an application for a building permit, conditional use permit, design review permit, wireless communications facility, or variance for improvements which substantially disturb the site.

B. Application fee. The fee for approval of a landscape plan is included in the fee for the accompanying application as provided in section 17.60.040.

C. Contents. Plans must clearly set forth the areas and types of existing and proposed landscaping, and their relation to the structure(s) requiring the approval or permit. Landscaping must conform to Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines as well as any state regulations, including the California Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance (23 Cal. Code of Regulations Division 2, Chapter 2.7).
(Ord. 769 N.S., 10/2023)

17.34.030 Decision.

The decision-making body for the accompanying application will take action on the landscape plan, at the same time and in the same manner as that required for the underlying application.

That body may modify the design and attach conditions as appropriate to assure compliance with this division. The conditions may include installation of an irrigation system.

The applicant may appeal a decision on the landscape plan under division 17.78, Appeals.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 207
Planning & Land Use
17- 18

17.34.040 Requirements.

The minimum dimensions and areas for landscaping are set forth in the regulations for each zoning district.

A residential property owner must landscape all required street setback areas, except for areas paved for ingress and egress. This requirement does not apply to a mixed use or multifamily development.

17.34.050 Completion.

The applicant must complete the landscaping to the satisfaction of the Planning Director and/or Chief Building Official. The city may require a cash deposit or letter of credit to assure completion. If required, the city will release the financial security in increments proportionate to the progress of landscape completion. The city may withhold final approval of a project until landscaping is completed.

17.34.060 Maintenance.

All landscaped areas required here or as a condition of approval must be planted with living materials, and if mulch is used it must be made from organic material. The landscaped area must be maintained in a healthy and attractive state, with irrigation, weeding, and replacement as needed. The decision-maker may, as a condition of approval of any landscaping, require execution of a contract for the maintenance of the landscaping.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 208
Planning & Land Use
17- 19
DIVISION 17.38 ACCESSORY DWELLING UNITS
Sections

17.38.010 Purpose and intent

17.38.020 Definitions

17.38.030 Legal accessory dwelling units; Non-conforming accessory dwelling units; Requirements for rented accessory dwelling units

17.38.040 Permit requirement

17.38.050 Permit application and review procedures

17.38.060 Zoning regulations; Accessory dwelling unit development standards; Junior accessory; dwelling unit development standards; Projects subject to state mandated approval

17.38.070 Accessory dwelling unit size exception

17.38.075 Pre-approved Plans Incentive

17.38.080 Unpermitted accessory and junior accessory dwelling unit

17.38.090 Removal of Owner Occupancy Restrictions

17.38.100 Separate conveyance

17.38.010 Purpose and intent.

The State Legislature has declared that accessory dwelling units are a valuable form of housing in California. Accessory dwelling units provide housing for family members, students, the elderly, in-home health care providers, the disabled, and others, at below market prices, and within existing neighborhoods. Homeowners who create accessory dwelling units benefit from added income, and an increased sense of security. (Gov't. Code § 65852.150.) The city has a long history of various types of accessory dwelling units. By enacting this division

17.38, the City Council intends to:

A. Establish the requirements for accessory dwelling units and junior accessory dwelling units in the city, consistent with California Government Code section 65852.2 and 65852.22; B. Encourage the use of existing accessory dwelling units and the construction of new accessory dwelling units, consistent with this Division; C. Help achieve the goals and policies of the General Plan Housing Element by encouraging a mix of housing types affordable to all economic segments of the community; and D. Clarify the requirements for the various kinds of accessory dwelling units in the city. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023)

17.38.020 Definitions.

In this division 17.38, the following definitions apply, in addition to the definitions set forth in division 17.90:

Accessory dwelling unit means an attached or a detached residential dwelling unit that provides complete independent living facilities for one or more persons and is located on a lot with a ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 209
Planning & Land Use
17- 20
proposed or existing primary residence. It shall include permanent provisions for living, sleeping, eating, cooking, and sanitation on the same parcel as the single-family or multi-family dwelling is or will be situated. An accessory dwelling unit may also include (1) an efficiency unit, as defined in Health and Safety Code section 17958.1 and (2) a manufactured home as defined in Health and Safety Code section 18007. (Formerly called second dwelling unit. See section 17.38.030 for types of accessory dwelling units and permits.) (Ord. 769 N.S., 10/2023)
Affordable housing definitions:

Affordable Rent Level means that the accessory dwelling unit household’s monthly cost of rent, plus the cost of electricity, gas, water and sewer service, and garbage collection (“utilities”) is 30% or less than the upper limit of the annual gross household income, divided by 12, for a specified income category and household size as last published by the California Department of Housing and Community Development (HCD). The City shall determine maximum affordable rent levels for rent-restricted accessory dwelling units following the annual publication of the State Income Limits by HCD. In determining rent levels, the household size for rent-restricted accessory dwelling units shall be: studio, 1 person; one-bedroom, 2 persons; two-bedroom, 3 persons; and, three-bedroom, 4 persons. The cost of utilities for the accessory dwelling unit shall be included in the affordable rent level. For rent-restricted accessory dwelling units where utilities are separately metered and billed, and where the accessory dwelling unit household is responsible for the costs of that household’s use of utilities, the maximum rent shall be set at 90% of the affordable rent level. (California Health and Safety Code section 50053) Affordable unit means a dwelling unit for sale or rent that meets the California State Department of Housing and Community Development standards of income eligibility and affordable rent levels for Alameda County. (Health and Safety Code sections 50052.5(h) and 50053.) Gross Household Income means the total monies earned or received by all occupants of an accessory dwelling unit age 18 and over, including: wages and all types of compensation, before any payroll deductions; spousal and child support; social security, retirement, disability, insurance, and other types of periodic payments; unemployment compensation and other payments in-lieu of earnings; welfare and other public assistance; interest, dividends and other payments generated from any real or personal property; net business income; and, any other type of payment determined to qualify as income by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and as published in HUD’s Housing Choice Voucher Program Guidebook.

The annual gross household income is calculated by multiplying the monthly amounts earned or received at the time of certification by 12 and adjusting for anticipated payments and changes in amounts over the next 12 months.

Household means those persons who collectively occupy a housing unit. A household shall include any child or dependent, as defined Internal Revenue Code section 152, who is under the age of 18 or who is under the age of 24 and is a full-time student.

Household Size means the number of persons in a household.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 210
Planning & Land Use
17- 21
Household, Extremely Low Income means a household with an annual gross household income of 30% or less than the Alameda County median annual gross household income for that household size as last published by HCD. (Health and Safety Code section 50079.5.) Household, Low Income means a household with an annual gross household income between 50% and 80% of the Alameda County median annual gross household income for that household size as last published by HCD. (Health and Safety Code section 50079.5.) Household, Moderate Income means a household with an annual gross household income between 80% and 120% of the Alameda County median annual gross household income for that household size as last published by HCD. (Health and Safety Code section 50093) Household, Very Low Income means a household with an annual gross household income between 30% and 50% of the Alameda County median annual gross household income for that household size as last published by HCD. (Health and Safety Code section 50079.5.) Junior accessory dwelling unit means a unit that is no more than 500 square feet in size and contained within a single-family residence, with a separate entrance. A junior accessory dwelling unit may include separate sanitation facilities, or may share sanitation facilities with the existing structure, but shall include an efficiency kitchen that provides for a cooking facility with appliances and a food preparation counter and storage cabinets that are of reasonable size in relation to the size of the junior accessory dwelling unit.

Primary unit means a principal, permitted single-family or multi-family dwelling. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023; Ord. 769 N.S., 10/2023)

17.38.030 Legal accessory dwelling units; Non-conforming accessory dwelling units; Requirements for rented accessory dwelling units.

A. Legal accessory dwelling units.

The following are kinds of legal accessory dwelling units and permits. Each may be used and rented (subject to the business tax for rental property):

1. Accessory dwelling unit permit. An accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit permitted under an accessory dwelling unit permit is a legally existing accessory dwelling unit. (This includes an accessory dwelling unit approved subject to a variance and an accessory dwelling unit approved subject to exceptions and rent-restrictions, both under section 17.38.070.) If the unit is rent-restricted, then a tenant must be qualified by income level under the permit conditions of approval and the terms of the recorded declaration.

2. Second unit permit. A second unit permit issued before December 31, 2016 is a legal accessory dwelling unit.

3. Conditional use permit second unit. Between January 19, 1994 and July 1, 2003, second units were approved by conditional use permit. A second unit permitted under a conditional use permit during that period of time is a legal accessory dwelling unit.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 211
Planning & Land Use
17- 22

4. Exempt accessory dwelling unit. If an accessory dwelling unit was established before 1930, and the City has confirmed the exempt status in writing, the accessory dwelling unit is a legally existing accessory dwelling unit.

5. Temporary use permit second unit. A temporary use permit second unit approved by the City between May 6, 1987 and July 1, 2003, under former Chapter 17D, is a legal accessory dwelling unit (and the temporary nature now recognized as permanent).

Any accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit that is not established pursuant to one of the above categories shall not be a legal accessory dwelling unit, except as may be specifically permitted under Government Code section 65852.23.

B. Non-conforming accessory dwelling units. A legal, non-conforming unit may not be modified or expanded except in compliance with division 17.50, Nonconforming buildings and uses.

C. Requirements for legal accessory dwelling units that are rented. If an accessory dwelling unit is rented to a tenant, these additional requirements apply:

1. Business tax. An accessory dwelling unit that is rented is subject to an annual business tax for rental property, under City Code chapter 10.

2. Rent restrictions. An accessory dwelling unit that has rent restrictions under the conditions of approval and recorded declaration(s) must be rented in accordance with those limitations. (See section 17.38.070.) (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023)

17.38.040 Permit requirement.

A. Accessory dwelling unit permit. An accessory dwelling unit permit is required for construction of an accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit or the modification of exterior features, size, or height of an existing accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit.

B. Building permit. A building permit shall be required for construction or modification of an accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit as set forth in the California Residential Code and other building standards adopted by the City. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023)

17.38.050 Permit application and review procedures.

A. Application.

1. Application. An owner may apply for an accessory dwelling unit permit (or other city approval) by submitting a complete application to the Director on a form provided by the city.

2. Application fee. The owner shall pay an application fee in the amount established by City Council resolution.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 212
Planning & Land Use
17- 23
B. Ministerial review. The Director shall review each application ministerially to determine if the development standards in section 17.38.060 are met, and shall within 60 days of a completed application approve or deny the application, except if the application to create an accessory dwelling unit or a junior accessory dwelling unit is submitted with an application to create a new single-family or multi-family dwelling on the lot, the Director shall delay acting on the permit application for the accessory dwelling unit or the junior accessory dwelling unit until permits for the new single-family or multi-family dwelling are approved. The Director will review the application without notice or public hearing. The time period for review may be tolled at the request of the applicant.

C. Decision and conditions. The Director shall render a decision in writing and shall state the reasons for approval or denial. The decision of the Director shall be final. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023)

17.38.060 Zoning regulations; Accessory dwelling unit development standards; Junior accessory dwelling unit development standards; Projects subject to state mandated approval.

A. Zoning regulations. A proposed accessory dwelling unit must comply with the zoning regulations for the district in which it is located, subject to the requirements or exclusions in this section. (See divisions 17.20 through 17.28.)
B. Accessory dwelling unit development standards. An accessory dwelling unit shall comply with all of the following development standards, except the Director may grant an exception to the unit maximum size restriction under section 17.38.070.

1. Size. An attached accessory dwelling unit may not exceed 50% of the existing living area up to a maximum of 850 square feet, or 1,000 square feet if the accessory dwelling unit will include more than one bedroom, except where a restriction to 50% of existing living area would result in a maximum size of less than 800 square feet, an attached accessory dwelling unit of no more than 800 square feet shall be permitted, subject to the zoning regulations and development standards in this section. A detached accessory dwelling unit may not exceed 850 square feet, or 1,000 square feet if the accessory dwelling unit will include more than one bedroom. The minimum floor area for an accessory dwelling unit shall be 150 square feet. The total floor area for a detached accessory dwelling unit shall not exceed 1,200 square feet.

2. Access. The accessory dwelling unit must have independent, exterior access.

3. Subdivision. No subdivision of land is authorized that would result in an accessory dwelling unit being located on a separate parcel, unless each parcel meets all of the zoning requirements for the zoning district in which it is located.

4. Building Height. A detached accessory dwelling unit shall not exceed a building height of 18 feet. An additional height of two feet for a detached accessory dwelling unit shall ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 213
Planning & Land Use
17- 24
be allowed to accommodate a roof pitch that is aligned with the roof pitch of the primary dwelling unit. An attached accessory dwelling unit shall not exceed a building height of 25 feet or the height limitations for a primary dwelling unit of the underlying zoning district, whichever is lower.

5. Design Criteria. The design of the structure(s) housing the proposed accessory dwelling unit must meet applicable objective design criteria in the Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines and any additional design standards applicable to accessory dwelling units approved by the City Council resolution.

6. Limitations on city's approval. Under Government Code section 66314, or any successor statute, the following limitations apply to any city approval:
a. Parking. When a garage, carport, uncovered parking space or covered parking structure is demolished in conjunction with the construction of an accessory dwelling unit or converted to an accessory dwelling unit, the City shall not require the replacement of off-street parking spaces.
b. Side and Rear Setbacks. No setback is required to construct an accessory dwelling unit within an existing structure that is converted to an accessory dwelling unit or a new structure constructed in the same location and the same dimension as an existing structure. If an accessory dwelling unit is not converted from an existing structure, the minimum setback is four feet from the side and rear lot line. c. Street Yard Setback. Accessory dwelling units of 800 square feet or less can be constructed in the street yard setback only if it is determined by the Director that there is no other configuration on the property that would allow for the construction of an 800 square foot accessory dwelling unit outside the four feet side and rear setbacks and in compliance with all other standards in this section, including height limits. d. Fire sprinklers. Accessory dwelling units shall not be required to have fire sprinklers if they are not required for the primary residence. The construction of an accessory dwelling unit shall not trigger a requirement for fire sprinklers to be installed in any other existing dwelling. Fire sprinklers shall be considered “required for the primary dwelling unit” in any of the following circumstances:
i. When fire sprinklers are currently installed in the primary dwelling unit; or ii. When fire sprinklers will be installed in a new primary dwelling unit constructed concurrently with an accessory dwelling unit. e. Passageway. No passageway will be required.
f. Minimum lot area or lot size. Notwithstanding anything in divisions 17.20 through

17.28, no minimum lot area or lot size shall be imposed with respect to the approval of permits for an accessory dwelling unit.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 214
Planning & Land Use
17- 25
g. Floor Area Ratio, Lot Coverage, and Landscaping.
i. Lot coverage. An accessory dwelling unit eight hundred (800) square feet in floor area or less, shall have no maximum lot coverage. Maximum lot coverage for an accessory dwelling unit greater than eight hundred (800) square feet in floor area shall be that of the underlying zoning district.
ii. Landscaping. An accessory dwelling unit eight hundred (800) square feet in floor area or less, shall have no minimum landscape area. Minimum landscape area for an accessory dwelling unit greater than eight hundred (800) square feet in floor area shall be that of the underlying zoning district.
iii. Floor Area Ratio. An accessory dwelling unit eight hundred (800) square feet in floor area or less, shall have no maximum floor area ratio requirement. Maximum floor area ratio for an accessory dwelling unit greater than eight hundred (800) square feet in floor area shall be that of the underlying zoning district. h. Certificate of Occupancy. The building official shall not issue a certificate of occupancy for an accessory dwelling unit before issuance of a certificate of occupancy for the primary dwelling or multi-family dwelling. i. Utility Connections. For an accessory dwelling unit described in section

17.38.060.D.1, the accessory dwelling unit shall not be required to install a new or separate utility connection directly between the accessory dwelling unit and the utility, and the accessory dwelling unit shall not be subject to a related connection fee or capacity charge, unless the accessory dwelling unit is constructed concurrently with a new single-family dwelling.

7. An ADU or JADU shall not be permitted on a lot created pursuant to Government Code Sections 65852.28 and 66499.41, as they may be amended from time to time.

C. Junior accessory dwelling unit development standards.

1. General provisions. The following provisions shall apply to junior accessory dwelling units:
a. A junior accessory dwelling shall not be constructed unless a single-family dwelling unit exists on a site and such single-family dwelling unit has been constructed lawfully, or the junior accessory dwelling unit is proposed as part of the construction of the single-family dwelling unit. A junior accessory dwelling unit shall be a permitted use in any lot zoned to allow a single-family residential use. b. No lot shall contain more than one (1) junior accessory dwelling unit.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 215
Planning & Land Use
17- 26
c. A junior accessory dwelling unit shall be constructed within the existing space of the proposed or existing single-family dwelling, however, an expansion of not more than one hundred fifty (150) square feet beyond the same physical dimensions of the existing space of a single-family dwelling shall be permitted for purposes of accommodating ingress and egress. For purposes of this provision, enclosed uses within the residence, such as attached garages, are considered a part of the proposed or existing single-family residence.
d. A junior accessory dwelling unit shall not be sold or otherwise conveyed separate from the single-family dwelling unit.
e. A junior accessory dwelling unit shall have an exterior point of access directly into the junior accessory dwelling unit that is separate and independent from the singlefamily dwelling unit. f. A building permit shall be required to construct a junior accessory dwelling unit or to establish a junior accessory dwelling unit within the existing space of a single-family dwelling. Occupancy of a junior accessory dwelling unit shall be prohibited until the junior accessory dwelling unit receives a successful final inspection pursuant to a valid building permit and receives a certificate of occupancy issued on or after the date of the successful final inspection.
g. A junior accessory dwelling unit that shares a bathroom with the existing or proposed single-family dwelling unit shall provide an interior entry to the existing or proposed single-family dwelling unit’s “main living area”.

2. Development standards. The following provisions shall apply to junior accessory dwelling units:
a. A junior accessory dwelling unit shall not be considered a separate or a new dwelling unit for purposes of applying building or fire codes. Installation of fire sprinklers in a junior accessory dwelling unit of any type shall be required only if they are required for the primary dwelling unit. Fire sprinklers shall be considered "required for the primary dwelling unit” under the circumstances as specified in section

17.38.060.B.6.d.
b. The minimum floor area for a junior accessory dwelling unit shall be 150 square feet. c. The maximum floor area for a junior accessory dwelling unit shall not exceed fivehundred square feet. If the sanitation facility is shared with the remainder of the single-family dwelling, it shall not be included in the square footage calculation for the junior accessory dwelling unit.
d. Setbacks for a junior accessory dwelling unit constructed with a new single-family dwelling shall be that of the underlying zoning district. No setback shall be required for a junior accessory dwelling unit contained within the existing space of a singleATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 216 Planning & Land Use
17- 27
family dwelling or accessory structure. However, as permitted in this section, an expansion to an accessory structure of up to one hundred fifty (150) square feet to accommodate ingress and egress may be constructed only if the following setbacks are maintained:
i. a street yard setback accordance with the applicable zoning district. ii. a minimum side yard setback of four feet.
iii. a minimum rear yard setback of four feet.
e. No parking shall be required for a junior accessory dwelling unit. f. No lot coverage or landscaping requirement shall apply to a junior accessory dwelling unit.
g. No height restriction shall apply to a junior accessory dwelling unit. h. A junior accessory dwelling unit shall not be required to install a new or separate utility connection directly between the junior accessory dwelling unit and the utility. i. A junior accessory dwelling unit may be constructed on a site that does not meet the minimum lot or parcel size requirements or minimum dimensional requirements of the underlying zoning district, provided that it is constructed in compliance with all building standards and other standards of this division. j. An expansion to an accessory structure of up to one hundred fifty (150) square feet to accommodate ingress and egress for a proposed junior accessory dwelling unit must meet applicable design criteria in the Piedmont Objective Design Standards Standards and Guidelines. This 150-square-foot of expansion can include removal of an uncovered parking space.
k. An ADU or JADU shall not be permitted on a lot created pursuant to Government Code Sections 65852.28 and 66499.41, as they may be amended from time to time.

3. Use Restrictions. The following restrictions shall apply to junior accessory dwelling units:
a. The City shall record a deed restriction with the County Recorder Office. The deed restriction shall prohibit the sale or other conveyance of the junior accessory dwelling unit separate from the single-family dwelling; specify that the deed restriction runs with the land and is therefore enforceable against future property owners; and restrict the size and features of the junior accessory dwelling unit in accordance with this section.

b. The site's owner may at any time offer for rent either the single-family dwelling unit or the junior accessory dwelling unit. The site's owner shall be required to reside in ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 217
Planning & Land Use
17- 28
the single-family dwelling unit as their primary residence at any time while the junior accessory dwelling unit is occupied by a tenant.
c. A site's owner shall not allow occupancy of a junior accessory dwelling unit by a tenant for any reason, with or without payment of rent, unless the site owner maintains occupancy of the primary dwelling unit as their primary residence. d. Owner-occupancy shall not be required if the owner is a government agency, land trust, or housing organization.
e. A junior accessory dwelling unit may be rented but shall not be used for rentals of a term less than thirty (30) consecutive days.

D. Projects subject to state mandated approval. Notwithstanding anything in this code to the contrary, the Director and Building Official shall ministerially approve permits required to create any of the following within a residential or mixed-use zone:

1. One accessory dwelling unit and one junior accessory dwelling unit per lot with a proposed or existing single-family dwelling if all of the following apply:
a. The accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit is within the proposed space of a single-family dwelling or existing space of a single-family dwelling or accessory structure and may include an expansion of not more than 150 square feet beyond the same physical dimensions as the existing accessory structure. An expansion beyond the physical dimensions of the existing accessory structure shall be limited to accommodating ingress and egress.
b. The accessory dwelling unit has exterior access that is separate from the exterior entrance proposed or existing single-family dwelling.
c. The side and rear setbacks are sufficient for fire and safety. d. The junior accessory dwelling unit complies with the requirements of Government Code Section 65852.22.

2. One detached, new construction, accessory dwelling unit that does not exceed four-foot side and rear yard setbacks for a lot with a proposed or existing single-family dwelling, subject to the following requirements:
a. A total floor area limitation of not more than 800 square feet. b. A height limitation of 18 feet, plus for single family residential zoned lots an additional two feet to accommodate a roof pitch that is aligned with the roof pitch of the existing or proposed main house.

The new construction detached accessory dwelling unit in this subsection may be combined with a junior accessory dwelling unit as described in subparagraph 1 above.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 218
Planning & Land Use
17- 29

3. Not more than eight (8) detached accessory dwelling units located on a lot that has an existing multi-family dwelling, with the maximum number of allowed accessory dwelling units equal to the number of existing primary multifamily units on the lot, subject to a height limit of 18 feet and four-foot yard setbacks. If the existing multi-family dwelling has a rear or side setback of less than four feet, modification of the existing multifamily dwelling is not required as a condition of constructing the accessory dwelling unit.

4. Conversion of portions of existing multi-family dwelling structures that are not used as livable space, including, but not limited to, storage rooms, boiler rooms, passageways, attics, basements, or garages, into new accessory dwelling units, provided that each unit shall comply with state building standards for dwellings. The number of new accessory dwelling units authorized for conversion under this subsection shall not exceed 25 percent of the existing dwelling units in the multi-family dwelling structure or one new accessory dwelling unit, whichever is greater. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023; Ord. 769 N.S., 10/2023; Ord 782 N.S. 07/2025)

17.38.070 Unit size exception.

A. Exception to unit size. The Director shall approve an exception to the maximum unit size set forth in section 17.38.060 B.1 for an accessory dwelling unit upon request of an applicant in accordance with the requirements of this section. If an exception is granted, the accessory dwelling unit shall be subject to all the requirements set forth below.

If the unit includes: expansion up to 1,000
square feet
expansion to 1,200 square feet
One bedroom or less Imposition of covenants
requiring an affordable rent
level to households of low
income
Imposition of covenants requiring
an affordable rent level to
households of very low income
More than one
bedroom
N/A Imposition of covenants requiring
an affordable rent level to
households of very low income
B. Additional requirements. If an accessory dwelling unit permit with a unit size exception is approved, it is subject to the following additional requirements.

1. Rent restriction.
a. Declaration of rent restrictions. The accessory dwelling unit permit with a unit size exception shall have a condition describing the type of rent restriction applicable to the property. The rent-restriction shall be recorded in the county recorder's office, as a declaration of rent restrictions (in a form provided by the city), and will remain in effect for ten years. The ten-year period of rent restriction begins either: (a) on the date of recordation or date of final building inspection, whichever is later; or (b) according to the terms of the conditions of approval or a recorded declaration.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 219
Planning & Land Use
17- 30
If, after ten years, the termination of the recorded declaration is not automatic (by its terms), the city will record a document terminating the declaration of rent restrictions, upon the written request of the property owner. b. Affordable rent certification. An owner who has executed a declaration must submit to the city an accessory dwelling unit affordable rent certification: (i) on an annual basis, by each December 31 and as part of the annual city business license application and renewal; and (ii) upon any change in occupancy of the accessory dwelling unit. The accessory dwelling unit affordable rent certification must be on a form provided by the city and must specify whether or not the accessory dwelling unit is being occupied; the rent charged; the utilities that are included in the cost of rent; the household size of the accessory dwelling unit; the names and ages of the accessory dwelling unit occupants; the gross household income of the accessory dwelling unit household; and other information as determined appropriate by the city. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023)

17.38.075 Pre-approved Plans Incentive.

A. The Director may authorize an applicant’s use of floor plans and elevations, owned by the City of Piedmont, and approved by the City Council, Appendix A of the Piedmont Design Standards and GuidelinesChapter 3.4 of the Piedmont Objective Standards, to obtain Planning Division approval of an Accessory Dwelling Unit Permit if all of the following findings are made:

1. The design unit meets the requirements of section 17.38.060.

2. The roofing material and exterior siding material of the proposed unit are the same as that of the primary residence.

3. The plans are the same as those in Appendix Chapter 3.4 A of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines with only a 3 percent variation or less in any one dimension.

If the approval is granted, the applicant must agree to the imposition of a rent restrictions on the unit requiring that any rent for the unit be affordable to households of very low income, and the accessory dwelling unit shall be subject to all the requirements set forth below.

B. Additional requirements. If an accessory dwelling unit permit using City-owned plans in Appendix A Chapter 3.4 of the Piedmont Objective Design Standards and Guidelines is approved, it is subject to the following additional requirements.

1. Rent restriction.
a. Declaration of rent restrictions. The accessory dwelling unit permit constructed using City-owned plans shall be subject to declaration of rent restrictions (in a form provided by the city), which shall be recorded in the county recorder's office, as a declaration of rent restrictions, and will remain in effect for ten years. The ten-year period of rent restriction begins either: (a) on the date of recordation or date of final ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 220
Planning & Land Use
17- 31
building inspection, whichever is later; or (b) according to the terms of the recorded declaration.

If, after ten years, the termination of the recorded declaration is not automatic (by its terms), the city will record a document terminating the declaration of rent restrictions, upon the written request of the property owner. b. Affordable rent certification. An owner who has executed a declaration must submit to the city an accessory dwelling unit affordable rent certification: (i) on an annual basis, by each December 31 and as part of the annual city business license application and renewal; and (ii) upon any change in occupancy of the accessory dwelling unit. The accessory dwelling unit affordable rent certification must be on a form provided by the city and must specify whether or not the accessory dwelling unit is being occupied; the rent charged; the utilities that are included in the cost of rent; the household size of the accessory dwelling unit; the names and ages of the accessory dwelling unit occupants; the gross household income of the accessory dwelling unit household; and other information as determined appropriate by the city. (Ord. 769 N.S., 10/2023)

17.38.080 Unpermitted accessory and junior accessory dwelling unit.

A. An owner may apply for an accessory dwelling unit permit (or other city approval) to legalize and permit an unpermitted accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit that was constructed before January 1, 2020.

B. 1. An application to legalize an unpermitted accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit under section 17.38.080 above shall be approved if the City can make findings that the unpermitted construction complies with the standards specified in Section 17920.3 of the California Health and Safety Code. Compliance with either of the following shall not be required:
a. building standards pursuant to Article 1 (commencing with Section 17960) of Chapter 5 of Part 1.5 of Division 13 of the Health and Safety Code; and b. division 17.38 of Piedmont City Code regulating accessory dwelling units or junior accessory dwelling units, or California Government Code Section 66333 et seq., as may be amended, applicable.

2. The application shall be denied if the City finds that the accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit is in violation of standards specified in Section 17920.3 of the California Health and Safety Code.

C. This section shall not apply to a building that is deemed substandard pursuant to Section 17920.3 of the California Health and Safety Code.

D. A homeowner applying for an accessory dwelling unit permit under section 17.38.080.A above, shall not be required to pay impact fees or connection or capacity charges except when ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 221
Planning & Land Use
17- 32
utility infrastructure is required to comply with Section 17920.3 of the California Health and Safety Code and when the fee is authorized by Government Code Section 66324(e).

E. Upon receiving an application pursuant to section 17.38.080.A, an inspector from the City shall inspect the unit for compliance with health and safety standards and provide recommendations to comply with health and safety standards necessary to obtain a permit. If the inspector finds noncompliance with health and safety standards, the City shall not penalize an applicant for having the unpermitted accessory dwelling unit or junior accessory dwelling unit, shall provide in writing how the building can be bought into compliance, and shall approve necessary permits to correct noncompliance with health and safety standards. (Ord. 777 N.S., 01/2025)

17.38.090 Removal of Owner Occupancy Restrictions.

A. The Director shall be authorized to remove any previously imposed owner-occupancy requirements imposed via deed restriction on any accessory dwelling unit previously permitted, by recording any appropriate documents rescinding the restriction, if the following criteria are met:
i. the applicant shall provide a copy of the original recorded deed restriction. ii. the applicant agrees to an imposition of covenants either on the accessory dwelling unit or on the primary dwelling unit requiring an affordable rent level to households of very low-income for a period of 15 years, which shall be recorded in the county recorder's office, as a declaration of rent restrictions (in a form provided by the city), and will remain in effect for fifteen years. The fifteen-year period of rent restriction shall begin on the date set forth in the recorded declaration.

If, after fifteen years, the termination of the recorded declaration is not automatic (by its terms), the city will record a document terminating the declaration of rent restrictions, upon the written request of the property owner.

B. A property owner that receives removal of owner occupancy restrictions shall comply with certification requirements related to affordable rent set forth in section 17.38.070 B.1.b.

This section does not apply to owner-occupancy deed restrictions imposed on Junior Accessory Dwelling Units. (Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023)

17.38.100 Separate Conveyance.

The City shall allow an accessory dwelling unit to be sold or conveyed separately from the primary residence to a qualified buyer if all of the criteria listed under Government Code Section 65852.26 are met. (Ord. 747 N.S., 02/2020; Ord. 768 N.S., 01/2023) ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 222
Planning & Land Use
17- 33
DIVISION 17.46 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FACILITIES
Sections:

17.46.010 Purpose

17.46.020 Definitions

17.46.030 Applicability; Exemptions

17.46.040 Location; City site agreement

17.46.050 Permit; Application.

17.46.060 Independent Technical Review

17.46.070 Standards

17.46.080 Review Body; Findings

17.46.090 Batch Processing

17.46.100 Appeals

17.46.010 Purpose.

The purpose of this division is to provide a comprehensive set of standards for the development and installation of wireless communication facilities. The regulations are designed to facilitate the appropriate deployment of wireless networks and improvements to existing wireless network infrastructure to provide coverage and capacity throughout the City. These standards create a clear set of design requirements and application processes that allow wireless carriers to deploy their networks effectively, while not detracting from the aesthetics of the streetscapes, buildings, light standards, utility poles, and structures inside and outside of the public right-of-way in the City of Piedmont. These requirements aim to protect public health, safety, and community welfare while balancing the benefits of robust wireless services with the community’s architectural character, aesthetics, and landscaping of the City. The purpose of these standards is not to regulate what technologies are being deployed, but to regulate the manner in which wireless equipment is deployed to ensure that such are not detrimental or injurious to the public health, safety, and general welfare; and that the aesthetic appearance shown in approved plans is continuously preserved. This division applies to applications for approval of the installation of new or modified wireless communication facilities, including applications previously received by the city but not yet approved, disapproved or conditionally approved by a final city decision.

17.46.020 Definitions.

In this division:

Antenna means an apparatus designed for the purpose of emitting radiofrequency (RF) signal, to be operated or operating from a fixed location pursuant to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) authorization, for the provision of personal wireless service and any commingled public information services. For purposes of this definition, the term antenna does not include an unintentional radiator, mobile station, or device authorized under part 15 of title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations.

Base station means an authorized wireless communications facility that connects wireless equipment and a communications network. The term does not encompass a tower as defined in this subpart or any equipment associated with a tower.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 223
Planning & Land Use
17- 34
Batch processing means a type of permit submittal that consists of: (1) two or more WCF permit applications for “substantially similar WCF project sites,” (2) the applications are submitted at the same time; and (3) by the same applicant.

Collocation means multiple telecommunications service providers using the same structure, including new and existing infrastructure. A new or replacement utility pole, streetlight, or tower is not a collocation and shall be reviewed as a new facility.

Concealment means a wireless facility that is covered, blended, disguised, camouflaged, or integrated to make a wireless facility look like something other than a wireless facility (as defined by FCC Declaratory Ruling FCC-CIRC2006-003). Concealment includes incorporating stealth design (see definition below).

Camouflage means designed to mask or blend with the surrounding environment in such a manner to render it generally unrecognizable as a wireless facility to the casual observer. By way of example, a wireless communication facility may be camouflaged in a faux tree, faux bush, flagpole, or designed in a manner to be compatible with the appurtenant architecture, building, or natural surroundings.

DAS means distributed antenna system. DAS is a series of antennas that are usually lower power that have a connected fiber network to provide coverage to a specific location. 6409(a) Eligible Facilities Request refers to section 6409(a) of the Middle Class Tax Relief and Job Creation Act of 2012 (Spectrum Act). Congress provided that state and local government review may not deny, and shall approve, Eligible Facilities Requests to modify existing wireless towers or base stations that do not substantially change the physical dimensions of the structure, defeat the concealment element, nor violate certain conditions associated with the siting approval.

Equipment cabinet means a cabinet or structure used to house equipment associated with a wireless communication facility.

FCC means Federal Communications Commission.

FCC Shot Clock or shot clock means the FCC’s presumptively reasonable time frame, accounting for any tolling or voluntary extension, or unusual circumstances justifying additional time, within which the City generally must act on a duly filed request for authorization in connection with a personal wireless service facility, as such time frame is defined by the FCC and as may be amended or superseded. For batched applications, the longest shot clock applicable to any small wireless facility in the batch shall be applicable to the entire batch (e.g., in a batch with four collocations and one new/replacement pole, the FCC Shot Clock would be 90 days for the entire batch even though the collocation applications would be 60 days if submitted on an individual basis)
GO95 is CPUC General Order 95 which outlines rules for overhead electric line construction.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 224
Planning & Land Use
17- 35
Macrocell Site means any WCF that is not a small wireless facility or Eligible Facilities Request.

Monopole means a single free-standing pole, post, or similar structure, used to support equipment associated with a wireless communication facility.

Public right-of-way means a public highway, street, alley, sidewalk, or parkway that is subject to Public Utilities Code section 7901.

Related equipment means equipment ancillary to the transmission and reception of voice and data via radio frequencies. Related equipment may include, but is not limited to, cable, conduit and connectors.

Service provider means an authorized provider of wireless communication services, including a neutral host carrier.

Shroud is a physical barrier that encloses and conceals a WCF located atop a pole or on a structure or line. Examples include a radome.

Small Cell Facility has the same meaning as a small wireless facility, as set forth in 47 C.F.R.

1.6002(l).

Stealth Design means using concealment so that a wireless communications facility is designed to look like something other than a wireless tower or base station. Stealth design includes, but is not limited to:
a. Integrating a WCF within the architecture of an existing structure outside the public right-of-way;
b. Using a new structure built to conceal the WCF in its entirety, such as a stealth water tower or clock tower outside of the public right-of-way. c. Using a new architectural feature added to an existing structure outside of the public right-of-way to conceal the WCF; such as a faux vent, faux chimney, or faux penthouse. d. Using an architectural feature added to an existing or proposed structure in the public right-of-way to conceal the WCF in its entirety such as a protrusion on a streetlight or utility pole, new streetlight that integrates wireless equipment in its entirety, a new bus stop shelter, a faux trash can enclosure adjacent to an existing or proposed structure, or traffic signage added to a streetlight to cover and conceal WCF equipment.

Substantial change means it meets the requirements in the eligible facilities checklist, outlined in section 8.03.03 of the Piedmont Design Standards and Guidelines titled 6409 (a) Eligible Facilities Request Checklist
Toll, tolled, or tolling is defined as days that are not included in the calculation of the deadline for action by a jurisdiction due to incomplete application materials or voluntary agreement between the wireless service provider and the jurisdiction.

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 225
Planning & Land Use
17- 36
Tower means a structure built for the sole or primary purpose of supporting Federal Communications Commission-licensed or authorized antennas and their associated facilities, including structures that are constructed for wireless communications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul, and the associated site improvements.

Sidewalk vault is a base station for equipment in an underground facility located in a cabinet beneath the sidewalk.

Wireless communications facility (WCF) means any facility constructed, installed, or operated for wireless service. Wireless communications facility includes, but is not limited to, antennas or other types of equipment for the transmission or receipt of such signals, telecommunications towers or similar structures supporting such equipment, related accessory equipment, equipment buildings, parking areas, and other accessory development. "Wireless communications facility" does not mean any of the following:
a. A facility that qualifies as an amateur station as defined by the FCC, 47 C.F.R. Part 97, of the Commission's Rules, or its successor regulation.
b. An antenna facility that is subject to the FCC Over-The-Air-Receiving Devices rule, 47 C.F.R. Section 1.4000, or any successor regulation, including, but not limited to, direct-tohome satellite dishes that are less than one meter in diameter, TV antennas used to receive television broadcast signals and wireless cable antennas. c. Portable radios and devices including, but not limited to, hand-held, vehicular, or other portable receivers, transmitters or transceivers, cellular phones, CB radios, emergency services radio, and other similar portable devices as determined by the city manager. d. Telecommunications facilities owned and operated by any government agency. e. Telecommunications facilities owned and operated by any emergency medical care provider. f. Mobile services providing public information coverage of news events of a temporary nature.
g. Any wireless communications facilities exempted from the Piedmont City Code by federal law or state law.

17.46.030 Applicability; Exemptions.

A. Applicability. This division 17.46 applies to all wireless communication facilities, except those exempted in subsection B below (though other permit requirements may apply).

B. Exemptions. The following facilities are exempt from this division:

ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 226
Planning & Land Use
17- 37

1. Wireless communication facility for which a federal or state statute or regulation exempts the facility from the imposition of the permit requirements of this division but only to the extent of such exemption.

2. Satellite dish antenna, less than one meter in diameter for receiving radio or television stations by the property owners, occupants or guests.

3. City-owned or operated communication facilities.

4. Communication equipment located completely inside a structure, not visible from the outside, whose purpose is solely to provide wireless communications within the same structure, including Wi-Fi hotspots and access points, with no alteration to the exterior of the structure.

17.46.040 Location; City site agreement.

A. Priority for location.

1. Preference for Zone B, Zone D, and public right of way sites. In order of preference, wireless communication facilities should be located (i) on publicly-owned property outside of the public right of way in Zone B, (ii) property in Zone D, or (iii) public rights-of-way.

2. Alternative locations. Any location for a wireless site outside of Zone B not on publicly-owned property, or not with a public right of way will be considered according to the following priority:
a. The applicant must first attempt to locate a site in Zone D, the commercial zone, that is not used for residential purposes.
b. If it is infeasible to locate in Zone D, the applicant must attempt to locate at a non-residential property in Zone A, C or E.

3. General. In all cases, the preference, in order, is to locate on or in an existing structure which the wireless communication facility can be concealed; or to collocate on an existing wireless communication facility with a stealth design; or to locate on a new structure that can be incorporated in a stealth manner compatible with the surrounding area.

4. Prohibition. Wireless communication facilities are prohibited on properties that contain a residential use, regardless of zone.

B. City site agreement.

1. Consideration by staff. If the applicant wishes to locate on city-owned property or facilities, the applicant must discuss its desired location(s) with staff (Public Works Director and Planning & Building Director, as appropriate) before the submittal of an ATTACHMENT E Agenda Report Page 227
Planning & Land Use
17- 38
application. If the location appears to be generally feasible, city staff will negotiate the principal terms for a proposed site agreement with the applicant, spelling out in detail the specific facilities to be located on city property or facilities, the term of the agreement, the compensation to be provided the city, and other terms.

← All documents from this meeting